Universal Design for Learning and Accessibility in Education Literature
"National Association of the Deaf." American Annals of the Deaf.
v148 n2 p203 Sum 2003.
This listing provides directory information for the national and state offices
of the National Association of the Deaf, the oldest and largest nonprofit organization
safeguarding the accessibility and civil rights of individuals with deafness
and hearing impairments across a broad range of areas including education, employment,
health care, and telecommunications. (Author/CR)
"Immediate Transition from High School to College." Education Statistics
Quarterly. v1 n2 p71-73 Sum 1999.
Presents information on high school completers going directly from high school
to college. The percentage enrolling reflects the accessibility of higher education
and the value high school completers place on attending college. Between 1985
and 1996, the percentage of high school completers going directly to college
increased from 58% to 65%. (SLD)
"Excerpts from the California Department of Education's "School Site
Selection and Approval Guide"." Educational Facility Planner. v31
n5 p10-12 1993.
A screening and ranking procedure for selecting school sites in California is
based on the criteria of safety, environment, size and shape, location, soils,
topography, accessibility, utilities, political implications, public services,
cost, and availability. An explanation of these criteria is included along with
a list of secondary criteria. Appended are two work sheets. (MLF)
"Programs and Activities Receiving or Benefiting from Federal Financial
Assistance: Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Handicap. Part II, DHEW, Office
of the Secretary." Federal Register. v41 n138 p29548-67 July 16 1976:
23.
Reported are the rules which the Office for Civil Rights of the Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare proposes with regard to nondiscrimination on
the basis of handicap in programs and activities receiving or benefiting from
federal financial assistance. The proposed rules in Part 84, which effectuates
section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 as amended by section 111 (a)
of the Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1974, are divided into six major subparts.
Subparts A (General Provisions), B (Employment Practices), and C (Program Accessibility)
apply to all programs benefiting from federal financial assistance; while the
remaining subparts contain more specific requirements and prohibitions applicable
to three major types of programs: preschool, elementary, and adult education
programs (Subpart D); postsecondary education programs (Subpart E); and health
and social service programs (Subpart F). Explained is the fact that the practices
of other recipients of funds are subject to the general nondiscrimination provisions.
A discussion of the public response to the issues is included, with particular
attention given to the comments on the inclusion of mentally restored persons
and rehabilitated addicts as beneficiaries of the regulation. (IM)
"Women--Their Role in Rural Development." Literacy Discussion.
6, 4, 41-6, Win 75/76.
A review of a report based upon replies from a questionnaire sent to 78 countries
regarding the access of females to education in the context of rural development
is presented. Rural conditions, women as agents of development, their accessibility
to education, and suggested types of training are discussed. (LH)
"Literacy for Blind and Visually Impaired School-Age Students." RE:view.
v22 n3 p159-63 Fall 1990.
This position paper of the Council of Executives of American Residential Schools
for the Visually Handicapped calls for stronger emphasis on instruction in literacy
skills; individualized selection of the mode of reading, writing, and computing;
technical assistance; continuing education; emphasis on literacy skill teaching
methodology; and accessibility of adapted educational materials. (JDD)
"Impact on Learning Award, 2002." School Planning & Management.
v41 n10 pIOL1-19 Oct 2002.
Describes winners of the title award, K-12 school facilities that have solved
real-world problems through design, engineering, and technology solutions. Winners
were named in the following categories: accessibility, accommodating technology,
energy efficient/hi-performance buildings, furniture and equipment for learning,
historic preservation, safety and security through design, and specialized learning
environment. Includes floor plans and photographs. (EV)
"1997 Education Outlook." School Planning and Management. v36 n1
p21-27 Jan 1997.
Comments by five industry leaders on the major trends, concerns, or forces that
will affect education this year. Topics include planning schools to serve the
community, transforming school business officials into visionaries and communicators,
administrator accessibility, school boards as catalysts of change, and community-based
transportation. (MLF)
"Access to the General Curriculum: Questions and Answers." TEACHING
Exceptional Children. v34 n2 p84-85 Nov-Dec 2001.
Questions and answers address: (1) connections between access of students with
disabilities to the general curriculum and Universal design for Learning; (2)
the changing role of the special educator; (3) differences between assistive
technology and Universal Design for Learning; and (4) guidelines for increasing
curricular accessibility. (DB)
(1969). Descriptive Case Studies of Nine Elementary School Media Centers in
Three Inner Cities. Title II Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965.
School Library Resources, Textbooks, and Other Printed and Published Instructional
Materials: 200.
These studies were conducted to determine whether the introduction of media
services and materials in elementary schools previously without them had significant
impact on the instructional programs of the schools. Within each study, information
is organized under: (1) community background; (2) school background information
that affects the school media program; (3) the instructional program; (4) the
media center staff; (5) media center facilities and equipment; (6) materials;
(7) expenditure for media center resources; (8) utilization and accessibility
of materials; and (9) impact of the media center's program. Based on the reports
of the interviewing teams and the responses of principals, media specialists,
teachers and pupils interviewed, a summary makes recommendations for furthering
the aims of the program. Appendices provide lists of popular material and a
list of books in use which were published before 1960. (JY)
(1969). Emphasis on Excellence in School Media Programs. Descriptive Case Studies
Special-Purpose Grant Programs: 227.
Eight elementary high schools in New York, North Carolina, Oregon, California,
and Kansas were awarded $635,253.00 in Federal funds to develop demonstration
media programs. This stimulated, directly and indirectly, additional professional
and clerical media personnel, provision of new media services at the school
district level, increased school district budgets for media programs, improved
facilities for school media centers, improved accessibility of materials and
services, provision of new kinds of materials, and provision of materials production
centers and electronic information retrieval capabilities. Interviews with students,
teachers, media specialists, principals, and visitors showed some degree of
positive change in curriculum and instruction, utilization of materials by teachers,
school and community attitudes, pupil behavior, and the Media Center Materials
Collection itself as a result of the funding. (MM)
(1975). Provision for the Physically Disabled: A Report to the Connecticut Commission
for Higher Education by a Resource Group on the Physically Disabled in Connecticut
Postsecondary Education: 93.
Presented is a report to the Connecticut Commission for Higher Education by
an independent resource group on the accessibility of Connecticut postsecondary
education for the blind, deaf, and physically disabled. The report considers
the following provisions for the physically handicapped: acquiring funding for
removal of physical and communication barriers as provided in the 1968 Ammendment
to the Vocational Rehabilitation Act; the requirements for accessibility to
buildings for the disabled; difficulty in establishing data on the number of
disabled; nonphysical barriers in colleges such as communication barriers, minority
affiliation, and the admissions process; the absence of minorities as students
in Connecticut colleges including the blind and deaf; inadequate precollege
preparation; supportive services such as volunteers, testing arrangements, and
preregistration for classes; and future provisions for disabled persons. Appended
are responses to a mobility survey; the Vocational Rehabilitation Act (Public
Law 93-112), excerpts from Trio Program Manual, excerpts from Public Law 90-576
on vocational education, and charts on the accessibility of education facilities.
(PT)
(1977). The White House Conference on Handicapped Individuals. Volume One: Awareness
Papers: 452.
The compilation of 24 papers provides information concerning the health, social,
economic, educational, and special concerns of handicapped U.S. citizens. Included
are the following titles and authors: "Research" (J. Weston); "Application
of Technology to Handicapping Conditions and for Handicapped Individuals"
(W. Ayers); "Rehabilitation Engineering" (M. Parsons and M. Rappaport);
"Early Diagnosis and Early Intervention" (D. Whitehouse); "Prevention
of Disease and Disability" (W. Malone); "Treatment" (C. Swinyard
et. al); "Attitudes of the General Public Toward Handicapped Individuals"
(H. Yuker); "Psychological Adjustment of Handicapped Individuals and Their
Families" (J. Bardach); "Recreation" (D. Park); "Participation
in Cultural Activities" (V. Cassiano); "Architectural Accessibility"
(R. Mace); "Transportation Accessibility" (H. Goodkin); "Communication--Techniques,
Systems, Devices" (P. Scherer); "Employment" (R. Sale); "Economic
Concerns of Handicapped Individuals" (M. Berkowitz et. al); "Full
Educational Opportunities for Handicapped Individuals" (Council for Exceptional
Children); "Problems of the Severely and Multiply Handicapped" (F.
Fay); "Community and Residential Housing" (L. Frieden); "Service
Delivery Systems" (C. Hoehne); "Civil Rights and Addendum" (L.
Rigdon); "Unique Problems of Handicapped Minorities" (R. Wakabayaski
et. al); "Unique Problems of Disabled Veterans" (J. Maye); and "Unique
Problems of the Handicapped Aging" (D. Davis and O. Onyemelukwe). (SBH)
(1977). The White House Conference on Handicapped Individuals: Delegate Workbook.
Workshop V: Social Concerns (3). Architectural/Transportation/Communications:
167.
The fifth of eight delegate workbooks prepared for the May, 1977 White House
Conference on Handicapped Individuals contains ballots for the workshop on the
architectural, transportation and communication problems of handicapped persons.
The ballots are designed to enable delegates to assign priorities to various
issues and proposals in a way that reflects conclusions of state and territorial
conferences. The following issues are among those considered: enforcement of
existing architectural accessibility requirements; accessible housing for handicapped
persons; paratransit (door to door service) for disabled persons; pricing of
specially equipped personal vehicles; training programs for communication facilitators;
and standards for communications systems and devices. For each such topic, multiple
proposals, to which delegates must assign priorities, are listed. For example,
suggested ways in which handicapped individuals can increase architectural accessibility
include compliance boards, public education programs, citizen review groups
and political action. (GW)
(1978). The White House Conference on Handicapped Individuals. Volume Three:
Implementation Plan. District of Columbia: 303.
The document is a guide to legislative and administrative implementation of
the recommendations of the White House Conference on Handicapped Individuals.
The report is divided into the following three sections: (1) priority action
items, such as formulation of national policy and consumer involvement in planning
and decision making; (2) major findings, for instance, the cross cutting concern
for public awareness and the need for attitudinal change; and (3) 15 areas in
which action is recommended, displayed in terms of the type of action (federal,
state, or local), and, in the case of federal action, the agency responsible
and a target completion date. Following is a list of the areas covered in the
document: architectural accessibility and safety, attitudes and awareness, civil
rights, communication, cultural and leisure activities, economics, education,
government organizations and practices, health, housing, services to disabled
veterans, special populations--handicapped aged persons, minority handicapped
persons, and transportation. Appendixes include: a description of the White
House Conference Papers (volumes I-III), a glossary of acronyms and terms, a
general cross index, and a list of the directors of the State White House Conferences.
(PHR)
(1982). Parent Education Programs and Support Services in Edmonton. Summary.
Canada Alberta: 24.
Major funders of parent education services in Edmonton, Alberta, requested a
study to determine what additional parent education programs/support services
were required for the city, and who should be responsible for funding and delivery
of these programs/services. While a detailed description of the study's design
and results is provided in a separate publication, this report includes the
only summary of the study's recommendations and the major support findings upon
which these recommendations were established. Related recommendations are categorized
together and are listed in the order of priority within each category. These
categories are: support services, parent (target) groups, program/service content,
educational approaches, accessibility and attractiveness, and jurisdiction and
funding. (MP)
(1993). Statewide School Facilities Needs Assessment. Idaho: 810.
Legislation enacted in 1991 called for a comprehensive assessment of Idaho school
facilities and established the Statewide School Facilities Needs Assessment
Committee. This resulting report identifies the nature and extent of Idaho school
facility needs. The assessment included an inventory of all school facilities
used for instruction; an inventory of technology used by the schools; and an
assessment of the physical condition of the schools, including suitability for
educational purposes, ability to accommodate new technology, accessibility,
and adaptability for alternative and non-traditional uses. In addition, the
assessment calculated the capacity of existing permanent school buildings relative
to current and projected enrollment using conservative but realistic space-use
criteria. Cost estimates were prepared covering repair, renovation, and modernization
of existing buildings; adaptation of buildings to effectively use new technology;
and provision of additional space to appropriately house existing enrollment.
Future enrollment in Idaho schools was also forecast to provide an indication
of the extent of future facility needs. In accomplishing the assessment, the
Committee developed a comprehensive database of information which was provided
to the Department of Education for its maintenance and continuing use, along
with a computer model to estimate space needs. (Eleven appendices, which constitute
the majority of the document, contain assessment-related materials.) (EV)
(1995). Netting college info. American Libraries, American Library Association.
26: 183.
Informs on Peterson Guides, which is inaugurating the Education Center on the
Internet. Accessibility of the Education Center through the World Wide Web;
Information provided on the system, including searchable data and narrative
information on educational institutions in the United States.
(1997). Regulatory Negotiation Committee on Accessibility Guidelines for Play
Facilities. Final Report. District of Columbia: 21.
The Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board is responsible
for developing accessibility guidelines under the Americans with Disabilities
Act of 1990, including play facilities. This report provides a section-by-section
analysis of the proposed guidelines, and exceptions, for play areas. Guidelines
include ground and elevated level play components; accessible routes; clear
width and height; ramps, handrails, and transfer systems; maneuvering space;
reach ranges; accessible surfaces; and soft-contained play structures. Definitions
of play area terms conclude the report. (GR)
(1997). USA TODAY provides an electronic teacher resource center... Curriculum
Administrator, Professional Media Group, LLC. 31: 38.
Reports that `USA TODAY' has created Classline Online, an electronic teacher
resource center, located on the World Wide Web. Accessibility of the site; Features
of the site; Information on the company's Classline education program.
(1997). News in brief: A Washington roundup. Education Week, Editorial
Projects in Education. 16: 23.
Presents news briefs related to education in the United States. Department of
Education and National Science Foundation's pledge to contribute $800,000 for
the World Wide Web Consortium's Web Accessibility Initiative that will make
Internet accessible to students and adults with disabilities; Naming of David
L. Beaulieu as director of federal education programs for American Indian children.
(1998). A Taste of the Web [and] Cooperative Electronic Library on Disability
(CO-NET). [CD-ROM] 11th Edition. Wisconsin: 0.
This resource consists of two separate but related CD-ROM products packaged
together by the publisher. "A Taste of the Web" is a collection of
disability-related information and links gathered from selected sites on the
World Wide Web. Using a Web browser, the user can explore the information on
the CD just as if they were connected to the actual Web sites. The information
on this CD is organized into three main areas: (1) the Trace Center Web site,
containing information about universal design and computer access; (2) Disability-related
Web sites, containing information on specific types of disability (e.g., blindness)
and on federal disability policy; (3) Unusual and interesting Web sites (only
short descriptions of each site are provided). The second CD is entitled the
"Cooperative Electronic Library on Disability" and is attributed to
the "Cooperative Database Distribution Network for Assistive Technology
(CO-NET). The information on this CD is organized into four groups: (1) Products--DOS-ABLEDATA
describes over 23,000 products for people with disabilities. DOS-TRACEBASE describes
1300 assistive technology products; (2) Services--Some 15 "Cooperative
Service Directories" (CSD) list disability services in various states and
regions; (3) Information Resources--Six "Publications, Media, and Materials"
(PMM) databases, including the 51,000-item REHABDATA, contain descriptions of
books, articles, videos, etc., on disability topics; (4) Text Documents--the
"Text Document Library" contains the full text of over 300 disability-related
documents. (DB)
(1998). Spec for disabled surfers. InternetWeek, CMP Media LLC: 17.
Reports that the World Wide Web Consortium has issued the first public working
draft of a document to guide page builders in construction Web sites accessible
to disabled persons. Development of guidelines as part of the Web Accessibility
Initiative; Key points in the draft document.
(1998). Accessibility for all. PC Week, ZDNet. 15: 80.
Discusses the importance of creating Web sites which are accessible by users
with physical or cognitive disabilities. Why information technology managers
and Web-design teams need to understand the need to maximize access; The Web
Accessibility Initiative Group from the World Wide Web Consortium; Cross-over
benefits of access technologies.
(1998). Free E-mail for students, teachers and parents. School Planning &
Management. 37: 18.
Focuses on the free electronic mail service, N2Mail accounts, a vehicle for
instant communication designed by the American School Directory and WhoWhere?
Incorporated, for students, parents or teachers in the United States, with accessibility
to the Internet. Web site where persons can register; Features of the service;
Objective of the program; How the program works.
(1998). Online service to deliver training around the globe. T H E Journal,
T.H.E. Journal. 25: 18.
Looks into the collaboration of Durand Communications and the Electronic University
Network (EUN) to create and market the World Knowledge Network (WKN), an online
service that is devoted to online education and training. Accessibility of WKN
to a global audience on the World Wide Web; EUN's focus on distance learning
solutions for universities, public schools and corporate training centers.
(1998). Cast your net ever wider. Times Educational Supplement, Times
Supplements Ltd.: 23.
Opinion. Presents information pertaining to education in Great Britain, with
emphasis on the British Government move to implement the National Grid for Learning,
an on-line information service, which will link schools to the Internet. Accessibility
of the Web site; Features of the site; Indication that students can link up
with schools in foreign countries; Importance of the Internet; Additional related
information.
(1999). Georgia Environmental Education Teacher Resource Guide. Georgia:
135.
This teacher resource guide provides a listing of resources available in Georgia
for teaching students about the environment. Resource regions are divided into
North Georgia, Coastal Georgia, Middle Georgia, and the Piedmont. Each listing
includes offerings, educational focus, history/comments, handicap accessibility,
and directions for each site described. (CCM)
(1999). School issues wearable computers. School Planning & Management.
38: 21.
Reports the issuance of wearable computers at Celebration School in Celebration,
Florida. Benefits of the wearable computers; Features of the iButton; Installation
of electronic door locks; Accessibility to Web page from any computer on the
Internet with iButton.
(2000). Organizational Change. Symposium 11. [Concurrent Symposium Session at
AHRD Annual Conference, 2000.]. Louisiana: 27.
This packet contains three papers from a symposium on organizational change.
The first paper, "Kaizen Blitz: Rapid Learning to Facilitate Immediate
Organizational Improvements" (Robert B. Gudgel, Fred C. Feitler), describes
rapid and dramatic improvement in the organizational performance of a manufacturing
firm after use of a series of kaizen blitzes (rapid change emphasizing quality).
Participants in these blitzes and other employees and managers describe their
experiences and the quantitative and qualitative results. A preliminary analysis
of the theoretical basis for a successful kaizen blitz is offered. The second
paper, "Organisation Identity: Exploring a 'New' Avenue for Intervention
and Performance Improvement" (Christian L. van Tonder), reports on a study
that clarified the nature of the various concepts of corporate identity and
established a theoretical framework for researching organization identity. The
results of structured interviews with 153 executives from 10 companies indicate
strong relations between organization identity, specific organizational attributes,
and organizational performance. The final paper, "Identification of Critical
Work Environment Variables for Quality Performance in a Service Organization"
(Constantine Kontoghiorghes, Deborah Dembeck), identifies the critical work
environment variables for quality performance in an organization, including
satisfaction with internal processes; commitment of peers toward quality; having
easy accessibility to others in the organization; existence of few bureaucratic
barriers to get the job done; effective communication channels within and between
work teams; and achievement of ISO 9001. The papers contain reference lists.
(KC)
(2000). Partnership for Vocational Education and Training. Paper Presentations:
Session E. Hong Kong: 120.
This document contains 18 papers from the partnership for vocational education
and training (VET) section of an international conference on VET for lifelong
learning in the information era. The following are papers are included: "School,
TAFE (Technical and Further Education), and University Links, in Pursuit of
a Seamless Pathway" (Robert Player); "Work-Based Training: Experiences
of Student Interns" (Marcelle Hardy, Carmen Parent, Johanne Forget); "A
New Model for Workforce Development: University of Nevada Las Vegas Educator
Externship Program" (Sterling Saddler, Gina M. Toth, Lisa M. Bybee); "Workplace
Learning as an Investment in Human Capital" (Johanna Lasonen, Reijo Parikka);
"Supporting Lifelong Learning; The New Integrated Scottish Qualifications
System" (Maida Grant); "Key Policy Issues in the Promotion of Information
Technology in Vocational Education: Some Lessons from the Five-Year Strategy
in Hong Kong" (Kathleen S.K. Ng); " Vocational Education and Training
for Operators of Modern Enterprises" (Qinxiang Gao, Meichi Huang, Heping
Yu); "The Condition and Competency of Multi-Entrances for Personnel Training
of Industrial Design Engineer in Taiwan" (Jui-che Tu); "Establishment
of the Advanced Printing Technology Centre at Hong Kong Institute of Vocational
Education (Kwun Tong)" (Lawrence W. Chan); "Profile of SME (Small
and Medium Enterprise) Support in Hong Kong and the Setting Up of the Business
Start-up Centre" (Robin Wong); "Attach Strategic Importance to High
Quality Vocational and Technical Education" (Shengyun Yang); "Cross
Disciplinary Continuing Professional Development" (Sai Hong Ko); "Attitudes
of University Faculty Members toward Students with Disabilities" (Marie
F. Kraska); "Mobility, Flexibility and Accessibility of Postsecondary Education
in Hong Kong" (Shui-Kin Chan); "Vocational Education in Engineering
in the Information Age" (C.W. Woo, Alan S.T. Tang, S.T. Poposka); "The
Engineering Graduate Training Scheme and New Technology Training Scheme in Hong
Kong" (T.L. Ng, Gary M.Y. Wong); "Developing a Competitive Program
to Cope with the 3C (Change, Competitive, Complex) Trend in Industry" (S.T.
Tsai, Shu-Hsiao Tsen); and "How Effective Are Our Teaching Methods for
Vocational Education" (Yik-lung Wong). Most papers contain substantial
bibliographies. (MN)
(2000). ABC-CLIO Launches Two New Web Sites. Information Today, Information
Today Inc. 17: 34.
Reports on the release of educational Web sites from ABC-CLIO, as of December,
2000. Features of the American Government Website, including current-event coverage,
hyperlinks, accessibility from school or home; How the sites are aimed at students,
educators and librarians; Features of the State Geography Website, including
daily news wire stories, archived articles and primary source documents.
(2000). Net Learning. Multimedia Schools, Information Today Inc. 7:
14.
Reports on developments concerning the Internet and education in the United
States as of September 2000. Availability of Web sites providing social studies
resources; Collaborative learning adventures offering 6th-12th grade students
an opportunity to work in virtual teams using the Internet to solve real-world
problems; Accessibility of Classroom Connect's Quest Interactive Expeditions
on Quest Channel.
(2000). Economic development Website helps put cities on the map. Nation's
Cities Weekly. 23: 5.
Reports on the Web site of Memphis, Tennessee-based American Community Network.
Provision of detailed and comparative data on cities and counties; Enhancement
of Web accessibility.
(2000). Channel into the Internet. T H E Journal, T.H.E. Journal. 28:
44.
Announces the launching of electronic-Learning Web site Blackboard.com by Blackboard
Inc. in the United States. Importance of the Web site in enhancing student-teachers
interaction; Accessibility of the web page; Details on the site accessible channels;
Use of CourseSites for online courses development; Relevance of Blackboard Communities
in online discussions.
(2001). Post proceedings of the World Conference on Universal Design.
Seoul, Korea, Yonsei University Press.
(2001). News & Views. Dr. Dobb's Journal: Software Tools for the Professional
Programmer, Miller Freeman Inc. 26: 18.
Presents updates on the computer industry as of January 1, 2001. Growth of World
Wide Web accessibility; Information on an algorithm for genetic research, developed
by researchers at Israel's Weizmann Institute; Award received by the creators
of the software MP3.
(2001). WebMathematica. Journal of Chemical Education. 78: 1607.
Introduces the WebMathematica, a revolutionary product that merges the computational
power of Mathematica with convenience and accessibility of the Web by Wolfram
Research, Inc. Advantages of the software to users; Impact of webMathematica
on the academic and educational communities; Specifications.
(2001). THE WORLD WIDE WEB FOR ALL INFORMATION SEEKERS. Library Technology
Reports, American Library Association. 37: 35.
Discusses the accessibility of the World Wide Web for people with disabilities.
Liability of inaccessible Web sites; Laws that encourage Web site developers
and designers to add accessibility accommodations, like wheelchair ramps Braille
location signage and closed captioning of telecasts; Findings of a survey, conducted
by Judy Heim, columnist for `PC World' magazine, of major shopping, search,
auction, news and financial Web sites; Accessibility concerns of Judy Brewer
of the Web Accessibility Initiative.
(2001). The challenges. Plant Engineering, Reed Business Information.
55: 64.
Describes the challenges in implementing application service providers (ASPs)
in the United States. Importance of understanding ASP pricing models; Examination
of the viability of ASP solution; Significance of architecture of vendor solution
and data center on web accessibility.
(2001). STARSHIP 2040. Science Teacher. 68: 72.
Focuses on the launch of Starship 2040 Web site by the National Aeronautics
and Space Administration (NASA) in the United States. Features of the Web site;
Highlights of the Starship 2040 exhibit at the site; Accessibility of information
on NASA education and technology sites.
(2001). Access to the General Curriculum: Questions and Answers. Teaching
Exceptional Children, Council for Exceptional Children. 34: 84.
Presents a question and answer on accessibility to the general curriculum through
computers. Correlation between general curriculum and Universal Design for Learning;
Effect of mandate on Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, Amendments
1997 on role of special educator; Differences between assisstive technology
and Universal Design for learning.
(2001). New Brain Research and Next Stage Technologies Draw Fifteen Education
Associations to a... Teaching Exceptional Children, Council for Exceptional
Children. 33: 92.
Presents highlights of the National Center for Accessing the Curriculum's (NCAC)
workshops about electronic text in schools and inclusive education on October
12, 2000. Description of the Universal Design for Learning; Cooperative agreement
between the NCAC and the Center for Applied Special Technology in Peabody, Massachusetts.
(2002). Proceedings of the Annual Meeting of the Association for Education in
Journalism and Mass Communication (85th, Miami, Florida, August 5-8, 2002).
Visual Communication Division. South Carolina: 214.
The Visual Communication Division of the proceedings contains the following
7 papers: "Photography Editors as Gatekeepers: Choosing Between Publishing
or Self-Censoring Disturbing Images of 9-11" (Renee Martin Kratzer and
Brian Kratzer); "Jane Campion's 'The Piano': The Female Gaze, the Speculum
and the Chora within the H(y)st(e)rical Film" (Jaime Bihlmeyer); "Newspaper
Photo Editors' Perceptions of Women Photojournalists" (Ken Heinen and Mark
Popovich); "Sex Appeals That Appeal: The Moderating Role of Women's Sexual
Self-Schema in the Accessibility of Sexual Constructs in Memory" (John
Davies, He Zhu and Brian Brantley); "Perceptions, Exceptions, and Stereotypes:
Visual Representation and the 'Monster's Ball'" (Yolanda R. Cal); "Visual
Components of Source Credibility for Non-Profit Organizations on the World Wide
Web" (Linda Jean Kensicki); and "Evaluating Animated Infographics.
A Step Towards Multimedia Research: An Experimental Approach" (Klaus Forster,
Sabine Stiemerling and Thomas Knieper). (RS)
(2002). Training with a twist. Computing Canada, Plesman Publications
Ltd. 28: 36.
Comments on the benefits of varying the presentation of curriculum in improving
the learning process of students. Role of the information technology sector
in providing learning devices; Introduction of the Universal Instructional Design;
Suggestions for IT trainers.
(2002). CR reviews your school's Web site. Curriculum Review, PaperClip
Holdings. 41: 5.
Provides an insights on the designation of the school district Web site for
its tri-purpose information. Accuracy of the information; Protection of the
equipment; Accessibility of the students on the computer system.
(2002). Survey: States Using Web To Report Special Ed Data. Special Education
Report, Aspen Publishers Inc. 28: 8.
Reports on states using the Web to report special education data in the U.S.
Incompatible or limited data systems; Accuracy and accessibility of data; Diversity
of data needs.
(2002). Internet Courses Teach Web Design Skills. T H E Journal, T.H.E.
Journal. 29: 30.
Reports the availability of Classes4u.org web site. Level of courses in web
site development; Accessibility of the site to students; Teachers of the course.
(2002). On the Web. T H E Journal, T.H.E. Journal. 29: 34.
Features several web sites relevant on education. Accessibility of just4kids.org
web site; Information provided in usatodaycollege.com; Courses offered in math-kitecture.org.
(2002). Collegiate Member Access to 'Members Only' Sites Extended. Teaching
Music, MENC -- The National Association for Music Education. 10: 21.
Reports the extension of collegiate member of Music Education National Conference
access to 'Members only' site. Order of resources online at member cost; Accessibility
to job sites; Online publication of Update, JMTE and GMT.
(2002). New Accessibility Standards. Techniques: Connecting Education &
Careers, Association for Career & Technical Education. 77: 14.
Reports the approval of the section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 in
the United States. Need for federal government technology purchasers to comply
with the regulation; Use of text-to-speech software in reading federal web pages
by the blind; Integration of the standards into the product lines of Hewlett-Packard,
IBM, Canon and Adobe.
(2002). Power up your curriculum with bigchalk's new INTERGRATED CLASSROOM.
Technology & Learning, CMP Media LLC. 22: 21.
Features the web-based educational system called Integrated Classroom from Bigchalk.
Specifications; Hardware requirement; Accessibility of the system.
(2002). RCA 8-Device Remote Reduces Couch Clutter. TWICE: This Week in Consumer
Electronics, Reed Business Information. 17: 46.
Reports on the plans of Thomson Corp. to introduce an RCA eight-device universal
learning remote control RCU900 that reduces couch clutter. Design of the remote;
Time-saving features of the remote; Significance of SmartMacro feature; Electronic
devices controlled by RCU900.
(2003). Accessibility. Distance Education Report, Magna Publications
Inc. 7: 3.
Presents a chart that shows the percentage of degree-granting institutions in
the U.S. that use Web sites in their courses and the percentage of those institutions
whose Web sites follow accessibility guidelines or recommendations for users
with disabilities.
(2003). GLOBALED.com. Distance Education Report, Magna Publications Inc.
7: 5.
Features GLOBALED.com, an online subscription-based listing of articles, authors
and events for global education professionals. Aim of the Web site and its companion
newsletter; Accessibility of the Web service; Future plans for the site.
(2003). Eisenhower National Clearinghouse. Science Teacher. 70: 74.
Introduces the Eisenhower National Clearinghouse Online, a web site offering
a professional development page for mathematics and science curricula. Accessibility
of the site; Inclusion of information about long-term classroom planning and
professional development in the site; Contact information.
(2003). Web Site Accessibility (Universal Design). Technology & Learning,
CMP Media LLC. 24: 48-50.
Presents information on Web sites that provide help in designing Web pages that
comply with the requirements of Universal Design. Web site of CAST; List of
Checkpoints for Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 1.0; Web site on how people
with disabilities use the Web.
(2003). SWANSEA GIVES SIZE AND SPEED PRIORITY. Times Higher Education Supplement:
6.
Features of the website of Swansea University in Wales. Compliance with the
Web Accessibility Initiative; Optimization of the site for printing; Use of
validation tools.
(2004). Accessibility. Distance Education Report, Magna Publications
Inc. 8: 3.
Reports on the use and accessibility of web sites of institutions in their distance
education courses. Percent of 2-year and 4-year Title IV degree-granting institutions;
Distribution of percentages by the extent to which institutions websites follow
established accessibility guidelines or recommendations for users with disability;
Base of percentage on the estimated 2,300 institutions offering distance education
course in 2000-2001.
(2004). Websites as educational motivators for adults with a learning disability.
Educational Administration Abstracts, Sage Publications Inc. 39: 61.
Adults with a learning disability pose an educational challenge for teachers
and support workers. They frequently have limited skills in reading and writing
and may find it difficult to pay attention to topics of little interest to them.
Nevertheless, they can be keen to use new technology and often have hobbies
and interests that are catered for on the Internet. This article describes a
project aimed to highlight the advantages and weaknesses of Web-based learning
for adults with learning disability and to suggest improvements. Eight students
with mild to moderate learning disability were helped to find Web sites related
to their interests and supported in creating multimedia work linked to those
sites. Results showed the powerfully motivating effect of the Web sites for
students, but highlighted the access difficulties posed by Web sites for such
students. Further work in this area is needed to develop strategies for exploiting
the motivating effect of Web sites and to improve the accessibility of sites
for people with low literacy levels.ABSTRACT FROM AUTHOR
(2004). Helpful Sites You Won't Want to Miss. School Library Journal,
Reed Business Information. 50: 24.
Looks at web sites that can help the U.S. library field. Scope of the Department
of Health and Human Services' new Web site for federal grants; Features of the
online newsletter "Accessibility Basics for Librarians"; Target children
of the Early Reading First funds program via the Department of Education site.
(2004). SITES YOU CAN USE. Techniques: Connecting Education & Careers,
Association for Career & Technical Education. 79: 59.
Presents two web sites related to education in the U.S. Site of the Instructional
Materials Laboratory; Accessibility of the Education Commission of the States
site; Key features of the sites.
(2004). Award-winners' pick. Times Educational Supplement, Times Supplements
Ltd.: 20.
Features several Web sites with digital teaching ideas. Availability of information
on software for primary and special needs education; Accessibility of digital
video work; Inclusion of interactive drama for teenagers operating on the Internet
and television.
Abend, A. C. (1979). Facilities for Special Education Services: A Guide for
Planning New and Renovated Schools. Virginia: 156.
Developed primarily from field based research on 19 schools, the book is designed
to help facility planners, educational administrators, educators, architects,
and citizens make informed choices in planning new or renovated facilities for
special education services. The design guidelines are performance based so that
intended outcome is given as the criterion rather than the means for achieving
that outcome. Chapter 1 examines current directions of special education and
the delivery of services for exceptional learners. Basic concepts behind special
education programs are outlined. The second chapter deals with the educational
facility planning process. Long range educational facility planning is addressed,
and planning for new or renovated facilities is discussed. Consideration is
given to the facility planning committee, their roles and responsibilities,
a participatory model for involvement, organizing the planning process, and
steps in the facility planning process. Chapter 3 contains design criteria which
are organized into two sections: general building design criteria which is related
to the building in its entirety (including accessibility, furniture and equipment,
and lighting); and design criteria by special education services (which involve
curriculum services and such related services as physical therapy). Chapter
4 is an annotated listing of additional readings directly related to facility
design programing or planning. (SBH)
Abernathy, D. J. (2001). Web, Enabled. T+D, American Society for Training
& Development. 55: 24.
Presents the Web accessibility resources, tips and views for disabled computer
users in the United States. Importance of knowing the types of disabilities
of the computer users; Implementation of Section 508 of the 1973 Rehabilitation
Act for information technology products; Suggestions for user-friendly designs
for Web managers and developers.
Aberson, C. L., D. E. Berger, et al. (2000). Evaluation of an Interactive Tutorial
for Teaching the Central Limit Theorem. Teaching of Psychology, Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates. 27: 289-291.
Evaluates an interactive, Internet-based tutorial Web Interface for Statistical
Education (WISE) to assist students in learning about sampling distribution
in psychology. Structure of the program; Effectiveness of the web-based tutorial;
Provides important advantages over the lecture format; Accessibility of the
tutorial.ABSTRACT FROM AUTHOR
In this article, we present an evaluation of a Web-based, interactive tutorial
used to present the sampling distribution of the mean. The tutorial allows students
to draw samples and explore the shapes of sampling distributions for several
sample sizes. To evaluate the effectiveness of the tutorial, 111 students enrolled
in statistics or research methods courses used either the interactive tutorial
or attended a lecture and a demonstration on the sampling distribution of the
mean. Students in both groups improved from pretest to posttest and no statistically
significant differences between improvement scores were found between groups.
Additionally, students rated the tutorial as easy to use and understand. In
this study, we provide evidence that an Internet tutorial can be comparable
in effectiveness to standard lecture or demonstration techniques.ABSTRACT FROM
AUTHOR
Academic Senate for California Community Colleges Sacramento.[BBB16038] (1999).
Guidelines for Good Practices: Effective Instructor-Student Contact in Distance
Learning. California: 28.
This position paper elaborates the Academic Senate's existing positions on distance
education and the effective use of technology in instruction. In particular
it examines the implications of a 1998 change in the Title 5 regulations governing
distance education in California community colleges, especially with regard
to instructor-student contact. The paper begins with a review of good practices
in technology-mediated instruction and proceeds to consider and make recommendations
on effective instructor-student contact. Many of the recommendations apply equally
to courses offered in any mode of instruction, but the paper specifically addresses
local curriculum committees as they decide how to apply these recommendations
in their review of distance education course proposals. The paper briefly mentions
some unresolved issues in the area of faculty collective bargaining. Finally
the paper makes recommendations for action by local academic senates to ensure
that the curriculum review process for distance education courses separately
documents effective instructor-student contact, technical support, accessibility,
and provision of support services to students. (AUTH/JJL)
Academic Senate for California Community Colleges Sacramento.[BBB16038] (1999).
The Role of Academic Senates in Enrollment Management. California: 23.
This paper by the Academic Senate provides the background and scope of enrollment
management as it is defined and practiced by educational institutions. Emerging
themes in higher education and enrollment trends in California are used to frame
enrollment management considerations. A variety of strategies for managing over-
and under-enrollment are presented. California community colleges have traditionally
managed enrollment by raising or lowering admissions criteria, primarily through
scheduling and course offerings. The large predicted increase in students from
"Tidal Wave II" will present new challenges to the state's colleges.
Faculty should play a greater role in decisions involving enrollment and in
their institutions' ability to service a larger student population efficiently.
This paper suggests that faculty have the obligation to voice their collective
opinion when enrollment management decisions are made regarding the accessibility
to college for the state's citizens. The report's sections are as follows: (1)
"Introduction"; (2) "Background and Scope"; (3) "Current
Regulation and Statute"; (4) "Enrollment Management and Emerging Themes
in Higher Education"; (5) "Enrollment Trends in California";
(6) "Enrollment Management Considerations"; (7) "Enrollment Management
Strategies"; (10) "Role of the Local Academic Senate"; (11) "Recommendations
for Developing and Evaluating Enrollment Management Plans"; (12) "Summary";
and (13) "Glossary of Enrollment Management Key Terms." Contains 10
references. (RDG)
Academy for Educational Development Inc. New York NY.[QPX00110] (1974). Never
Too Old to Learn: 109.
This report is a result of a study of available opportunities offered by post
secondary institutions to help older persons remain active and involved in their
communities. Through interviews of relevant literature, detailed questionnaires
sent to over 400 institutions, visits to over 33 institutions, and interviews
with personnel, older students, educational groups, and social agencies, the
survey evaluated the present programs and revealed the lack of programs to fulfill
the needs of older adults. Chapter 1 provides national demographic data with
charts on the characteristics of older persons and discusses their adjustment,
identity, participation, and fulfillment needs. A roster of the principal characteristics
of ongoing programs and brief descriptions of each are presented in Chapter
2. Chapter 3 recommends communication and involvement as two guidelines for
planning programs and includes specific considerations (identifying the market,
deciding on course content, maximizing accessibility, choosing schedules, opting
for various instructional methods, providing supplementary services and financing).
Chapter 4 examines the benefits of these programs and recommends indepth evaluations
of programs, selected new demonstration projects for "new careers"
and "rehabilitation", and dissemination of information and ideas.
An evaluation checklist, the academy's board of directors, the surveyed and
visited institutions, and an annotated bibliography are appended. (Author/JB)
ACCESS ERIC Rockville MD.[BBB27976] (1991). ERIC User Survey. Report. Maryland:
41.
This survey, which was conducted in 1991, was designed to assess the education
information needs of respondents, as well as the extent of their use of (Educational
Resources Information Center), ERIC, their evaluation of ERIC services and products,
and their suggestions for system improvement and expansion. The 1,184 respondents
who completed a 21-question survey included administrators, classroom teachers,
policymakers, education researchers, graduate students, and others. Their responses
showed a high degree of familiarity with ERIC; librarians were the user group
with the highest degree of ERIC recognition; the two most common ways to learn
about ERIC were through courses or inservice training and through the library;
over half of the respondents had used ERIC Clearinghouses; over a third had
written documents in the database; and a large number were unfamiliar with or
knew about but did not use the ERIC Document Reproduction Service. Well over
half of the respondents who had done ERIC searches rated each type of search
service--online, CD-ROM, and printed or microfiche indexes--as "Very Helpful."
Both RIE and CIJE received particularly high ratings. Research was the most
common purpose for database use, and school administrators were the most diverse
in their use. User recommendations for improvement fell into four areas: technology
expansion, database improvements, product improvement, and accessibility and
training. This report contains an executive summary; background information
on the survey; detailed discussions of both the survey findings and their implications;
and recommendations for system improvements based on the findings. A copy of
the questionnaire and a description of the survey methodology are appended.
(BBM)
Adams, P. R. (1960). The Organization of Museums: Practical Advice. Museums
and Monuments, IX: 234.
This manual deals with the organization of museums. The manual includes 10 chapters
written by different people involved in museum work in various parts of the
world. Chapter I, The Museum and Its Functions, deals with such topics as definition,
collecting, identifying, and recording. Chapter II considers the administration
of museums. Chapter III, The Staff, considers the curatorial staff, office staff,
guards, and others. Chapter IV deals with museums and research. The visitor
is discussed in Chapter V. A discussion of the role of education (who, when,
where, why and how) in museums is contained in Chapter VI. Chapter VII looks
at the museum laboratory. Inorganic and organic material storage conditions,
accessibility, and storage records are discussed in Chapter VIII. Chapter IX
looks at the exhibit, planning, setting, lighting, and other exhibit-related
topics. Chapter X is a discussion of museum architecture. Most chapters include
a bibliography, appendix and/or summary. A foreword, conclusion, and illustrations
are also included. (Author/TK)
Adams, R. N. (1981). Equity from a Vocational District Administrator's Perspective.
Research and Development Series No. 214A. Ohio: 25.
Programs must be designed to remove barriers to equitable vocational education.
Barriers to such programs are erosion of public and special interest group confidence
in the educational system; lack of systematic student services; and lack of
mutual awareness, communication, and cooperation between vocational and general
educators. To remove barriers, adequate funds must be available to distribute
by efficient methods. Local involvement and endorsement are also required. Vocational
educators must work with parents and family members who influence career decisions
to change attitudes toward vocational education. Career assessments are a practical
strategy to recognize interests and aptitudes. Vocational education linkages
with federal agencies could help coordinate efforts. Accessibility in rural
areas could be increased by school districts' cooperation. Additional funds
would ensure more programs, vocational counseling, and access to health and
social services. Research and development strategies for elimination should
focus on new program designs, competency-based modular instruction, basic skills
development, and work experience. Successful removal of barriers to equity relies
on focusing awareness on problems of inequity, providing corrective pre- and
inservice personnel education, refining the curriculum, developing innovative
teaching/learning materials and techniques, providing vocational guidance services,
implementing career education, providing necessary facilities and equipment,
and adequate funding. (YLB)
Advisory Council for Adult and Continuing Education Leicester (England).[BBB22237]
(1982). Continuing Education: From Policies to Practice. A Report on the Future
Development of a System of Continuing Education for Adults in England and Wales.
United Kingdom England: 225.
This report offers an achievable vision of a future system of continuing education
for adults in England and Wales in chapter 1. Chapter 2 argues that economic,
technological, social, and personal pressures make an unanswerable case for
the comprehensive provision of continuing opportunities for the education of
adults. Chapter 3 briefly surveys the patterns of provision of education and
training opportunities in England and Wales and shows that many adults now are
undereducated to meet the demands already being made on them. Chapter 4 surveys
the main barriers to access for different types of learners and suggests ways
in which the existing provision could be made available to more people. In the
next four chapters, the best ways to develop continuing education in the the
1980s and 1990s are examined. Discussion focuses on information, advisory, and
counseling services; ways in and through the education system; accessibility
of institutions; and new patterns of learning. Chapters 9 and 10 consider alternative
systems and proposed improvements to the existing financial support system and
ways of extending entitlements to educational leave. Chapter 11 discusses staffing
and training and chapter 12, educational legislation. The final chapter briefly
summarizes the case for the creation of a comprehensive system of continuing
education and sets out the main lines of action recommended and a broad timetable
for their implementation. (YLB)
Advocacy Inc. Austin TX.[BBB17503] (1979). Parent Manual: Education for Your
Handicapped Child. Texas: 119.
Intended for parents, the manual discusses in detail the education of handicapped
children, with a focus on the state of Texas. Section 1 provides basic information
and covers such aspects as basic laws and regulations--including the Education
for All Handicapped Children Act (P.L. 94-142), case law, and Section 504 of
the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. Also reviewed are the obtaining and keeping
of records, and their confidentiality. Section 2 focuses on various aspects
of the child centered education process. A chapter on individual assessment
covers such things as special services, the parent role, testing requirements,
and independent evaluation. The individual education plan (IEP) is examined
in terms of such areas as goals and objectives, writing the IEP, and the private
school. A chapter on placement reviews such aspects as least restrictive setting,
mainstreaming, cost of placement, residential placement, accessibility, and
contracting for services. Also covered in Section 2 are the referral process
and parent and child rights. The third section concerns how to deal with problems,
and focuses on such areas as the discipline of handicapped students, taking
legal action, and other administrative remedies. In addition, the impartial
due process hearing is examined in detail. Also provided are lists of organizations
for parents, state agencies, and organizations providing legal assistance in
the state of Texas; a glossary; and brief summaries of important laws, rules,
and regulations. Sample forms, letters, checklists, and other aids are appended
to individual chapters. (DLS)
Ahanger, G. and T. D. C. Little (1997). Easy Ed: An Integration of Technologies
for Multimedia Education. Massachusetts: 7.
The accessibility of the World Wide Web and its flexibility for conveying digital
information in various forms makes it a convenient mode of communication for
education. With the help of a distance learning application called "Easy
Ed," this paper demonstrates how these properties of the Web along with
a data model can be used to provide a classroom environment on the Internet.
Easy Ed provides a rich medium for education that is achieved by integrating
information across the different media types (text, video, audio, and graphics)
in hypermedia form. Metadata conforming to the data model about different media
types is stored in a relational database, which not only facilitates authoring,
but also makes it possible to reuse existing instructional material. Another
concept of Easy Ed is the dynamic repurposing of content at the time of access.
Dynamic information generation helps to customize information according to a
user's level of comprehension, the information medium, and hardware compatibility.
Five figures present customization and page composition, the system architecture
of Easy Ed, object hierarchy in a topic, an example of tour formation, and the
interface for display of course views and contents. (Author/AEF)
Ahmed, M. (2002). A Note on Phrase Structure Analysis and Design Implication
for ICALL. Computer Assisted Language Learning, Swets & Zeitlinger,
BV. 15: 423.
Exploiting Chomsky’s Universal Grammar (UG), this research examinesthe
effects of phrase structure rules on the development of grammatical knowledgein
Bangladeshi learners of English as a second language. The masking technique
of MacWhinney (1988) motivates the use of link-grammarsyntactic parser of Sleator
and Temperley (1993) used in the study. The resultsindicate that the learners’
parameters were reset from L1 to L2 as aconsequence of the overt presentation
of phrase structure rules. The implicationsof the study for the design of intelligent
computer assisted language learningis discussed.ABSTRACT FROM AUTHOR
Aiken, L. H. "Transformation of the Nursing Workforce." Nursing
Outlook. v43 n5 p201-09 Sep-Oct 1995.
Although the United States has an adequate supply of nurses, the mix of nurses
by educational background is insufficient and the present pool of nurses is
not being well used. Solutions include reorganizing hospitals, improving accessibility
of care, enhancing academic care centers, and serving the underserved. (SK)
Akehurst, M. and D. Marsland (1981). Victims of Myth: The Situation of Rural
Youth in Britain. United Kingdom England: 18.
The economic, social and educational needs of rural youth in England and Wales
are not being met. Rural youth are defined as all young people between the ages
of 10 and 25 living in areas more than 30 miles from towns of 250,000 inhabitants,
or 20 miles from towns whose population is between 50,000 and 250,000. The rapid
decrease in the agricultural workforce, due to mechanisation and the increased
skills level required of farm workers, has caused a high level of unemployment
for young people in rural areas, leaving them little choice of high level job
satisfaction in their own communities. Lack of accessibility to community resources,
based on poor public transportation and decreased car ownership, has caused
disadvantages to rural youth in traveling to leisure and social events, work
sites, and schools. Low levels of educational attainment have come about because
of disadvantaging family circumstances, such as low income, poor housing, social
stress, and low educational aspirations, as well as the factor of remoteness.
Serious attention from local governments and policy makers, and especially from
the Youth Service, is needed so that the neglect of rural youth can be acknowledged
and corrected. (JD)
Akehurst, M. D. (1980). Until the Fire and the Rose Are One. United Kingdom
England: 18.
In spite of the popular misconception of life in rural England as a rustic idyll,
social and economic conditions there have created many issues which result in
deprivation for rural youth. The major issues which affect employment, schooling,
social, and domestic situations for rural youth are: (1) accessibility--lack
of transportation; (2) centralisation of resources; (3) educational disadvantagement;
(4) few job opportunities; (5) inner city policies; (6) poverty; and (7) lack
of open space. A combination of these factors can lead to a way of life which
limits personal development and improvement in life-style. Furthermore, the
routine use of power by economically and socially dominant groups in local government
expenditures has the effect that the already disadvantaged are further disadvantaged.
However, opportunities do exist for the improvement of conditions for rural
youth. Youth involvement in village and parish councils is needed, as well as
active participation in the youth clubs which exist for them. Revisions are
needed in the British Youth Service, so that the concern, vision, imagination,
and thought that densely populated areas have received throughout the life of
the youth service can be applied to youthwork in rural areas. (JD)
Alabama State Commission on Higher Education Montgomery.[BBB09188] (1982). Cooperative
Library Resource Sharing among Universities Supporting Graduate Study in Alabama.
Alabama: 196.
Intended as a basis for continuing and expanding cooperative network activities,
this publication presents five comprehensive reports developed in 1981/82 which
assess the academic libraries of the 16 public and private postsecondary educational
institutions in Alabama. The five reports cover collection development, staff
adequacy, space requirements, statewide bibliographic and physical accessibility
to academic library services, and computerization and library networking. Comparisons
are made to commonly accepted standards and criteria, and comparative analyses
are provided of Alabama's academic libraries against regional and national measures
of excellence, and the national state-of-the-art in computers and automation.
Each report presents conclusions and recommendations which are cumulated in
the front of the publication. Also noted are the functions and activities of
academic libraries, the need for a comprehensive plan for cooperative resource
sharing among Alabama's academic libraries, and limitations on the scope and
focus of study. A membership list of the Alabama Commission on Higher Education
(ACHE) Council of Librarians, 8 tables, 21 appendices, and a 16-item bibliography
are included. (Author/ESR)
Alabama State Dept. of Education Montgomery. Div. of Vocational Education and
Community Colleges.[BBB01554] (1975). Handbook on Implementing Vocational Education
Special Needs Programs: 34.
The handbook presents a series of implementation suggestions for vocational
education special needs programs generally, and in Alabama. Special Needs Programs
for Disadvantaged Students defines the term disadvantaged student and provides
criteria for their identification, with form information. Special Needs Programs
for Handicapped Students lists 10 handicapping conditions and provides form
information. Vocational Teachers for Special Needs Classes describes certification
and personality requirements for working in such programs. Facilities discusses
the need for maximum accessibility and usability by the students. Evaluation
stresses the need for continuous evaluation of the program in terms of individual
student progress and overall program effectiveness. The terms of the Cooperative
Agreement with Vocational Education, Vocational Rehabilitation and Crippled
Children and the Program for Exceptional Children and Youth in the Coordination
of Services to the Handicapped in Alabama are presented in full. Plan for Assuring
Vocational Education for Disadvantaged and/or Handicapped Students provides
guidelines and necessary State form numbers. Policies and Procedures for Conducting
Special Needs Programs in Alabama cover the responsibilities of the State coordinator
and supervisors, and district supervisors. The forms used in Alabama are appended.
(LH)
Alaska Office of the Governor Juneau.[BBB00528] (1988). Our Greatest Natural
Resource: Investing in the Future of Alaska's Children. A Report of the Governor's
Interim Commission on Children and Youth. Alaska: 120.
In 1987, the Governor of Alaska's Interim Commission on Children and Youth was
given two tasks: (1) to develop a plan for a first-class child care system for
working parents statewide that is workable, fair and sensibly integrates with
the public schools; and (2) to produce a comprehensive plan to combat the problems
facing Alaskans so they are prepared to be economically self-sufficient. Offered
in this report are the Commission's primary recommendations, child care recommendations,
and recommendations concerning the problems of youth. Primary recommendations
focus on parent education, life skills education, problem prevention, professional
training, literacy education, program coordination, community interventions,
youth leadership and social participation, school nursing and public health
nursing services, school counseling, natural helpers/peer counseling, mental
health minimum funding, children and family research, adolescent survey research,
employment of qualified natives, rural services, juvenile diversion, background
checks, and law enforcement. Child care recommendations concern program quality,
affordability, accessibility, and parent support and training. Recommendations
for intervention in the problems of youth concern family violence, teen suicide,
substance abuse, teen pregnancy, runaway youth, and dropouts. Recommendations
are accompanied by background information about the issue addressed. The concluding
recommendation advocates the establishment of a permanent Commission on Children
and Youth. (RH)
Alaska State Library Juneau.[BBB23050] (1997). Library Services and Technology
Act: Alaska State Plan, 1998-2002. Alaska: 14.
This document outlines the Alaska State Plan for 1998-2002 prepared in accordance
with the Library Services and Technology Act. The overall goal of the State
Library program is to assure access for all Alaskans to the library resources
necessary to meet informational, educational, cultural, and recreational needs.
Population characteristics impacting library services in Alaska are first described.
Five goals for library service in Alaska are then outlined, and a background
on priorities is discussed for each goal. The goals include: (1) Connectivity
- Access to telecommunications; (2) Information - Access to worldwide sources
of information, educational resources, research data, etc.; (3) Partnerships
- Develop regional and multi-jurisdictional agreements; (4) Service - Improve
library services to the underserved; and (5) Accessibility - Services to Alaskans
with special needs. The remaining two sections of the document focus on evaluation
of the program, and policies and procedures for public input and the role of
the State Advisory Council. (AEF)
Alaska Univ. Anchorage. Inst. of Social and Economic Research.[BBB17576] "Vocational
Education in Alaska. Central Issues and Problem Areas." Alaska Review
of Social and Economic Conditions. v16 n1 Sep 1979: 34.
To identify central problems in vocational education in Alaska, a study focused
on the three sectors at the postsecondary school level: public or independent
nonprofit institutions, private schools, and apprenticeship programs. Public
and nonprofit institutions consider job preparation their primary goal in addition
to skill upgrading and teaching practical skills. Graduation rates of their
primarily minority group students appear to be extremely low. They lack sound
labor market information for program planning and pay little attention to student
placement. Their strengths are geographic accessibility, low tuition, and minimal
entrance requirements. In contrast, private schools have more stringent enrollment
requirements, better linkage with the labor market, and high rates of program
completion and job placement. Apprenticeship programs have the most stringent
entrance requirements, serve a narrow range of students, and best exemplify
vocational program planning based on labor market demand. Vocational education
problems in Alaska occur primarily in publicly supported institutions. These
are (1) confusion about teaching job preparation versus practical skills as
goals of vocational education, (2) lack of information on the Alaska labor market,
(3) lack of attention to job placement and development, (4) low numbers of program
graduates, and (5) lack of financial assistance for unemployed non-native Alaskans
needing vocational training. (YLB)
Albaugh, P. R. (1997). The Role of Skepticism in Preparing Teachers for the
Use of Technology. Ohio: 7.
The complexity of technology training for teachers can be partially explained
in terms of three phenomena: the historical resistance of teachers to use media,
the nature of teaching itself, and the life cycle of technological innovations.
Factors that influence teachers' use of technology include: accessibility of
hardware and software, administrative expectations and support for the implementation,
and adaptability of classroom and work settings. As practical professionals,
teachers are often suspicious of new claims and the implementation of new ideas
without proof of effectiveness. Teachers tend to adopt a new technology when
that technology helps them do what they are currently doing better; thus, they
may be seen as reinforcing the status quo. In addition to a cautious attitude
engendered by teaching and the historical and cultural resistance to change,
the influx of computer games and the perception of video and film as entertainment
illustrate how computer technology can be suspect as a legitimate educational
tool. Suggestions for teacher technology training include: provide teachers
with numerous opportunities for training and practice; provide administrative
support for training and for trying new approaches with technology; acknowledge
the professional concerns of teachers and their need for practicality while
encouraging risk-taking; and provide post-training follow-up. (ND)
Alberta Dept. of Education Edmonton.[BBB05991] (1998). First Things First...Our
Children: Agenda for Opportunity. Canada Alberta: 23.
This report details the action plan of Alberta, Canada to build on recent progress
in restructuring and refocusing the province's educational system. The report
describes the most common concerns of Albertans regarding the school system,
especially related to keeping students in school, meeting special needs of students,
and developing a highly skilled workforce. The report outlines the actions to
be taken and the results expected in 12 key educational areas: (1) every child
can read well; (2) improved support in the classroom; (3) special needs children
are supported; (4) learning our language; (5) setting the pace...high standards
and positive results; (6) putting programs together for our children, focusing
on increasing accessibility; (7) technology provides tools for learning; (8)
we work together for success; (9) getting our children to school; (10) a growing
Alberta means more children in school; (11) provide solid financial support
for the classroom; and (12) improving schools and classrooms. The report concludes
with budgetary information. (KB)
Alberta Learning Edmonton. Apprenticeship and Industry Training.[BBB36759] (1997).
A Vision for the Future: Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training--A Discussion
Paper [and] Current Context and Selected Trends: A Profile of Apprenticeship
and Industry Training in Alberta [and] A Vision for the Future: Responses to
a Discussion Paper from the Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Board
and the Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Division. Keeping You Informed.
Canada Alberta: 78.
These three publications examine the current state and future of apprenticeship
and industry training in Alberta, Canada. The "Current Context" publication,
released in October 1996, examines the following topics: the structure of apprenticeship
and industry training in Alberta; enrollment and industry participation; Alberta's
contribution to apprenticeship training and the interprovincial standards (Red
Seal) program; funding apprenticeship and industry training; the emerging economic
environment and skill requirements; and recent government initiatives. A "Vision
for the Future," also published in October 1996, is a discussion paper
and outlines the vision and principles of apprenticeship and industry training
in Alberta. The "Keeping you Informed" publication, released in March
1997, presents the responses from stakeholders to the discussion paper. Both
the "Vision for the Future" and the "Keeping You Informed"
responses are structured around 14 specific goals and strategies related to
responsiveness, accessibility, affordability, and accountability. The following
are among the recommendations discussed in both papers: (1) redesign the advisory
committee network; (2) consider opportunities for flexible certification; (3)
increase flexibility in methods of formal instruction; (4) review the regulatory
framework; (5) communicate alternative ways of accessing apprenticeship training;
and (6) provide apprentices with appropriate financial supports. The three documents
include a total of 21 tables/charts and a questionnaire examining the vision
and principles of apprenticeship and industry training in Alberta and strategies
for achieving them. (MN)
Alberta Learning Edmonton.[BBB36037] (2000). Report of the MLA Post-Secondary
Funding Review Committee. Canada Alberta: 41.
This report brings to an end a series of consultations that began in March 2000
when Alberta's Minister of Learning established a committee to review the approach
to allocating resources to publicly funded postsecondary institutions in Alberta,
Canada. The Minister asked the committee, mostly composed of Members of the
Legislative Assembly (MLAs), to ensure that the funding mechanism maximized
accessibility to high quality, responsive, and affordable learning opportunities
while maintaining institutional accountability. The five-member committee consulted
with postsecondary institutions, faculty, and student associations, government
departments, and other stakeholders in order to make recommendations on a funding
framework for Alberta's postsecondary institutions. The committee developed
10 recommendations: (1) base operations should be adjusted to achieve greater
equity across the system; (2) a process should be established to provide for
the periodic review of base operations grants; (3) general cost pressures should
be considered in annual adjustments to the base operations grant; (4) a working
group should be established to examine and make recommendations on improving
the ability of Alberta's postsecondary institutions to attract and retain faculty;
(5) the Access Fund should be modified to fund general as well as targeted enrollment
increases; (6) allocations from the "Performance Envelope" should
be based strictly on the achievement of excellence and improvements in performance;
(7) the indirect costs of research should be funded; (8) funding processes among
government departments should be coordinated and simplified when possible; (9)
the tuition fee policy should be revised to ensure that it continues to support
the goals of the postsecondary system; and (10) concerns with the approach toward
funding apprenticeship and industry training should be further investigated.
Six appendixes contain materials used by the Committee, including the consultation
questions and tables of grants awarded postsecondary institutions. (SLD)
Alberta Learning Edmonton.[BBB36037] (2002). Profile of Alberta's Adult Learning
System: A Context for Discussion. Canada Alberta: 72.
This profile of Alberta's adult learning system draws together information from
widely different sources for the period 1994-1995 to 1999-2000. The profile
looks at Alberta's system relative to those in other jurisdictions in Canada
and discusses emerging trends and issues. The profile provides a context for
discussing policy and program directions to help improve Alberta's postsecondary
education system. The profile is presented in relation to four key outcomes
that support Alberta Learning's business plan goal of providing high quality
learning opportunities to Albertans: accessibility; affordability; responsiveness
and flexibility; and innovation through research excellence. The profile shows
that Alberta's adult learning system provides learners with a comprehensive
range of credit and noncredit opportunities delivered through public, private,
and community-based providers, which include 23 public, board governed institutions
and more than 150 private colleges. There are more than 150 nonprofit voluntary
organizations providing noncredit adult learning opportunities in Alberta. The
profile also traces key events in the development of the province's adult education
system. Three appendixes provide additional information in a summary of the
data, a statement of Alberta's tuition fee policy, and a glossary. (Contains
13 tables and 50 figures.) (SLD)
Alberta Univ. Edmonton. The Senate.[BBB21514] (1982). Report of the Commission
on University Purpose. Canada Alberta: 105.
A report of the Commission on University Purpose of The University of Alberta,
Canada, is presented. Based on the perceptions of the various publics, the Commission
sought to clarify the purposes and functions of the university. After an introductory
section on the historical development of universities and The University of
Alberta, changing influences on university purpose are briefly addressed. Attention
is also directed to the traditional purposes of a university: service to society
and the discovery, transmission, and preservation of knowledge. The following
specific roles and objectives of the university are addressed: leadership, community
resource, accessibility, extension role, lifelong learning, and national and
international responsibilities. Appendices include the following reports: "University
Purposes: Literature Review and Canadian Overview" (Joanne McNeal in collaboration
with H. H. Hodysh and A. G. Konrad); and "Brief History of The University
of Alberta" (Maureen Riddell). The literature review covers historical
perspectives since the time of Ancient Greece and university goals for the 1980s.
The overview summarizes purpose statements of Canadian universities, and provides
information on study methodology and goal orientations. A bibliography concludes
the report. (SW)
Albright, L. (1979). Administering Programs for Handicapped Students. Professional
Development Series, No. 3. Ohio: 25.
Intended as a primer for administrative action, this booklet gives the vocational
adminstrator some basic guidelines and strategies for managing vocational programs
and services for handicapped students and clarifies key concepts. The five sections
each address one of the major concerns of an administrator: identifying students
with handicaps, the individualized education program (IEP), student placement,
monitoring and evaluating special services, and managing human resources. Definitions
of the handicapped and nine categories of handicap offered in the 1976 vocational
education legislation (Public Law 94-482) are provided as well as suggestions
for establishing identification procedures (part 1). Detailed planning for each
student is discussed in terms of the IEP--its definition, participants, teacher's
contribution, and format, content, and process (part 2). Implications of student
placement by the administrator into the least restrictive environment are discussed
next, including placement alternatives, admittance requirements, and program
accessibility (part 3). An IEP status reporting system is recommended to monitor
the program, and a procedure for evaluating the effectiveness of services is
presented (part 4). Active teacher involvement is emphasized as important for
successful implementation of program ideas and new procedures (part 5). Organization,
conduction, and funding of inservice programs are discussed. A brief note on
effective advisory councils to expand education and employment opportunities
follows. (YLB)
Aldrich, F., Y. Rogers, et al. "Getting to Grips with Interactivity: Helping
Teachers Assess the Educational Value of CD-ROMs." British Journal of
Educational Technology. v29 n4 p321-32 Oct 1998.
Discusses interactivity as it pertains to learning. Presents the findings of
a survey of primary school teachers asked to evaluate two science-based CD-ROMS
and the resulting theoretical framework of cognitive interactivity. Identifies
dimensions for teachers to assess (visibility and accessibility, manipulability
and annotatability, creativity and combinability, experimentation and testing)
the value of educational CD-ROMs. (PEN)
Alexander, F. K. (1998). The Endless Pursuit of Efficiency: The International
Movement To Increase Accountability and Performance in Higher Education. ASHE
Annual Meeting Paper. Illinois: 18.
This paper examines the trend toward demanding increased accountability and
efficiency by institutions of higher education in the United States and Europe
and its implications for the relationship between government and the college
or university. It notes that such factors as limited state resources, rising
educational costs, and the growing demand for accessibility and equity have
generated external pressures on higher education to become more accountable
to its funding sources. Examples of specific reforms in the United States are
mentioned, including performance-based funding, adjustments in faculty workload
policies, and development of policies related to time-to-degree and faculty-per-degree
ratios. Examples of reforms in Great Britain focus on the British Education
Reform Act of 1988, which began the transition of power from local education
authorities to the national government. Examples of the accountability trend
from continental Europe are also provided. Discussion of societal demands and
the accountability movement examines the effects on higher education of massification
and limits on public expenditures. The paper concludes that higher education
has evolved into a foundational component of national economic growth and reflects
utilitarian views of higher education in which economic values are supreme and
the quantification of fiscal resources are the true measure of value. (Contains
33 references.) (DB)
Allen, R. L., J. T. Bowen, et al. (1996). Classroom Design Manual. Third Edition.
Pennsylvania: 93.
This manual identifies the essential design elements of modern, high quality
learning environments and includes discussions on facility programming, management,
utilization, evaluation, and planning for future technology. Classrooms examined
include general purpose classrooms, lecture halls, seminar rooms, and specialized
classrooms such as distance education and interactive video classrooms. Separate
guidelines are presented for each classroom type. The manual also explores the
use of technology in classrooms, discusses a team planning approach to programming
for classroom design, offers advice on equipment security and on meeting accessibility
regulations, and provides practical applications for surveying classrooms using
illustrative checklists. Appendices contain designing issues involving accessibility
under the Americans with Disabilities Act; regulations, codes, and compliance
agencies; a bibliography of books and articles on classroom design; a list of
professional organizations involved in facility design; the authors' biographies;
and photos of sample classroom designs. (GR)
Allen, S. W. (1994). Towards collaboration : learning, communicating, and
participating across cultures in two alternative education programs for children
in Cirebon, Indonesia. North York, Ont., Faculty of Environmental Studies,
York University.
Allison, M. T. "The Challenge of Diversity: Embracing Those on the Fringes."
Journal of Experiential Education. v19 n3 p122-26 Dec 1996.
In order to build programs that embrace social and cultural diversity, educators
must understand the perspectives of people of color and how agencies unwittingly
create systematic barriers to program access through stigmatization and marginalization.
Identifies strategies that decrease the stigmatizing process and foster greater
accessibility of outdoor and adventure programs. (TD)
Al-Otaibi, M. M. "Accreditation of Early Childhood Education in the United
States: A Model for Saudi Arabia?" Child Study Journal. v27 n3 p191-219
1997.
Profiles early childhood education (ECE) in the United States; discusses its
child-care and educational functions, program accessibility, and the accreditation
system of the National Association for the Education of Young Children; and
examines the potential of adopting the U.S. accreditation model in Saudi Arabia.
Concludes that implementing an ECE accreditation system in Saudi Arabia would
have several benefits. (KB)
Alschuler, L. (1998). Making your Web site accessible: A practice that benefits
everyone. Seybold Report on Internet Publishing, Seybold Publications
Inc. 2: 17.
Focuses on a draft released by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), of guidelines
for authoring accessible content. Importance of good accessibility with Web
sites; Information on the guidelines; Introduction of the Web Accessibility
Initiative (WAI) Accessibility Guidelines (WAI). INSETS: The W3C access checklist;
Resources.
Alt, W. M. (1967). Junior College Campus Sites--How to Save Money. Aspects of
the Junior College, Brief-7: 3.
Junior College campuses should be planned with their accessibility to students
foremost in mind. Their size may involve about 150 acres. It is false reasoning
to assume that a school district will save money by the delay in becoming part
of a junior college district. Costs per acre are rising so rapidly that school
districts cannot afford to wait. (NI)
Altman, E. and A. Pratt (1997). The JAL guide to the professional literature:
Online public access catalogs. Journal of Academic Librarianship, Elsevier
Science Publishing Company, Inc. 23: 159.
Presents abstracts on online public access catalogs for academic librarians
in the United States. Spelling errors in online catalog searches; Table of contents
in library catalogs; Feasibility of integrating OPAC information and World Wide
Web accessibility.
Alvir, H. P. Saving Educational Dollars through Quality Objectives: 115.
This document is a collection of working papers written to meet the specific
needs of teachers who are starting to think about and write performance objectives.
It emphasizes qualitative objectives as opposed to quantitative classroom goals.
The author describes quality objectives as marked by their clarity, accessibility,
accountability, and ability to be evaluated by laypersons. The author devotes
a section to each of these characteristics and concludes with statements on
the relevance of quality performance objectives to the graduate student, the
college president, and the educational researcher. (DDO)
American Alliance for Health Physical Education and Recreation Washington DC.[BBB11000]
(1977). Making Physical Education and Recreation Facilities Accessible to All:
Planning, Designing, Adapting: 142.
Architectural barriers deny many members of society convenient access to indoor
and outdoor recreational environments and facilities. Individuals with different
handicapping conditions are often hindered in getting from one place to another
by such barriers. This publication is designed to serve as a beginning reference
and resource about architectural barriers and accessibility. Specific chapters
deal with application of general principles, legislative mandates, rules, and
regulations pertaining to physical education, recreation, sports, and related
facilities so that each is accessible to the physically handicapped. Focus is
on removal of physical and architectural barriers in facilities used for physical
activities so that everyone can use them regardless of type or severity of handicapping
condition. In seven chapters the following subjects are discussed: (1) accessibility
and attitudes; (2) architectural accessibility legislation; (3) physical education
and recreation facilities; (4) swimming pools; (5) outdoor recreation facilities;
(6) playgrounds; (7) transportation and travel. Each chapter concludes with
an annotated bibliography for further reading. (JD)
American Association of State Colleges and Universities Washington DC.[FGK01570]
(2000). Student Charges. AASCU Special Report. District of Columbia: 10.
Data from The College Board's 2000-2001 Annual Survey of Colleges delivers a
positive message about the financial accessibility of an education at a public
college or university. While the 4.4% increase in tuition and fees and the 5.0%
increase in room and board from 1999-2000 to 2000-2001 represent a slightly
higher rate of increase than the previous year's, such increases remain near
their lowest point in more than a decade. In comparison to the national average,
American Association of State Colleges and Universities (AASCU) institutions
maintained the same rate of increase, but average tuition and fees remain below
the average for all public four-year institutions ($3,190 compared to $3,510).
At the master's level, the average increase nationally was 5%, while for AASCU
institutions it was 4.6%. At the doctoral level, the national average increase
was 4.5%, while at AASCU institutions the increase averaged a slightly higher
4.7%. The findings from this data underscore for all public four-year institutions
the relationship between states' economic and fiscal conditions and its tuition
rates. The past several years have been marked by economic expansion and significant
budget surpluses, which have helped state colleges and universities to post
only modest tuition increases. As the economy shows signs of settling, many
states are becoming more conservative in their fiscal decision-making. As a
result, the rate of increase for student charges has edged up slightly. Understanding
this relationship, particularly in light of the fact that higher education is
the largest single discretionary item in most states' budgets, is important
to crafting tuition policy that can moderate the boom/bust cycle that has manifested
itself over the last two decades. (EMS)
American Council on Education Washington DC. Association Council for Policy
Analysis and Research.[BBB18936] (1982). The National Investment in Higher Education,
1982. District of Columbia: 17.
The present status of higher education in the United States is considered, based
on the theory of development of human capital, which proposes that the developed
abilities of a nation's population are fundamental to its economic growth and
well-being. Attention is also directed to social and cultural benefits. The
following ideas are stressed: that U.S. higher education has become increasingly
accessible to previously underserved populations and responsive to labor market
needs, but that serious challenges remain for greater effort; that government
investment in college students, through student aid, is an public investment
in human capital and a means for ensuring educational opportunity; that U.S.
universities play an essential part in basic research and the production of
new knowledge; and that U.S. colleges and universities have an expanding role
in providing opportunities for job training and retraining for workers of all
ages. Undergraduate education is marked by diversity in goals and types of programs.
In regard to graduate education, it is suggested that there is a need to expand
graduate science, engineering, and related programs in order to meet critical
national human capital needs. The fact that faculty are faced with problems
of job security and deteriorating working conditions interferes with effective
performance. The poor national economy adversely affects institutions' budgets,
teaching and learning conditions, and research and scholarship; reductions in
federal student aid threaten the continued accessibility of colleges. (SW)
American Council on Education Washington DC. HEATH Resource Center.[BBB24548]
(1985). HEATH Resource Directory, 1985-1986. District of Columbia: 28.
The directory is intended to provide a selection of resources addressing major
areas of interest in postsecondary education for the handicapped. General resources,
such as the American Coalition of Citizens with Disabilities, are listed and
briefly summarized, followed by resources specific to the following disabilities:
cross-functional disabilities, deaf-blind, hearing impairments, learning disabilities,
mobility impairments, and vision impairments. Subsequent sections focus on nine
areas: (1) architectural accessibility, (2) program accessibility, (3) career
preparation, (4) employment, (5) technological devices, (6) independent living,
(7) legal resources, (8) directories, and (9) toll-free telephone services.
It is explained that agencies listed can respond individually to questions and
provide published materials. (CL)
American Council on Education Washington DC. HEATH Resource Center.[BBB24548]
National Information Center for Children and Youth with Handicaps Washington
DC.[BBB28452] Interstate Research Associates McLean VA.[BBB29428] "Options
after High School for Youth with Disabilities." Transition Summary.
v7 Sep 1991: 29.
This issue presents nine articles which address identifying, pursuing, and obtaining
postsecondary training and employment by youth with disabilities. It discusses
how families and professionals can help young people develop important self-determination
and self-advocacy skills. It also introduces adult service systems to aid in
obtaining postsecondary training, employment, and services such as transportation
assistance, adaptive equipment, or medical care. Employment options are also
explored, as well as the various types of educational institutions available
to prepare these youth for employment. Concerns such as reasonable accommodation,
accessibility, and the need to keep records are also discussed. This issue concludes
with a listing of resources. Individual articles have the following titles:
"Self-Determination Revisited: Going Beyond Expectations" (Michael
J. Ward); "Employment Options"; "Adult Systems"; "Reasonable
Accommodation"; "The Importance of Keeping Records"; "Work
Incentives in SSI and SSDI"; "Postsecondary Education and Training
Opportunities"; "Other Avenues to Employment"; and "Taking
Action." A bibliography of 47 items is provided as well as a listing of
materials from the HEATH Resource Center and a listing of 26 organizations.
(DB)
American Federation of Teachers Washington DC.[FGK01812] (1976). Putting Early
Childhood and Day Care Services into the Public Schools: The Position of the
American Federation of Teachers and An Action Plan for Promoting It: 136.
The case for public school administration of federally-funded early childhood
and day care services and an action plan for promoting it are presented in this
manual prepared by the American Federation of Teachers (AFT) Task Force on Educational
Issues. Arguments in support of an AFT-proposed amendment to the Child and Family
Services Act under Congressional consideration are based on a national need
for expansion of day care, coinciding with recent public school staff surpluses
and under-utilization of space. Growing child care needs of working women and
single parents are cited. In the discussion of advantages of public school sponsorship,
it is claimed that the overall picture of the field is one of inadequate services.
Deficiencies in existing facilities are described, as well as inadequate training
and certification procedures and shortcommings of profit-making programs. Public
school prime sponsorship is seen as simplifying administrative needs and promoting
general accessibility. Related issues discussed include: costs of providing
early childhood and day care programs; recommended standards for teacher education,
certification and training; and parent involvement and education. (BF)
American Vocational Association Inc. Washington DC.[FGK02625] (1980). Rationale
and Justification for Vocational Education's Role in Youth Employment Programs.
Virginia: 26.
Vocational education's primary goal--to prepare people for work--underscores
the vital role the discipline can play in upgrading the employability of disadvantaged
youth. Those who have received vocational training are more likely to stay in
school and receive higher salaries than other workers with comparable education
at every level from high school through two years of college. Moreover, students
are better able to plan and make mature career choices because their intrinsic
needs of competence, integrity, and pride are provided for as integral parts
of vocational programs. This type of education is particularly appropriate for
the disadvantaged since it is goal oriented, provides self-identity, is action
oriented, builds confidence, provides adult role modeling opportunities, and
provides tangible forms of success. Vocational programs are oriented toward
four goals which benefit alienated disadvantaged youths since they (1) connect
school and work over time; (2) provide skill training in occupational areas
for which the demand exists; (3) meet individual needs through specifically
tailored programs; and (4) develop, conduct, and administer programs in cooperation
with other education and community agencies. Currently there is a problem of
accessibility to vocational programs for disadvantaged youth since facilities
and other resources are scarce when compared to the number of potential users.
The intent of the new Youth Initiative is to pull all services together for
disadvantaged youth; vocational education can play a central role in this effort.
(MEK)
Anderson, J. and A. Lee "Literacy Teachers Learning a New Literacy: A Study
of the Use of Electronic Mail in a Reading Education Class." Reading
Research and Instruction. v34 n3 p222-38 Spr 1995.
Concludes that electronic mail played a major role in building a sense of community
in a graduate reading class of non-experts in computer technology, facilitated
the sharing of ideas and resources, encouraged risk taking, helped students
reflect on their learning, and encouraged cooperative learning. Notes that problems
included accessibility of computer equipment and student frustration with software.
(RS)
Anderson, T. H., B. B. Armbruster, et al. (1986). The value of taking notes
during lectures Thomas H. Anderson, Bonnie B. Armbruster. Champaign, Ill.
Cambridge, Mass., University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign ;
Bolt Beranek and Newman Inc.
Anderson, V. L., E. M. Levinson, et al. (1999). "The Effects of Meditation
on Teacher Perceived Occupational Stress, State and Trait Anxiety, and Burnout."
School Psychology Quarterly 14(1): 3-25.
Study employs a pretest/posttest control-group design and uses the Teacher's
Stress Inventory (TSI), State-Trait Anxiety Inventory (STAI), and the Maslach
Burnout Inventory (MBI) to assess the effects of a five-week standardized meditation
(SM) class on the perceived occupational stress of full-time teachers. Results
support hypothesis that SM significantly reduces teachers' perceived stress
even when used only two to five times per week. (Author/JDM)
Andres, L. E. (1999). Revisiting the Issue of Access to Higher Education in
Canada. CHERD/CSSHE Reader Series Number 5. Canada Manitoba: 156.
This publication is part of a series that reprints articles on a range of thematic
issues published in the "Canadian Journal of Higher Education." This
collection focuses on access to postsecondary education in Canada. After a preface
and an introduction, the six papers are: "Studying Part-Time in Canada's
Universities: A Social Change Perspective" (XIX:1, 1989) (Paul Anisef);
"Grade Inflation and University Admission in Ontario: Separating Fact from
Fiction" (XXV:3, 1995) (Francois R. Casas and Diane E. Meaghan); "Access
to Higher Education in Canada" (XIV:3, 1984) (Neil Guppy); "Accessibility:
Students with Disabilities in Universities in Canada" (XXII:1, 1992) (Jennifer
Leigh Hill); "The Growth of the Canadian Education System: An Analysis
of Transition Probabilities" (XVIII:2, 1988) (Peter C. Pineo and John Goyder);
and "Education, Attitudes, and Language of Higher Education: Francophone
Students in Northern Ontario" (XXIV:1, 1994) (Derek Wilkinson). (Individual
articles contain references.) (SM)
Andrews, M. B. (1991). Athabasca University/Keyano College Capstone Program.
An Evaluation Report. Canada Alberta: 61.
An evaluative study was done of a joint project, the Capstone Program, involving
Keyano College (KC) and Athabasca University (AU), both in Alberta, Canada.
The project enables students in the Fort McMurray (Alberta) area to complete
a full-time university degree without leaving their home community. The research
design focused on accessibility, attainment of university credit, credit for
previous education, bureaucratic issues, academic problems, perceptions of success,
effectiveness and cost issues and recommendations for change suggested by the
stakeholders. Data were provided by administrators, instructors, students (past,
present and future) and community groups via questionnaires, interviews and
relevant records and documents. The evidence from the evaluation strongly supported
the continuation of the Capstone Program as a viable system for improving access
to postsecondary education. However, the evaluation also identified problems
which included issues of mandate, academic freedom, formalization, and administration
and operation. For example, the evaluation recommends that AU develop a policy
that explicitly recognizes and addresses the mix of alternative delivery systems,
and that AU staff, in consultation with KC staff, accelerate the joint production
of a professional agreement which underscores collegiality between and among
professional and support staff of both institutions. Five appendixes contain
a funding proposal, source documents, description of a steering committee, community
letters, and questionnaire responses. (JB)
Angel, D. and A. Barrera (1990). ACC 2000: Building a Future Together. The Austin
Community College Proactive Long Range Plan. Texas: 25.
Over the past 10 years, Austin Community College (ACC) has expanded college
offerings from 41 degree programs, 24 degree options, and 1 certificate program
to 60 degree plans, 35 degree options, and 22 certificate programs. In addition,
ACC has grown from an enrollment of 13,000 credit students to over 24,000 students.
During the past 5 years, minority full-time faculty have increased from 12%
to 20% of the faculty. Changes in the economy, growing enrollments, demands
of local businesses, new legislative mandates for minimal skills competency
among degree students, and lagging state funding require careful planning to
meet the institution's future needs. Consistent with its focus on accessibility
and flexibility, ACC has plans to: (1) initiate new curricular programs in service
sector occupations; (2) become a continuing education center for governmental
employees; (3) develop a pre-education curriculum for future teachers; and (4)
include an entrepreneurship track in the mid-management curriculum. To help
meet the demands for a world class workforce, ACC will develop articulation
agreements with independent school districts and adopt a core requirement in
computer competency. To better fulfill its fourfold mission of quality, flexibility,
accessibility, and diversity, ACC will implement an honors program, an international
studies curriculum, 2 + 2 programs, and a mentoring program for underprepared
students. Other college goals include increasing the number of minority instructors,
developing a minority leadership program, and establishing a mentorship program
for minority secondary school students. (JMC)
Anisef, P. "University Graduates Revisited: Occupational Mobility Obtainments
and Accessibility." Interchange on Educational Policy. v13 n2 p1-19
1982.
To determine the effect of Canada's tight labor market on occupational mobility,
data were gathered on 361 students graduating from Ontario universities in 1978-79.
Tables show mobility patterns (compared to those of 1960s graduates), university
types, socioeconomic and sociopsychological factors, and job attainment by gender.
(PP)
Anisef, P. "Access to Higher Education in Canada: Equality of Opportunity
vs. Equality of Results." School Guidance Worker. v39 n2 p49-53 Nov
1983.
Discusses the issue of access to higher education in Canada and suggests that
those who do not gain entry share common social and cultural properties. Recommends
three strategies for enhancing accessibility: a monitoring system, compensatory
education programs, and financial assistance programs. (JAC)
Anisef, P. (1982). The Pursuit of Equality: Evaluating and Monitoring Accessibility
to Post-Secondary Education in Ontario. Canada Ontario: 151.
A report on the current status of accessibility to university education in Ontario
has several major objectives: to review the social science literature on such
concepts as equality of educational opportunity and accessibility, considering
the social, political and intellectual climate of the times; to examine parliamentary
minutes and reports of commissions and other bodies to show the controversy
over goals for university education in the province and to determine which policies
have been pursued by government; and to examine social science research documenting
patterns of postsecondary education participation. Throughout the study, a social
stratification framework was adopted for analysis. Resulting recommendations
include these: government implementation of compensatory education programs
at the provincial level; institution of summer learning programs aimed at economically
disadvantaged elementary school children; use of external consultants to review
early socialization effects on postsecondary participation; systematic funding
to evaluate programs for economically disadvantaged; staff and administration
incentives for encouraging postsecondary participation; changing ethnic stereotypes
in texts; encouragement through counseling and role modeling for students; continuous
government monitoring of accessibility trends; extension of census practices
to include adolescents; research on factors influencing postsecondary participation;
options for voluntary educational savings accounts for welfare recipients; and
an income tax deduction for higher education savings. A bibliography is included.
(MSE)
Annenberg/CPB Project Washington DC.[BBB29455] (1991). Pathways to Success:
Using Technologies To Reach Distant Learners. District of Columbia: 76.
This report contains information on institutions that submitted proposals for
integrating technology in education to the Annenberg/CPB (Corporation for Public
Broadcasting) Project's New Pathways to a Degree program. It is noted that,
although the 243 proposals received contained a number of innovative ideas about
how to use technologies to improve both the accessibility and the quality of
higher education, only seven of them could be funded. The program information
is presented under four headings: Recruitment and Orientation; Program and Course
Development and Delivery; Support Services; and Faculty Development. Each proposal
is described briefly, and a contact person and telephone number are listed.
The appendices provide information about the "New Pathways to a Degree"
program, the 7 funded projects, and 31 new Pathways Associates. More detailed
descriptions are given of the funded projects--at the College of St. Catherine,
St. Paul, Minnesota, Indiana University--Purdue University at Indianapolis,
Indiana; University of Maine at Augusta; Northern Virginia Community College;
Oregon State System of Higher Education (OSSHE), Eugene, Oregon; the Rochester
Institute of Technology, New York, and West Virginia University, Morgantown--as
well as a brief description the Annenberg/CPB Project and lists of its television
and audio course collections and research reports. Brief descriptions of six
technology demonstration projects conclude the report. (DB)
Ansley, J. "Accessibility Guidelines and Standards: What's What?"
School Planning & Management. v40 n7 p33-35 Jul 2001.
Examines the regulatory differences between three pieces of federal legislation
that address facility accessibility: the Americans with Disabilities Act; Section
504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973; and the Individuals with Disabilities
Education Act. Discusses why these differences are important for school officials
to understand. (GR)
Ansley, J. (2000). Creating Accessible Schools. District of Columbia: 15.
This report examines the issues of school district compliance with the legal
mandate to accommodate students with disabilities, and it explores the legislation
that addresses student accessibility. The paper discusses and compares the federal
laws and enforcement provisions dealing with accessibility, including those
under the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), the Individuals with Disabilities
Education Act (IDEA), Section 504 of Title V of the Rehabilitation Act, and
the advisory guidelines concerning accessibility from the U.S. Architectural
and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. Final comments address the vagaries
of accessibility laws and the need for careful reflection when planning new
or renovating old facilities. (Contains 28 references.) (GR)
Ansley, J. (2001). The Garrett Case and Public School Accessibility. District
of Columbia: 7.
This publication presents an assessment of the U.S. Supreme Court's ruling in
Board of Trustees of the University of Alabama v. Garrett (2001), which decided
that Congress had no power to authorize suits for damages by individuals with
disabilities against state employers under Title I of the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA). The publication reveals the decisions leading to Garrett, examines
the court's reasoning behind the decision, offers the dissenting view, and explores
the ruling's implications for public education. A glossary of legal terms is
also provided. (GR)
Apetz, W. (1975). New Jersey Community Colleges--The First Ten Years, 1963-1973;
A Report of the New Jersey Council of County (Community) Colleges to the State
Legislature: 48.
Since 1962, when the state legislature authorized the establishment of community
colleges and committed the state to share in their support, 16 community colleges
and 67,166 students have been added to the higher education system in New Jersey.
This report documents the development of the community colleges from 1955 to
1972 in the context of the history of higher education in that state. It also
reviews: (1) the state legislation authorizing the establishment of community
colleges; (2) the success of community colleges in fulfilling their goals (providing
accessibility to higher education, offering a diversity of programs, and responding
to local, state, and national needs); (3) the capital and operating costs and
methods of finance; and (4) current issues and plans for the future. Charts
and tables give data regarding enrollment, tuition compared to that of other
states, family income distributions, student ACT scores compared with those
of a national community college sample, the number of students who have transferred
to four-year institutions, and the number of associate degrees conferred. (DC)
Appalachian Regional Commission Washington DC.[BBB00078] (2001). Appalachian
Regional Commission Annual Report, 2001. District of Columbia: 59.
In fiscal year 2001, the Appalachian Regional Commission invested $63.6 million
in 469 economic and human development (nonhighway) projects and $389.6 million
in highway projects in Appalachia. The Commission launched a new initiative
to promote the development of telecommunications infrastructure, especially
in distressed counties. The Commission has continued to push its 5-year entrepreneurship
initiative, which addresses entrepreneurial education and training activities,
technical and managerial assistance, access to capital and financial assistance
for growing companies, the formation of entrepreneurial networks, and technology
transfer activities. The Commission funded 58 education projects and continued
its work on the Appalachian Higher Education Network, which aims to help participating
high schools boost their college-going rates to the national average or higher.
Seventeen computer learning labs were established in the region. Efforts to
bolster the region's civic capacity continued with the provision of leadership
training programs and technical assistance for communities. Efforts to strengthen
infrastructure included the completion of 72 more miles of the Appalachian Development
Highway System and the provision of water or sewer service to over 24,000 households.
During 2001, 68 doctors were placed in the region. Studies were launched on
disparities in health status and in health care accessibility, and on health
care institutions that are at risk of closure. Tables present funding statistics
for the 13 Appalachian states, highway obligations, and population data. Contact
information is given for all local development districts in the Appalachian
region. (TD)
Appavoo, P. J. (1985). Library and Information Access in Distance Education:
The Role of Technology. Canada Alberta: 12.
Libraries in distance education universities such as Athabasca University in
Alberta, Canada, are faced with special difficulties when seeking ways to reach
out to their students to expand their understanding of libraries as information
sources and provide them with the skills to tap library and other information
sources. However, developments in communications and computer technology appear
to provide some answers to the problem of bridging the distance gap in the areas
of bibliographic instruction, reference and information services, and document
delivery. For example, video technology in the form of cassettes or discs would
seem to offer the most viable means of bibliographic instruction at the present
time. Possibilities for reference and information services include access to
the library's online public access catalog (OPAC) via the student's home or
office microcomputer or through regional offices and cooperating institutions.
The provision of information services via telefacsimile and electronic publishing
is a further consideration, but impediments to the use of this option may exist
in the forms of copyright issues, accessibility problems, and expense. Nevertheless,
the electronic library is the natural form for distance education library services,
and it is important to begin to prepare the groundwork for the use of new technological
applications in library services. (Author/KM)
Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Washington DC.[BBB16020]
(1998). ADAAG Manual: A Guide to the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines. District of Columbia: 149.
The Access Board of the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board has issued this guide to assist in the use of its American with Disabilities
Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for buildings and facilities. It explains
some of the basic considerations for accessible design and clarifies specific
ADAAG provisions. Advisory information is provided in the form of recommendations
that are optional and go beyond the minimum required by ADAAG. Information is
categorized under the main areas of scoping and technical requirements for specific
building areas such as toilet facilities, curb ramps, entrances, and elevators;
and special occupancies covering dining facilities, medical facilities, libraries,
and accessible transient lodging. Diagrams, layouts, and other illustrations
are contained throughout the guide. (GR)
Arcia, E. and J. J. Gallagher (1992). Parity or Equity. Can We Even Tell? North
Carolina: 31.
A random sample of 16 coordinators responsible for implementation of Part H
of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act were interviewed to determine
if state data systems will be in a position to assist in monitoring service
goals and in reaching populations typically underserved. The interviews assessed
the availability of sociodemographic variables in states' Part H data systems
and documented coordinators' perceptions of which population was most underserved
in their state. It was found that: (1) accurate count of children served may
still not be possible for 6 of 16 states; (2) 10 of the 16 states collect information
on ethnicity of race; (3) data on family income were collected in 2 states;
(4) none of the coordinators identified African Americans as underserved; (5)
availability was a key barrier to rural populations, and both availability and
accessibility were important barriers to ethnic minorities; and (6) in many
cases, data were not collected for groups identified as most underserved. The
study concludes that data systems should include the following sociodemographic
information on their client population: county of residence, urban/rural/inner
city residence, race/ethnicity, income, insurance coverage, and parental employment
status. (JDD)
Area 5 Vocational Planning Committee Pleasant Hill CA.[BBB12495] (1975). Status
of Vocational Education and Vocational Education Planning in Area V: 27.
A review of the Area V Planning Committee's study and evaluation of vocational
education programs in Alameda and Contra Costa Counties, California, is presented.
Three generalized problem areas were addressed, including: (1) financial support
for needed programs; (2) the development of new programs and the evaluation
of old ones; and, (3) the lack of a system to coordinate programs and encourage
school district cooperation. Problems encountered by the committee included
confusion as to the appropriate roles for the committee, its members, and agencies
in terms of the area planning process. The adequacy of and accessibility to
planning information and financial support for the planning program were also
problem areas. Conclusions and recommendations are presented, emphasizing: coordination
between vocational education programs, financial support from the State government
to help implement educational and manpower information systems, the establishment
of a monitoring system for vocational education program status and planning,
and regulatory measures. A complete listing of the Committee recommendations
and their present status, committee members, and Article 10.4 of the California
Education Code are appended. The document is one of a series regarding Area
V. (LH)
Arizona Board of Regents Phoenix.[BBB20803] (1999). Report Card, 1999 [for]
Arizona's [Public] Universities. Arizona: 31.
This annual report on the performance of the three Arizona universities, Arizona
State University, Northern Arizona University, and the University of Arizona,
informs the general public, elected officials, business leaders, and consumers
of higher education about the universities' progress and milestones. In preparing
the report, the universities each completed a self-assessment for performance
indicators in four categories: quality and effectiveness of undergraduate education,
quality of instruction, demonstrating excellence and innovation, and utilization
of resources; these are then graded by the Board of Regents relative to seven
strategic factors established for improving the quality of Arizona higher education.
The report notes that out of a total of 18 indicators used for the academic
year 1999, 6 were superior, 10 were satisfactory, 2 showed a need for improvement,
and none were unsatisfactory. Other sections of the report include information
on the scope, size and character of the system; a review of the policy achievements
of the Board of Regents in addressing issues of accessibility, community college
students, service to K-l2 education, private sector participation, and planning
for growth; and campus highlights for each of the three universities. (RH)
Arizona Board of Regents Phoenix.[BBB20803] (2000). Arizona University System:
2000 Report Card. Arizona: 32.
This annual report on the performance of the three Arizona universities, Arizona
State University, Northern Arizona University, and the University of Arizona,
informs the general public, elected officials, business leaders, and consumers
of higher education about the universities' progress and milestones. In preparing
the report, the universities complete a self-assessment for performance indicators
in four categories: quality and effectiveness of undergraduate education, quality
of instruction, demonstrating excellence and innovation, and utilization of
resources; these are then graded by the Board of Regents relative to seven strategic
factors established for improving the quality of Arizona higher education. The
report notes that out of a total of 19 indicators used for the academic year
2000, 5 were superior, 12 were satisfactory, 2 showed a need for improvement,
and none were unsatisfactory. Other sections of the report include information
on the scope, size and character of the system; a review of the policy achievements
of the Board of Regents in addressing issues of accessibility, learner-centered
education, tuition and fees, undergraduate accountability, public-private partnerships,
the governor's task force on higher education, the Arizona Partnership for the
New Economy, and biennial budgeting; and campus highlights for each of the three
universities. (RH)
Arkansas State Commission on Coordination of Higher Educational Finance Little
Rock.[BLX04210] (1965). Procedure for the establishment of community junior
colleges in arkansas: 14.
Criteria for establishment of junior college districts in arkansas include (1)
a projected enrollment of at least 300 full time equivalent students in the
third year of operation, (2) assessed valuation adequate to provide from local
property taxes one-third of the annual operating cost and the total debt service
requirements for capital outlay, (3) district size which provides a maximum
one-way commuting time of one hour, (4) a site of at least 40 acres plus two
acres for each 100 full time equivalents, with adequate zoning, topography,
and accessibility, (5) programs of transfer courses, occupational curricula,
and continuing education, (6) building design which conforms to a long range
master plan, meets requirements of appropriate codes, is suitable for the programs
and activities of the college, and is economical and flexible, and (7) a president
with a commitment to and experience in the community college program. junior
colleges are controlled by local boards, and operating expenses are shared equally
by the state, the local district, and the student. the steps required for establishing
a community college are described, and the text of the enabling legislation
is included. (wo)
Arkansas State Dept. of Education Little Rock.[BLX04220] (2000). Arkansas Education
Technology Plan, July 2000. Arkansas: 58.
The revised Arkansas Educational Technology Plan, of the year 2000, is an updated
and more detailed plan that is necessary for providing specific help to all
levels of the state educational system. The primary focus of the plan is to
enhance instruction for higher student achievement through technology and provide
a framework to allow this to occur. The revised plan focuses on K-12 education
and requires details on high priority needs and implementation of solutions.
The planning committee revised the plan recognizing such factors as: technological
progress made over the last several years, increased activities in distance
learning, more computers accessing the Internet, increase demand for more bandwidth,
and changes in local district and state priorities. Contents include: Introduction;
Vision; Mission; Goals; Student Standards for Technology; School Improvement;
Local School District Planning; Professional Development; Infrastructure; Funding;
and Glossary. Appendices include: State Plan Development Timeline; Committee
Membership; Arkansas Department of Education: Information and Technology Section;
Arkansas Educational Service Cooperative Technology Coordinators; Arkansas Public
School Computer Network; Internet Filtering; Accessibility Issues and Policies
for the Visually-Impaired; Status Report on Technology in Arkansas K-12 Schools;
Computer in Arkansas Public School Districts Grades K-12; and Contributors to
Various Technology Related Efforts. A short list of resources for training and
technical assistance for educators is provided. (AEF)
Arkansas Univ. Little Rock.[BBB13433] (1978). Perspectives in Higher Education:
Background Papers on Governmental and Economic Affairs. Arkansas: 44.
Three papers are presented from a conference on governmental and economic affairs
held at the University of Arkansas at Little Rock. In "Federal Legislation
and Higher Education," John P. Mallan pointed out that the major portion
of funds is channeled through student aid programs, and research and development
funds are concentrated in a few institutions. Proposals for accessibility to
federal research funds are presented, and federal regulations for which the
Federal Government pays no implementation costs are discussed. In "Financing
Post Secondary Education: Expenditure Priorities and Tax Effort and Ability
of State and Local Governments," Kenneth E. Quindry recommended that tuition
and fee support be stabilized as to relative share and that such support be
equalized according to ability to pay. Criteria for optimum tax systems are
presented and related to current taxation with the southern region. Southern
Regional Education Board studies of state and local tax ability and tax effort
are discussed. In "Population, Occupational and Economic Factors Related
to Higher Education," Forrest H. Pollard describes demographics of population
growth and migration. Population groups, enrollment patterns, education attainment,
occupational employment, and per capita income for the state of Arkansas, for
Pulaski and adjacent counties, and Little Rock-North Little Rock Standard Metropolitan
Statistical Area are presented. (SW)
Armstrong, K. "Special Software for Special Kids." Technology &
Learning. v16 n2 p56-61 Oct 1995.
Provides a list, organized by company, of access software appropriate for special
education users, and general software such as productivity tools and educational
and recreational software. Sidebars include: software accessibility features
to consider; the Alliance for Technology and Access; and contacts for publishers
and special education leaders. (JKP)
Armstrong, M. D. and R. D. Rada (1989). Examination of Relationships among School
Superintendents: A Network Analysis. Washington: 21.
Although numerous studies target classroom teacher performance or principals'
ability to improve instruction, little attention is given superintendents' leadership
and managerial skills. Especially neglected are relationships among superintendents--despite
their serving a critical function. This study examines the interpersonal network
existing among district superintendents in Washington State. Using a sociometric
test survey, the study examines mutually identified groups (cliques), individuals
connecting between groups (bridges), isolated individuals (isolates), and the
entire superintendent network throughout the state. Also examined are individual
superintendent traits (age, ethnicity, gender, salary, years of experience,
and district size) and district conditions influencing the network's establishment
and continuation. The study draws on three factors possibly influencing the
degree of superintendent connectedness: affiliation, accessibility, and status.
Analysis of affiliation attributes (nonwhite ethnicity, gender, age, and degree
and credentialing institution) indicates that affiliation is the weakest of
the three categories. However, accessibility (measured by educational service
district membership) and status (measured by salary, years of experience, and
student enrollment size) are important factors influencing the establishment
of connections within the network. One-third of the superintendents studied
were isolated from networks, and female superintendents failed to choose friends
among themselves. Implications for induction, mentoring, and support of superintendents
are discussed. (23 references) (MLH)
Armstrong, W. B., M. Lewis, et al. (1997). Americans with Disabilities Act Continuing
Education Self-Evaluation Study. California: 41.
In 1997, the San Diego Community College District conducted a self-evaluation
study of their continuing education programs to assess the program's compliance
with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Ten focus groups revealed their
knowledge and views of the ADA. Students cited the availability of special instructional
accommodations, but noted the lack of emergency telecommunication devices for
the deaf (TDD) services. Administrators felt that an ADA training session was
needed. They cited some necessary improvements of facilities, though most felt
that the architecture and programs were accessible. Staff held divergent views
on the status of ADA implementation, though there was a general consensus that
there was a lack of campus space, and a need for a campus review of access for
the disabled. The Disabled Student Programs and Services Department Staff acknowledged
instructional accommodations, but cited the need for an emergency evacuation
procedure. Faculty and Special Admit Programs, and Business, Facilities, and
Operations staff acknowledged architectural and program accessibility, but felt
that faculty would find ADA training helpful. Although most staff and faculty
believed that accessibility to education and services was implemented, vital
areas such as information, training, and emergency services needed improvement.
(YKH)
Armstrong, W. B., M. Lewis, et al. (1997). Americans with Disabilities Act Mesa
College Self-Evaluation Study. California: 36.
In 1997, the San Diego Community College District conducted a self-evaluation
study of Mesa College to assess its compliance with the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA). Ten focus groups discussed their knowledge and views of the ADA.
Findings for the Student and Disabled Student Group indicated that while there
was a general lack of awareness of special needs and available services for
individuals with disabilities; students did acknowledge certain instructional
accommodations. Administrators demonstrated knowledge of programmatic and instructional
accommodations and declared a commitment to informing staff of ADA policies.
Staff held divergent views, with some staff feeling that most provisions of
the ADA had been accomplished, while others noted areas in need of improvement.
Staff training and campus reviews were advocated. The Student Services and Disabled
Student Programs and Services Department Staff felt the need for continuous
discussion of access issues and greater classroom space. The faculty acknowledged
the instructional accommodations made, and were aware of the employment regulations
of the ADA. The college police and the special admit programs believed that
there was architectural accessibility for the disabled. Site compliance officers
corroborated the aforementioned observations, but felt the need for improved
access to information. (YKH)
Arnold, C. L. (1997). Using National Data Sets To Create Comparable National
Statistics for the Student Characteristics and Outcomes in Community Colleges.
California: 83.
Addressed to institutional researchers, this report from California's Chabot
College presents information on National Center for Education Statistics (NCES)
data sets. Included is a discussion on how these data sets can be used to create
peer groups of U.S. colleges, and to produce statistics on major student variables
for each of these groups. Ideas are presented on how to obtain and work with
NCES data sets, and what resources are needed in terms of time, hardware, software,
supplies, and funds. Three major chapters review the usefulness of two data
sets: the Integrated Postsecondary Education Data System (IPEDS) and the Beginning
Postsecondary Students Longitudinal Study (BPS). The conclusion summarizes the
value and accessibility of these data sets, and helps institutional researchers
evaluate whether they have the inclination or resources to work with either
of the sets, or if published materials are better alternatives. The report contains
21 tables. The appendices contain lists of IPEDS and BPS variables used, supporting
tables, and additional sources of help in using the NCES data sets. (AS)
Arter, M. H. (1981). Use of the Community College Goals Inventory (CCGI) as
an Impetus for Change in a Rural Community College. California: 23.
In an effort to establish priorities for long- and short-range planning, Palo
Verde College (PVC) administered the Educational Testing Service's Community
College Goals Inventory to all PVC faculty and administrators, 20 community
residents, five trustees, and approximately 200 students. The inventory asked
respondents to rate the importance of 105 goals both in terms of existing and
ideal conditions. Three kinds of goals were considered: (1) outcome goals, relating
to issues such as general education, intellectual orientation, lifelong learning,
personal development, remedial preparation, and community services; (2) process
goals, relating to issues such as student services, staff development, innovation,
accessibility, and accountability; and (3) goals relating to college-specific
problems, such as parking and child care services. Findings, based on responses
from 12 instructors, 78 students, seven administrators, three trustees, and
ten area residents, were analyzed to determine those areas with the highest
discrepancy between existing and ideal conditions. The study report details
the survey results and enumerates the activities undertaken by PVC with respect
to the 19 areas that received high discrepancy ratings, including vocational
preparation, counseling, humanism/altruism, effective management, on-campus
access to upper-division study, secure parking, and basic skills instruction.
(JP)
Arthur, W., Jr. and D. Hart (1989). Empirical Relationships between Cognitive
Ability and Computer Familiarity. Texas: 17.
The recent explosions of computer use and accessibility in both academic and
work settings have made computer literacy almost mandatory, yet there are many
individuals who are unfamiliar with computers. Previous research has partially
attributed computer attitudes to past mathematics experience and gender of the
user. This study empirically investigated the relationship between computer
familiarity and cognitive ability in an attempt to identify cognitive ability
as a variable which may account for differences in computer familiarity and
usage. Subjects (N=62), ranging in age from 19 to 40 years of age, completed
two cognitive ability tests and reported their familiarity with computers. Results
indicated that high scorers on the cognitive ability tests were significantly
more familiar with computers. Contrary to previous research, there were no gender
differences in computer familiarity (and cognitive ability). The findings have
implications for educational and organizational practices regarding teaching
lower cognitive ability persons to use computers. Such programs should include
confidence builders, reinforcers, and praise. The programs should move away
from independent self-guided to continued instructor guidance programs. (Author/ABL)
ASCD Improving Student Achievement Research Panel., R. W. Cole, et al. (1995).
Educating everybody's children : diverse teaching strategies for diverse
learners : what research and practice say about improving achievement. Alexandria,
Va., Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development.
Ash, P. a. C., Bruce J. (1953). "The value of note-taking druing film learning"."
Journal of Educational Psychology 23: 121-125.
Aspen Education Development Group Gaithersburg MD.[BBB36369] (2001). Administrator's
Guide to Technology: Planning, Funding & Implementation. Maryland.
This document provides guidelines for administrators related to instructional
technology and planning. Chapter 1 discusses planning, including developing
a technology plan, facility assessment, e-rate planning, formation of a technology
committee, budget planning, and hardware/software replacement plan and costs.
Chapter 2 addresses implementation, including integrating technology into the
curriculum, developing a World Wide Web site, parents as advocates and users,
Internet usage policies and procedures, copyright and antipiracy policies, legal
and ethical issues, and security. Chapter 3 covers funding, including how to
develop proposals, developing business partnerships, federal funders, and private
and corporate funders. Chapter 4 describes equitable instructional technology
resources, including e-learning, distance learning, assistive technology, and
teaching strategies. Chapter 5 discusses software, including selecting software
for the classroom, teacher top picks, and software resources. Chapter 6 addresses
staffing, including job descriptions and professional development. Chapter 7
covers assessment and accountability, including evaluating a technology program,
technology assessment surveys, and technology standards for continuous student
assessment. Appendices include a glossary and a list of resources for acceptable
use policies, assessment and accountability, assistive technology, Web site
accessibility, curriculum integration, distance education, funding, hardware
suppliers, international collaboration on the Web, legal issues, professional
development, school Web site design, technology planning and implementation,
telementoring, virtual schools, and Web safety. (Includes an index.) (MES)
Asselin, S. B. and M. Mooney (1996). Diverse Learners: Strategies for Success.
Virginia: 146.
This instructional resource provides classroom teachers with information for
working successfully with all students by incorporating management tools and
strategies to ensure students' success as they move from school to work. The
guide is organized in five parts. Part I, Strategies for Learning and Teaching,
covers these topics: learning styles, assessment, teaching styles, modifications
and accommodations, motivation, and behavior and classroom management. Part
II, Strategies for Collaboration, suggests methods for successful collaboration
with parents, families, businesses, and the community. It also provides steps
for solving cooperation problems. Part III, School to Career Transition, covers
the role of vocational education teachers in preparing students for careers
and making the transition from school to work. Part IV, Special Needs Populations,
defines the various groups of special needs students, describes national legislation
on educational accessibility for special needs persons, and suggests physical
modifications, assistive technology, and workplace accommodations. Part V, Resources,
contains the following: a glossary of 79 terms; a list of 38 acronyms; a list
of 75 related references and 26 videotapes; a professional resource directory
listing 47 organizations; and a bibliography containing 57 entries. Appendixes
include sample forms and "bright ideas" from teachers dealing with
special needs vocational education students. (KC)
Associated Consultants in Education Tallahassee FL.[HWP04653] (1966). EDSPECS
for the South Campus Seattle Community College: 389.
A concensus of faculty, staff, and consultants regarding the physical requirements
necessary for full implementation of the educational program and services to
be offered. Guidelines for the architects are developed as follows--(1) curricular
implications for facilities, (2) the general nature of activities o f instructional
and non-instructional functions of the college, (3) estimates of the kinds and
numbers of facilities needed, (4) square footage requirements by type of facility,
(5) amounts and types of major items of equipment and furniture needed, (6)
desirable space relationships of facilities, and (7) schematic diagrams of functional
relationships of major space components. Site development criteria emphasizes
the commuter nature of the student population, accessibility of the instructional
materials center from primary pedestrian arteries, provision for future facilities
expansion, and extensive nighttime use of facilities. Detailed specialized equipment
needs and square footage requirements by function for 5,000 full-time enrolled
students are given in appendices. (RLP)
Associated Educational Consultants Inc. Pittsburgh PA.[BBB12997] (1978). Physical
Accessibility of Public Supported Vocational Schools for Handicapped Students.
Pennsylvania: 73.
A study was conducted to (1) identify what structural changes need to be made
to existing buildings in order to make vocational programs accessible to handicapped
persons in Pennsylvania and (2) determine the costs of making required structural
modifications. Ten persons who were either handicapped or who were associated
with programs designed for handicapped were interviewed to develop a checklist
to be used by the evaluators when conducting on-site visits. The checklist consisted
of a list of fifteen physical barriers for handicapped students. Site visits
were conducted to seventy-eight area vocational technical schools, sixteen comprehensive
high schools, and fifteen community colleges. Among the findings was that none
of the schools was in full compliance with the provisions of Section 504 of
the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. In order to make all vocational programs accessible
to handicapped persons, it is estimated that the total cost for needed modifications
is $2,562,921.00 in area vocational technical schools, $499,468.00 in community
colleges, and $834,550.00 in twelve comprehensive high schools. (Tables showing
items at each school not in compliance with American National Standards Institute
standards and estimated costs for modifications are provided. The accessibility
checklist is appended.) (LRA)
Association of Colleges of Applied Arts and Technology of Ontario North York.[BBB30399]
(2000). Ontario's Colleges: Leaders in Applied Learning. Presentation to Investing
in Students Task Force. Canada Ontario: 38.
This paper provides an overview of Ontario's colleges of applied arts and technology
as leaders in applied learning, accessibility, training, quality and innovation,
affordability and accountability. Highlights of the diversity of college activities
and innovations are included but do not reflect a comprehensive picture of colleges'
initiatives. Colleges serve 200 communities in Ontario providing various educational
activities to meet the local needs. Postsecondary enrollment has increased by
35% since 1990. In addition to full-time postsecondary programs, colleges also
provide many program options for adult learners. Partnerships between colleges,
colleges and the private sector and colleges and government have become increasingly
important for institutions, employers, and students to maintain a current and
skilled workforce. For example, Access to Opportunities Program, a government
initiative requiring partnerships, was created to respond to the shortage of
skilled high-tech professionals in Ontario. The paper concludes by describing
the initiatives the Association of College of Applied Arts and Technology of
Ontario (ACAATO) will be undertaking in response to the invitation of the Investing
in Students Task Force. Appendices detailing learner profiles, samples of college
partnerships and centers of excellence and the projected operating grant shortfall
to 2010 are included. (JA)
Association of Physical Plant Administrators of Universities and Colleges Washington
DC.[BBB07734] (1979). Steps Toward Campus Accessibility. District of Columbia:
50.
Photo-essays focus on the progress colleges and universities have made in achieving
program accessibility for handicapped persons in compliance with Section 504
of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. Both common problems and innovative solutions
to unique problems are included. "People We Never See" introduces
the challenge higher education faces to overcome both attitudinal and architectural
barriers. "Becoming Aware" depicts campus activities designed to sensitize
administrators and students to problems handicapped persons face. "Matching
Places to People" specifically deals with architectural modifications that
involve adapting facilities to the persons who use them instead of requiring
handicapped persons to overcome barriers. "Opening Doors to Special Spaces"
shows how campuses have made science laboratories and sports facilities accessible
to handicapped persons. "Protecting Human Lives" addresses the problems
of assuring the safety of all persons on campuses and establishing emergency
procedures appropriate for both able-bodied and handicapped persons. Other articles
include "Taking Time to Listen," "Providing the Comforts of Home,"
"Putting the Campus on the Map," "New Wheels to Freedom,"
"Bridging Communications Gaps," and "The Ultimate Benefit."
(Author/MLF)
Atan, H., F. Sulaiman, et al. "Gender Differences in Availability, Internet
Access and Rate of Usage of Computers among Distance Education Learners."
Educational Media International. v39 n3-4 p205-10 Sep 2002.
Explores the level of availability of computers, Internet accessibility, and
the rate of usage of computers both at home and at the workplace between distance
education learners according to gender. Results of questionnaires completed
at the Universiti Sains Malaysia indicate that distance education reduces the
gender gap. (Author/LRW)
Aune, B. "Report on an International Conference on Disability in Higher
Education." Journal of Postsecondary Education and Disability. v10 n2
p27-36 Spr 1993.
An international conference of disability service providers in higher education
from 15 countries is summarized. Major sessions on disability services in different
countries and on identifying needs and resources for students with disabilities
are described. Topics addressed include status and trends in services, public
policy, accessibility and adaptive technology, and use of volunteers. (MSE)
Australian National Training Authority Brisbane.[BBB34088] (1996). An Approach
to Achieving Access and Equity in Vocational Education and Training: Issues
Paper. Australia Queensland: 43.
Australia's first national strategy for vocational education and training (VET),
"Towards a Skilled Australia," was formulated in 1994. Within the
theme of improved accessibility, the strategy identifies the following groups
as disadvantaged in VET: women, Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people,
disabled people, people of a non-English speaking background, people in remote
and rural areas, people without adequate English language and literacy levels,
and unemployed people. It was determined that the national strategy would be
redeveloped in 1996 to allow for developments in VET and the following issues:
progress to date in access and equity; emerging issues and populations; key
features of the national VET system; existing VET planning processes; standards
and curriculum; delivery; information and communication; student support; cultural
shifts; successful ventures; and future strategies. Fifty questions pertaining
to these issues have been identified that will be considered at Australia-wide
consultations designed to refine those provisions of Australia's national strategy
for VET that are related to access and equity and improve access and equity
for those groups identified as educationally disadvantaged. (Appended are key
findings of a baseline VET participation analysis and a summary of progress
on relevant measures contained in Australia's 1994 national strategy.) (MN)
Australian National Training Authority Brisbane.[BBB34088] (1996). Australia's
Vocational Education and Training System--Volume I. Annual National Report 1995.
Australia Queensland: 48.
In 1995, efforts to develop Australia's vocational education and training (VET)
system focused on implementing Australia's first national strategy for VET,
Towards a Skilled Australia. All stakeholders in VET worked to advance Australia's
national strategy for VET, which revolved around the following four themes:
responsiveness (maximizing diversity, choice, and cooperation among public,
private, and industrial training partners); quality (supporting high standards);
accessibility (enabling all Australians who want/need training to get it); and
efficiency (emphasizing value for money/accountability and streamlining administrative
arrangements). After a major review of VET, a package of measures was developed
to achieve a more flexible VET system with more emphasis on the relationship
between training providers and clients. Among the areas in which major initiatives
were undertaken or completed in 1995 were the following: facilitation of industry
input and client choice; competitive tendering; flexible delivery; frontline
management; identification/dissemination of best practices; and quality assurance
through development of a national curriculum and national assessment system
and qualifications framework. (Eighteen figures/tables are included. Appended
are lists of members of the following organizations in 1995: state and territory
training authority boards; Standards and Curriculum Council; and National Staff
Development Committee.) (MN)
Australian National Training Authority Brisbane.[BBB34088] (1997). Australia's
Vocational Education & Training System Annual National Report 1996. Volume
1: National Overview. Australia Queensland: 64.
This document outlines the major features and achievements of the Australian
vocational education and training system in 1996 and provides some illustrative
examples of specific initiatives undertaken by states, territories, and the
Commonwealth. Among the major achievements detailed in the report are the following:
(1) for students--35,000 more places in vocational education and training, agreement
to expand vocational education and training into schools with links to apprenticeship
programs, more flexible delivery of training, development of strategies to redress
barriers and inequitable outcomes for specific client groups, and piloting projects
in several areas; (2) for employers--simpler processes for developing skills
and a more flexible national training system, increased quality and relevance
of employment-based training, and increased resources to finance growth in traineeships;
and (3) for providers--increases in flexible delivery options, promotion of
best practices, increased public funding, and reduced regulation and a focus
on guaranteeing outputs. In summary, the achievements can be considered in terms
of greater responsiveness, enhanced quality, improved accessibility, and increased
efficiency. Financial information is included in the report. (KC)
Australian National Training Authority Brisbane.[BBB34088] (1997). Australia's
Vocational Education & Training System Annual National Report, 1996. Volume
2: Commonwealth, State & Territory Achievements. Australia Queensland:
112.
This document contains a chapter from each Australian State and Territory and
from the Commonwealth on their full range of achievements in 1996 related to
the National Strategy for Vocational Education and Training. Achievements of
all State and Territory Training Authorities are outlined in terms of the four
themes of the national strategy: greater responsiveness, enhanced quality, improved
accessibility, and increased efficiency. The report also includes information
on Commonwealth initiatives in vocational education and training. Among the
major achievements detailed in the report are the following: (1) reform of the
apprenticeship and traineeship system; (2) reform of the vocational education
system; (3) literacy training; (4) small business services; (5) quality initiatives;
(6) migrant services; (7) improving access for disadvantaged groups; (8) industry-education
partnerships; (9) development of the training market; and (10) small business
training opportunities for women. (KC)
Australian National Training Authority Brisbane.[BBB34088] (1998). Australia's
Vocational Education & Training System. Annual National Report. Volume 1:
National Overview [and] Volume 2: Commonwealth, State & Territory Achievements.
Australia Queensland: 154.
This document consists of the first two volumes of the 1997 annual report on
Australia's vocational education and training (VET) system. Examined in volume
1 are the following topics: strategic directions for 1997; overview of the VET
system's operation and the Australian National Training Authority (ANTA) agreement;
key initiatives in 1997 (the National Training Framework, New Apprenticeships,
User Choice, industry advice, improved efficiency and accountability); greater
responsiveness (allocation of resources through competitive processes, flexible
delivery, the frontline management initiative, professional development, demand
for VET, small business, training culture); enhanced quality (best practice
and quality assurance, the National Training Framework, and national VET research);
improved accessibility (New Apprenticeships, group training, equity and participation
in VET, VET in schools, adult and community education); increased efficiency
(national key performance measures, national VET statistics, national costing
studies, the infrastructure program, promotion of VET); national programs; national
projects; and financial information. Appended are lists of 1997 state and territory
ANTA board members and National Training Framework committee members. In volume
2, the full range of achievements in VET in 1997 throughout the commonwealth
as a whole and in each of Australia's eight states and territories are detailed
against the background of Australia's national strategy themes. (MN)
Baca, L. (1980). Policy Options for Insuring the Delivery of an Appropriate
Education to Handicapped Children Who Are of Limited English Proficiency. Virginia:
58.
The report analyzes policy issues in the education of bilingual exceptional
students. Chapter 1 provides a historical review of the question, including
overviews of litigation and legislation and findings regarding the effectiveness
of bilingual education. Significant issues are considered in Chapter 2, including
programmatic options, removable barriers, specially designed instruction, program
costs, teacher competencies, needed changes in teacher programs, and parental
involvement. Current practices in the state of Massachusetts and in the Waukegan
(Illinois) public schools are cited. The final chapter lists six current requirements
for serving bilingual handicapped students and notes policy options (with potential
positive and negative effects) for 19 aspects, including screening, bilingual
advocacy, establishment of primary need, parent and community involvement, accessibility,
minimum services, and inservice training. (CL)
Baca, L. and J. Bransford (1982). An Appropriate Education for Handicapped Children
of Limited English Proficiency. Special Education in America: Its Legal and
Governmental Foundations Series. Virginia: 31.
Part of a series on the legal and governmental foundations governing education
of handicapped and gifted children, the booklet focuses on bilingual special
education. A review of the literature covers studies which have been conducted
in a variety of bilingual program settings in the United States and several
other countries. Cited among findings are that children involved in learning
environments employing the use of two languages perform at a level equal to
or higher than their monolingual counterparts, and although handicapped children
of limited English proficiency have not been properly served by the public schools,
there are a number of exemplary programs. Federal legislation and court cases
relating to bilingual special education are examined. Significant issues in
the provision of bilingual special education are discussed, including accessibility,
resources, cost of programs, personnel preparation, parental and community support,
and program evaluation. Finally, current requirements according to the Office
for Civil Rights are listed; and examples of policy options are offered relating
to screening, acceptable tests, testing guidelines, bilingual advocates, establishment
of primary needs, use of parents' language, establishment of primary responsibilities,
comprehensive services, use of existing services, bilingual special education,
supplementary services, tutorial services, parent and community involvement,
accessibility, removal of barriers, exit criteria, inservice training, teacher
certification, and teacher training. (SW)
Backman, C. A. (1994). "Finding an Effective Note-Taking System for Math
Students." Teaching & Change 2(1): 73-88.
A high school mathematics teacher designed an action research project to help
students learn effective notetaking for studying and for organizing and remembering
information. Fifty students completed questionnaires about their notetaking
habits and ways to improve them. After discussing survey findings, students
designed their own formats and refined their notetaking systems. (SM)
Badger, W. and R. C. Reilly "Teaching with Technology: Creating Student
Centered Classrooms. Book Review." Canadian Journal of Research in Early
Childhood Education. v6 n4 p367-68 Feb 1998.
Reviews "Teaching with Technology: Creating Student Centered Classrooms"
by J. Haymore Sandholtz, C. Ringstaff, and D.C. Dwyer, a report on the Apple
Classrooms Of Tomorrow Project. Notes that strengths of the book include its
accessibility for teachers and administrators, use of quotations from teachers
to illustrate the change processes involved in the project, and its avoidance
of statistics. (KB)
Baker, M. H. "Technology and Teaching in the Communications Age."
Mid-Western Educational Researcher. v11 n1 p41-42 Win 1998.
College faculty are pressured to use technology to improve teaching and achieve
institutional goals but resist technology due to lack of time, funds, confidence,
support staff, or accessibility. Over 30 concrete suggestions are offered for
integrating technology into professional and teaching situations, including
getting started, streamlining paperwork, and putting a technology plan into
motion. (SAS)
Baker, N. E. "[Accessible Rural Housing.]." Rural Exchange. v8
n1 1995: 13.
This issue of the quarterly newsletter "Rural Exchange" provides information
and resources on accessible rural housing for the disabled. "Accessible
Manufactured Housing Could Increase Rural Home Supply" (Nick Baker) suggests
that incorporation of access features such as lever door handles and no-step
entries into manufactured housing could help to meet the growing demand for
accessible housing in rural areas. Difficulties to be overcome include zoning
restrictions, lending policies of local banks, and ignorance of local manufactured
housing dealers. A four-page fact sheet on accessible rural housing contains
a statement of the problem; a sample design of an accessible three-bedroom house;
and a list of resources for advocacy, design information, remodeling techniques,
products and building materials, and educational opportunities for building
industry professionals. "The HAMMER Project: A Partnership That Creates
Accessible Housing" (Duane French, Bill Crandall) describes a project in
Fairbanks (Alaska) that provides affordable accessibility modifications to private
homes though a partnership among the local carpenters' union, Access Alaska,
Easter Seals, and private businesses. Short features describe AgrAbility, a
federal program that enables disabled farmers and ranchers to continue living
on their land; discuss a Montana information network for people with disabilities;
note that housing information is available at local libraries; and recommend
a 57-page book "Building a Ramp," by John Henson. (SV)
Baker, R. (1993). Designing the future : the computer in architecture and
design. New York, Thames and Hudson.
Balageur, I. (1992). Quality in Services for Young Children: A Discussion Paper.
Belgium: 36.
This document is a combined version of two papers originally presented at a
1990 European seminar on quality in services to young children. The papers,
which considered the definition of quality in child services and the topics
of quality assurance and monitoring, respectively, were revised in the light
of comments made during and after the seminar in order to produce a single discussion
document. In its discussion of quality in child services, the document takes
into consideration the viewpoints of children, parents, and professionals, and
examines quality in child services from a broad and value-based perspective,
rather than a perspective that stresses limited and quantitative measures of
quality. Criteria for measuring quality in child service programs are organized
into 10 areas: (1) accessibility and use; (2) physical environment; (3) learning
activities; (4) relationships among children and adults involved in the service
program; (5) parents' views; (6) the program's relationship to the community;
(7) diversity; (8) assessment of children's progress; (9) costs; and (10) the
ethos of the program. Issues relating to quality assurance in child service
programs are also organized into 10 areas: policy; legislation and standards;
financing; planning and monitoring; advisory and support services; staffing;
training; physical resources; research and development; and coordination of
services. For each of the areas considered in the document, a series of key
questions is provided. (BC)
Balch, D. E. and I. F. Patino (1997). Learning Online: A 20th Century Zen Experience.
California: 12.
California's Rio Hondo Community College (RHCC) began developing on-line programs
in response to rapidly approaching external changes affecting education and
training. These changes included reduced funding for expansion, increased needs
for inservice training, increasing numbers of adult students, and the growth
of computer technologies and the Internet. Current distance learning applications
allow colleges to combine new roles for teachers and learners, new learning
paradigms, and technology that increases speed and accessibility. In developing
the new program, however, planners at RHCC faced immediate resistance to change
among faculty and staff. In addition, the following issues and obstacles had
to be addressed: (1) gaining the support of key administrators; (2) convincing
faculty, the Academic Senate, and the college's Curriculum Committee that distance
learners would receive the same support and quality instruction as on-campus
learners; (3) obtaining the support and assistance of colleagues in the target
department; (4) assessing student needs and piloting courses; (5) maintaining
adequate technology and deciding upon elements to be implemented; and (6) allowing
sufficient time to implement the program. The obstacles were overcome, however,
and, as of 1997, 24 Web-based professional update courses related to peace officer
education were offered through the college's Public Service department. The
course pages include course titles, descriptions, learning goals, activities,
assignments, and links to other Internet resources. Contains 18 footnotes. (HAA)
Baldwin, B. and A. Sinclair (1994). The Status of Technology Usage in Southeastern
Louisiana and the Impediments to Technology Usage. Louisiana: 12.
A survey of 131 southeast Louisiana educators revealed a significant discrepancy
between educators' familiarity with technology and media, and the accessibility
of such technology. A questionnaire asked subjects (73% female, and 27% male)
to respond to a variety of items indicating familiarity with and accessibility
to technology. In addition, respondents were asked to describe major impediments
to technology usage, and to indicate what types of assistance would be most
helpful in promoting technology use. Overall, respondents consistently reported
that their level of technology knowledge exceeded the availability of the technology.
For example, although 80% of the subjects reported being somewhat or very familiar
with CD-ROM technology, only 51% reported having that type of technology available
in their schools. Educators reported that the most serious impediment to technology
usage was the lack of hardware (approximately 80%), followed by lack of training
and lack of software (approximately 78% each). Respondents also reported that
in-service workshops, conferences, and district technology consultants were
helpful means of gaining technological knowledge. Three tables illustrate data.
(Contains six references.) (Author/MAS)
Balsamo, F. (2000). Education Access: National Inquiry into Rural and Remote
Education. Australia New South Wales: 144.
This report examines limits on access to education in Australia. Accessibility
must be available without discrimination because of physical or economic limitations.
Chapters are devoted to nine different types of limited accessibility, affecting:
children with disabilities, especially in remote areas without alternative local
schools; children isolated from public transport or denied access to school
buses; students studying by distance education who are dependent on unreliable
power sources or inadequate or very expensive telecommunications infrastructure;
Indigenous children in Homeland Centres and remote communities without schools,
teachers, or tutors to supervise distance education; Indigenous teenagers with
no accessible secondary school curriculum; non-English-speaking children whose
curriculum is in English; students in vocational programs who cannot find work
experience placements locally and who cannot afford the costs involved in placements
away from home; teenagers whose only chance of a secondary education is a boarding
school at risk of losing its subsidies; and schools trying to use computers
and the Internet where the telecommunications infrastructure is inadequate.
The report uses a combination of case studies, evidence submitted to the National
Inquiry into Rural and Remote Education, and information about government programs
to illustrate the limits presented. It concludes each chapter with recommendations
on how to address these limits. A map of each state and territory shows junior
and senior secondary school locations and school-aged populations. (Contains
39 references.) (TD)
Baltimore County Community Coll. MD.[BBB37221] (2002). Institutional Performance
Accountability Report, 2002. Maryland: 19.
This report from the Community College of Baltimore County (CCBC) (Maryland)
provides information on the following topics: accessibility and affordability,
student success, diversity, support of regional economic and workforce development,
effective use of public funding, and community outreach. The report notes that
CCBC experienced a 6% increase in full-time-equivalent enrollment (FTE) and
a 3% increase in the unduplicated number of credit students in fiscal year 2002.
Student success initiatives described in the report include program-level efforts
designed to increase retention and an institutional-level examination of graduate
satisfaction with transfer preparation. In a discussion of diversity, the author
notes that "embracing diversity" is one of the eight strategic directions
for the college and that minority students have been the fastest-growing proportion
of the CCBC's credit-student body (now making up 31% of the students enrolled
in credit programs). The report also describes the specifics of a Title III
grant awarded to the college that supports a college-wide learning assistance/developmental
education program. The final section of the report summarizes the impact of
CCBC community outreach initiatives. This discussion focuses on public school
partnerships, programs sponsored by the Continuing Education and Economic Development
division, and state government initiatives. (RC)
Bar, L. and J. Galluzzo (1999). The Accessible School: Universal Design for
Educational Settings. California.
This book provides practical reasons for the Americans with Disabilities Act
requirements for accessibility of school sites, buildings, and educational rooms
as well as clear illustrations to aid in the explanation of the guidelines.
It addresses practical matters such as safety and cost-effectiveness while increasing
sensitivity to different levels of physical ability, locomotion, sensory awareness,
and intellectual ability. Specific topics involving ADA guidelines include space
allowances, reach ranges for wheelchair users, vehicle and pedestrian access,
safety in outdoor play and learning environments, emergency systems, restrooms,
and drinking fountains. Besides standard classrooms, room accessibility guidelines
also cover art and music rooms, home economics rooms, science labs, greenhouses
and gardens, assembly areas, gymnasiums, cafeterias, and libraries and media
centers. (GR)
Barbeau, M. (1977). The Role of the University With Respect to Enrollments and
Career Opportunities, Admission Policies, Continuing Education and Community
Colleges. AACC Policy Studies. Study No. 1. Canada Ontario: 122.
A study of postsecondary education in Canada considers admission policies, the
relationship between university programs and career opportunities, continuing
education, and the relative roles of universities and community colleges. Three
problems are discussed: the economic situation which calls into question the
value of the high cost postsecondary system with its uncertain economic benefits,
the changed nature of the secondary school curriculum, and the decline in the
traditional university age population. The nature and purpose of universities
are considered with respect to the liberal arts and sciences, professional schools,
and graduate education. The need for continuing education, types of study, and
the need for greater organization of the educational system are discussed. Postsecondary
institutions by provinces are described and are compared to the university systems
with regard to admissions and academic programs. National policy issues considered
include accessibility, transferability, and rationalization and coordination.
Possible roles in educational planning and coordination of the Federal government
and the Council of Ministers of Education are discussed. Recommendations are
offered on all of the topics. (SW)
Bardellini, S. C. and R. C. C. Hartman (1982). Higher Education and the Handicapped:
Resource Directory, 1982-1983. District of Columbia: 27.
The resource directory lists agencies helpful in resolving issues regarding
higher education and disabled students. A brief analysis of provisions of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (Section 504) is followed by a listing of Section
504 Technical Assistance staff in 10 regional offices and a discussion of support
and funding resources. Descriptions of agencies or publications are provided
on the following topics: general awareness, disability awareness (hearing and
vision impairment and learning disability), architectural accessibility, program
accessibility, employment, independent living, legal resources, and federal
resources. (CL)
Barker, P. E. and S. E. Rebelsky (2002). ED-MEDIA 2002 World Conference on Educational
Multimedia, Hypermedia & Telecommunications. Proceedings (14th, Denver,
Colorado, June 24-29, 2002). Virginia: 2215.
This 14th annual ED-MEDIA conference serves as a multi-disciplinary forum for
the discussion and exchange of information on the research, development, and
applications on all topics related to multimedia, hypermedia and telecommunications/distance
education. ED-MEDIA, the premiere international conference in the field, spans
all disciplines and levels of education and attracts more than 1,000 attendees
from over 50 countries. This document contains papers from attendees representing
researchers in over 60 countries, with 162 Full Papers, 255 Brief Papers, and
220 Posters. The focus of ED-MEDIA is technology in education with many different
approaches to using the available technology for the realization of educational
aims. Topics of papers include: evaluations of new teaching designs, techniques
and tools; case studies on the use of technology in physical or virtual classrooms;
discussion of new technologies and applications; applications of educational
technology in a variety of disciplines; theoretical considerations of the motivations
and impact of technology; partnerships and cooperative programs; and accessibility
issues for the disabled. There are 2 poster sessions (with 225 posters), 10
panels, workshops, and an evening of special interest group (SIG) sessions.
(AEF)
Barley, Z. A. and M. Jenness (1994). The Role of Evaluation in Systemic Change
in Education. Michigan: 19.
The current wave of reform in education, often referred to as systemic change,
requires specific evaluation needs, especially at the school district level.
Evaluation must address both the local district effort for systemic reform and
restructuring. The state and national need to demonstrate accomplishment of
student outcomes and adherence to professional standards should be taken into
consideration. As evaluators of the Michigan Statewide Systemic Initiative (MSSI),
a National Science Foundation sponsored program for reform of mathematics and
science education, the authors operate under the premises that everyone is a
stakeholder in the evaluation and that all stakeholders need to be actively
and collaboratively involved. A collaborative, constructivist approach to evaluating
the MSSI gives due consideration to the statewide and local interests. The authors
used variables related to knowledge accessibility, the press for achievement,
and professional teaching conditions to construct seven instruments for evaluation
to allow the district to compare itself to similar districts. One table lists
the variables. (Contains 30 references.) (SLD)
Barnett, J., E., DiVesta, Francie J. ; and Rogoziniski, James T. (1981). ""What
is learned note taking?"" Journal of Educational Psychology
23(2): 181-192.
Barraza, D. A. "Using a Building's Site To Maximize Accessibility."
College Planning & Management. v6 n6 p52,54 Jun 2003.
Describes a new basketball arena at the University of Missouri that meet the
accessibility requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act through careful
use of the site to take advantage of site grading and provide multiple accessible
entries while ensuring visibility and circulation. (SLD)
Barrett, R. (2001). Out of Touch. Interactive Week, ZDNet. 8: 45-46.
Focuses on the accessibility of web sites to handicapped users in the U.S. Optimization
of the Coca-Cola Co. web site for the blind; Provisions included in the 1998
Rehabilitation Act federal statute on web accessibility; Advantage of web development
tools to handicapped users.
Bart, J. (2000). Women succeeding in the sciences : theories and practices
across disciplines. West Lafayette, Ind., Purdue University Press.
Barton, D. and M. E. Hamilton (1990). Researching Literacy in Industrialised
Countries: Trends and Prospects. UIE Reports 2. West Germany: 65.
Influences upon trends in literacy research include national and international
agendas, active networks, and public images of literacy. Five trends in literacy
research can be discerned. The first trend is research that tries to determine
the extent of difficulties with literacy and its causes. Another trend is a
shift in views and definitions of literacy toward a "social view."
Third, a trend toward developing models of literacy learning appropriate for
adults is noticeable. The fourth trend is an appreciation of the diversity of
needs for literacy within the populations of industrialized countries and the
development of flexible types of provision to meet these needs. A fifth trend
is toward seeing literacy within the broader framework of language policy within
a country and investigating the accessibility of contemporary language. Appropriate
prerequisites for adult literacy research are examination of links between research
and practice, an interdisciplinary approach, and international networks. (Appendixes
include 129 references, examples of international and national agendas for literacy,
summaries of methods and results of selected literacy surveys, and information
on an exchange network on functional literacy in industrialized countries. An
abstract in French is provided.) (YLB)
Bate, F. and R. Oliver (2002). Beyond W3C: TruVision--Enhanced Online Learning
for People Blind or Vision Impaired. Australia Western Australia: 7.
This paper describes the design and development of TruVision, an online learning
environment designed to enable blind and vision impaired students to develop
skills and expertise in elementary and advanced information processing strategies
to enable them to seek full-time employment within industry in such positions
as administrative assistants, Help Desk personnel and data entry operators.
Truvision is a product within The Flexible Learning Toolboxes Project, a component
of the Australian Flexible Learning Framework for the National Vocational Education
and Training System 2000-2004 (AFL Framework). The AFL Framework is designed
to support the accelerated take-up of flexible learning modes and position Australian
VET as a world leader in applying new technologies to vocational education products
and services. This paper describes the TruVision product and showcases its innovative
design based on very stringent accessibility needs and guidelines. (Author)
Bates, P. E. (1981). Mainstreaming: Our Current Knowledge Base. Minnesota:
191.
The nine author contributed chapters are intended to provide a basic introduction
to the rationale and processes of mainstreaming handicapped children. The first
paper, "The Whys and Hows of Mainstreaming" by T. Tice, provides a
philosophical examination of the basic principles of P.L. 94-142, the Education
for All Handicapped Children Act, and its counterparts in Canada and England.
In the second chapter, "Mainstreaming and the Myth of Equality," K.
Okun examines the historical exclusion of handicapped pupils from general education
classes, the rise of special education, and issues that arise when equal educational
opportunities are sought for all children. Next, C. Vergon and J. Ross consider
"Educating Handicapped with Nonhandicapped Children--The Legal Foundation
for the Least Restrictive Environment Concept" through a summary of the
law's terms and provisions and the possibility of a national policy on education
for handicapped persons. R. Jones, et al. examines the potential for modifying
attitudes of school personnel toward mainstreaming and suggest directions for
future research in the area of attitudes and attitude assessment in their paper
entitled "Attitudes and Mainstreaming--Theoretical Perspectives."
M. Trippe and L. Choksey in "Accessibility and Barrier-Free Design"
stress architectural accessibility as a life span developmental need of the
general population as well as the handicapped. "What We Know About Mainstreaming
from Experience" by N. Zigmond and J. Sansone gives a description of different
mainstream arrangements and the necessary conditions for success. R. Bruininks
and V. Bruininks look at institutionalized children and youth and the educational
responsibility of their local school districts in a paper entitled "Deinstitutionalization--Implications
for Special Education." The last two chapters stress practical aspects
of mainstreaming. They are: "Organizing the School's Social Structure for
Mainstreaming" by D. Johnson and R. Johnson and "Self Management in
Classrooms--Implications for Mainstreaming" by G. Markel. (DB)
Batty, M. "Teaching Spatial Modelling Using Interacting Computers and Interactive
Computer Graphics." Journal of Geography in Higher Education. v9 n1
p25-36 1985.
Described is a project that involved undergraduate geography students in developing
a model of the accessibility of the pre-school population in Cardiff (England)
to child care clinics. Programing skills were acquired through spatial modelling.
Networks of mini- and micro-computers were used. (Author/RM)
Bausch, P. T. "The Impact of the Americans with Disabilities Act on University
Continuing Education." Journal of Continuing Higher Education. v42 n3
p10-15 Fall 1994.
Presents the fundamentals of the Americans with Disabilities Act for university
continuing education in terms of determining disability, physical accessibility,
and limitations on accommodation. Recommends evaluation of employment policies,
student programs and services, and facilities. (SK)
Bauser, W. W. (1997). Development of Student Assessment Survey for Northeastern
University's University College Liberal Arts Program. Massachusetts: 57.
This practicum report describes the development of a student assessment survey
to evaluate whether the liberal arts programs at Northeastern University (Massachusetts)
were meeting the needs of the adult student population. Emphasis was on determining
appropriate content and format design for a student assessment survey. A student
outcomes survey was designed and was pilot tested with seven graduates of the
liberal arts programs. Validation indicated the measure was useful in assessing
the outcomes of graduates. The measure allowed respondents to evaluate the program's
effectiveness in developing respondents' comprehension, accessibility, retrieval,
and communication skills and appeared to be relevant to the educational experience
and career choice of the adult student. It was also concluded that the mail
survey was the best format. Appendices include names of individuals involved
in the study, a list of survey objectives, and the survey instrument itself.
(Contains 28 references.) (DB)
Baxter, J. T. and M. T. Miller (1998). Graduate Education on the Internet: An
Issue of Quality and Accessibility. Georgia: 19.
This study examined faculty perceptions of accessibility and quality of graduate
programs offered via the Internet. A total of 25 faculty (38 percent return
rate) with experience teaching graduate courses via the Internet completed an
e-mailed survey. It was found that half of the respondents had less than one
year of experience teaching graduate courses using the Internet, and that nearly
all also taught college courses in a traditional classroom setting. The largest
groups of respondents taught graduate courses in education (32 percent), communications
(20 percent), and the liberal arts or humanities (16 percent). Over two-thirds
of the respondents reported that they were satisfied with their preparation
time and efforts in teaching via the Internet. Respondents indicated that course
or program administration was the most important environmental factor when considering
course quality and accessibility. A high level of satisfaction was reported
by most of the respondents in regard to the quality of the courses taught via
the Internet. Data tables show results of the survey. (Contains 10 references.)
(MDM)
Beatty, P. T. (1981). Determining Where Information Can Be Found. An Introduction
to Needs Assessment. Special Community Service and Continuing Education Project.
Final Report. Texas: 24.
One of a series of instructional booklets designed to introduce adult education
program planners to the basic concepts integral to and alternative strategies
for conducting needs assessments, this instructional booklet deals with determining
where to find information for use in conducting needs assessments. Described
first is the relationship of the process of determining where information can
be found to the entire needs assessment process. Next concepts and processes
are set forth for locating representative authority groups from institutions
and associations as well as independent individual authorities. Following a
discussion of the concept of target population, basic steps are provided for
identifying and describing a representative sample of the target population
for a needs assessment. Examined next are the basic types of printed information
as well as their accessibility in relation to given needs assessment undertakings.
(MN)
Beck, P. (2002). GlobaLinks: Resources for Asian Studies, Grades K-8. Ohio:
225.
The growing accessibility of the Internet in schools and homes has removed borders
and barriers to learning. Schools can maximize students' multicultural experiences
by developing curricula that heighten global consciousness and responsibility.
This book seeks to offer current resources that are available for purchase or
through school and public libraries that help fulfill national standards for
social studies, geography, language arts, information literacy, science, technology,
life skills, and character education. The book is intended as a guide for unlocking
the treasures of Asia's history, people, culture, and environment. Part 1 offers
specialized resources on Asia, grouped into sections on Central Asia, East Asia,
Southeast Asia, Southern Asia, and Southwest Asia. It begins with general Asian
fiction; folktales, fairy tales, myths, and legends; nonfiction and reference;
Asian Americans; and videos if there are extensive resources. There are also
subdivisions by genre. Part 2 lists Asia resource Web sites for specific countries.
Part 3 lists e-mail addresses and listservs available for key pal/pen pal projects
for classroom collaborations or individual pursuit. Appendix A includes World
Resource Web sites that can be used for research of specific Asian countries.
Appendix B contains a Web site by title index. Appendix C lists short story
and folktale titles mentioned in annotations. (Contains author/illustrator,
title, and subject indexes.) (BT)
Becker, S. A. (2004). E-Government Visual Accessibility for Older Adult Users.
Social Science Computer Review, Sage Publications Inc. 22: 11-23.
The web offers an unprecedented opportunity to gain immediate access to government
resources that might not otherwise be available to many older adults aged 60
years and over. Yet due to aging vision, there remain design barriers to the
use of state and federal government web sites. This research describes aging
vision and its impact on the accessibility of government web sites. It incorporates
the guidelines published by the National Institute on Aging (NIA) for making
senior-friendly web sites. Several software tools, including Dottie and Usability
Enforcer, are described in terms of their functionality in promoting senior-friendly
web sites. Data generated by the software tools and manual assessment are used
to evaluate e-government compliance with vision-related NIA accessibility guidelines.ABSTRACT
FROM AUTHOR
Beckham, J. C. (1992). School Officials and the Courts: Update 1992. ERS Monograph.
Virginia: 60.
During the past year, in cases involving the authority of school boards to make
curricular decisions and provide for services, the courts have balanced school
board authority against constitutional and statutory provisions related to privacy,
free exercise of religion, and public records laws. Section 1, "School
Boards and Board Members," outlines requirements for community service,
the closing of schools; conflict of interest issues, condom distribution, textbook
selection, and allegations of "biased curriculum." Section 2, "Administrators,"
scrutinizes teacher layoffs, reassignment, subordinates' free speech rights,
and removal or alteration of records. Section 3, "Finance," assesses
income tax deductions for private schooling;, facilities impact fees, and auditing
requirements. Section 4, "Teachers and Other District Employees,"
considers "whistle blower" statutes, espousal of creationism, First
Amendment protection, sex discrimination, teacher dismissal, and application
of physical force. Section 5, "Pupils," appraises accountability for
off-campus conduct, strip searches, search and seizure, sexual harassment, accessibility,
and individualized education plans. Section 6, "Religion," outlines
violations of the Establishment Clause and regulations of student-directed religious
activities. Section 7, "Torts and Related Statutory Liability," discusses
liability for injuries, duty of adequate supervision, liability for safety of
sport spectators; right-to-privacy provisions, and allegations of homosexuality.
Includes a list of cases. (Contains 98 references.) (TEJ)
Bednarz, S. W. "State Standards: Implementing "Geography for Life.""
Journal of Geography. v97 n2 p83-89 Mar-Apr 1998.
Argues that the pendulum between federal and state education initiatives has
swung to the states; reviews the extent to which state standards have incorporated
the recommendations of "Geography for Life." Concludes that the translation
of "Geography for Life" into state standards is uneven due to problems
of accessibility. (DSK)
Beecher, J. (1988). "Note-Taking: What Do We Know About The Benefits?"
Research on note-taking has generated debates since C. C. Crawford began his
studies in the 1920s. Initially the debates centered on whether note-taking
resulted in improved student performance on tests. Over the years, researchers
have tried to verify that note-taking helps students "encode" the
information involved and that notes are valuable as materials for review (Ladas,
1980).
The research findings on whether note-taking promotes encoding have been mixed.
Hult et al. (1984), for example, found that note-taking does involve semantic
encoding; but Henk and Stahl (1985) found that the process of taking notes in
itself does little to enhance recall. They found, however, that reviewing notes
clearly results in superior recall. Their conclusions were dramatically different
from those of Barnett et al. (1981), who found "strong support" for
the encoding function of note-taking but not for the value of using notes to
review material.
Beedie, P. (1999). Outdoor Education in an Urban Environment. United Kingdom
England: 8.
In 1995 the streamlined British national curriculum defined outdoor education
as "outdoor and adventurous activities" (OAA) and placed it within
the physical education (PE) curriculum. However, many PE teachers lack a knowledge
of outdoor education and, when faced with limitations in time, resources, facilities,
and expertise, may choose alternative options in the national curriculum. This
paper shows how PE staff in secondary schools can deliver an OAA program in
an urban environment. A program is outlined for a typical secondary school campus
in Bedford (England). The activities described could be undertaken in the classroom,
gym, "hard area," campus and playing fields, city parks and outlying
commons, and the nearby river. With regard to staffing, the PE department must
decide whether to use existing staff expertise, train staff to the standard
required, or hire an external specialist to cover safety and organizational
aspects. The great advantages of an urban-based OAA program are accessibility
combined with low costs and the imaginative use of everyday settings and equipment.
Constructing programs around such an environment develops lateral thinking and
imagination in both students and staff. Seasonal limitations are less of a problem
than in wilderness areas, thus allowing for educational progression, continuity
of teaching, and cross-curricular links. (Contains 23 references.) (SV)
Behrmann, J. "Universal Learning Center: Digital Learning Materials Are
Better than Books Printed on Paper: Electronic Materials Can Be Important for
Students with Disabilities." TEACHING Exceptional Children. v34 n2 p87
Nov-Dec 2001.
Discussion of digital versions of traditional curricular materials notes ways
they can effectively reduce barriers to learning for students with a variety
of disabilities. Testimony before a Senate committee by David Rose, from the
Center for Applied Special Technology and the National Center for Accessing
the General Curriculum, urges passage of the Instructional Materials Accessibility
Act of 2001. (DB)
Behrmann, J. (2001). Oh, the Places You'll Go with E-Text. Teaching Exceptional
Children, Council for Exceptional Children. 33: 90.
Presents the effort of the National Center on Accessing the General Curriculum
(NCAC) in providing a universally designed educational instruction. Web site
of NCAC; Universal Design for Learning; Tips on making the curriculum more accessible.
Behrmann, M. and M. K. Jerome (2002). Assistive Technology for Students with
Mild Disabilities: Update 2002. ERIC Digest. Virginia: 4.
This digest discusses six identified areas of instruction in which assistive
technology can aid students with mild disabilities. It begins by discussing
how assistive technology can help the student's organization. Low-tech solutions
are explained, including teaching students to organize their thoughts or work
using flow-charting, task analysis, webbing, and outlining. These strategies
can also be accomplished using high-tech graphic, software-based organizers
to assist students in developing and structuring ideas. The digest then highlights
how assistive technology can help students in note-taking. Low and high-tech
methods are explained and include videotaping class sessions for visual learners,
sending Web-camp photography across the Internet to allow students to see and
hear what is happening in class, sending class notes or presentations via e-mail,
translating print-based notes to voice, and using notebook computers. The third
area in which assistive technology devices can assist students with mild disabilities
is in writing. The benefits of word processing are described. The digest also
explains how assistive technology can help students with mild disabilities in
their academic productivity, access to reference and general educational materials
(including Internet communications, multimedia tools, e-books, and universal
design), and cognitive assistance. (Contains 11 references.) (CR)
Bell, E. D. and M. Ireh (2002). Planned Change in Teacher Education: Unfreezing
the Status Quo through the Integration of Technology. North Carolina: 18.
This study examined planned change in Winston-Salem State University's teacher
education program. An external review of the School of Education indicated a
weakness in program planning and curriculum design. This review stimulated planned
change initiative to strengthen teacher education. Factors influencing the internal
environment of teacher education were noted, including uneven student performance
on Praxis II examinations. In examining this uneven performance, researchers
determined that instruction was a function of the preferences of whichever faculty
member taught each course. In many cases, faculty did not utilize recommended
standards or principles. Researchers worked to re-design the special education
curriculum and seek pilot-test status for NCATE 2000 standards with their scheduled
accreditation visit. Neither initiative generated the necessary change, so a
PT3 grant, Technology Infusion Project, was secured. The project emphasized
professional development for faculty and cooperating teachers, providing workshops
on curriculum alignment, computer skills, and multimedia technology use. Over
time, training became more sophisticated. Two years of evaluation data suggest
that teachers found the workshops useful. The workshops resulted in enhanced
student performance. Teachers felt more competent in curriculum design, assessment,
and computer utilization. They appreciated the opportunity to network. Quality
and accessibility of technical support were significant factors in participants'
skills and knowledge acquisition. (Contains 22 references.) (SM)
Bell, W. E. (1979). Diagnosing a School's Readiness for Change: What to Look
for When Starting an Innovation. California: 38.
Conditions that influence a school's readiness for change are analyzed in this
monograph for the purpose of providing practitioners, especially those who provide
assistance to schools, with specific guides for diagnosing readiness for change.
The publication is a tool to help school personnel and others make wise and
deliberate decisions about adopting or rejecting changes. The first of five
sections presents a perspective on schools as social systems composed of individuals
and groups interlocked in organized ways. Section two describes some reasons
why schools are resistant to change. The third section presents a set of conditions
associated with a school's readiness to undergo change. These conditions are
grouped into six clusters dealing with (1) accessibility of resources and support,
(2) internal press for change, (3) stability of the staff, (4) skill in collaboration,
(5) norms about collaboration, and (6) risk-taking. Section four is a discussion
of some considerations about collecting diagnostic information. The concluding
section presents a list of resources, mostly annotated, for understanding and
improving the possibilities of productive change. (Author/MLF)
Bellavista, P., A. Corradi, et al. (1999). Mobile agents for Web-based systems
management. Internet Research, Emerald. 9: 360.
Focuses on a study which discussed the management of applications and systems
(MAMAS) and its implementation with a mobile agent technology. Information on
the Simple Network Management Protocol for the exchange of management information;
Details on the management by delegation approach to management functionality;
Description of the MAMAS management environment.ABSTRACT FROM AUTHOR
The increasing dimension and heterogeneity of global Web systems make their
management with tools based on the client/server model more difficult. The mobile
agent technology overcomes the limits of traditional approaches and proposes
solutions tha t are suitable for the management of distributed and heterogeneous
Internet-based systems. The paper describes the MAMAS environment and its implementation
with a mobile agent technology. MAMAS has the goals of monitoring the whole
system, introducing dy namic corrective actions and modifying system policies
at run-time. MAMAS achieves these objectives by answering the guidelines of
both security and compliance to standards. The choice of Java as the implementation
language has made it possible to achiev e portability, to exploit the language
security features, and to provide Web accessibility. The MAMAS compliance with
CORBA ensures interoperability with legacy management platforms.ABSTRACT FROM
AUTHOR
Bellm, D. (1993). Family Day Care Handbook. Fifth Edition. California: 405.
The California Child Care Initiative is a collaborative program with the objective
of increasing the supply of licensed quality child care in the state to better
meet demand. This handbook provides family child care providers with guidance
in implementing and maintaining a family daycare operation. The handbook provides
articles, sample forms and worksheets, and handouts in the following areas:
(1) "Getting Started," including self evaluation, state licensing,
and leasing, zoning, and handicapped accessibility restrictions; (2) "The
Business of Family Day Care," including setting fees, business planning
and bookkeeping, liability insurance, working with an assistant or substitute,
and professionalism; (3) "Working with Parents," including interview
and trial period, what a parent expects from a provider, and contracts; (4)
"Health and Safety," including fire and earthquake safety, hygiene,
common childhood and contagious illness, first aid, HIV, and disabilities and
special needs; (5) "Food and Nutrition," including planning menus,
feeding infants, choking, food allergies, nutrition education, and snacks; (6)
"Working with Children," including developmental characteristics,
sexuality, school-age children, play, arranging space, toys and equipment, movement,
science field trips, toilet training, and television; and (7) "Further
Resources," including family day care associations. (HTH)
Bender, W. N. (2002). Differentiating Instruction for Students with Learning
Disabilities: Best Teaching Practices for General and Special Educators.
California.
This book provides classroom-proven strategies designed to empower the teacher
to target instructional modifications to the content, process, and products
for students with learning disabilities in the general and special education
classrooms. Chapter 1 presents the concept of differentiated instruction and
how that concept translates into instruction for students with learning disabilities
in the special education or the inclusive classroom. Chapter 2 involves insights
into instruction stemming from the grade-compatible instruction literature--one
foundation for the differentiated instructional construct. Chapters 3 and 4
involve supporting students academically, using a variety of metacognitive and/or
scaffolding learning techniques that allow teachers to differentiate the learning
process for students with learning disabilities. Chapter 5 describes a series
of tutoring techniques that may be employed in the inclusive classroom to assist
the teacher in providing differentiated instruction for all the students in
the class in a timely fashion. Chapter 6 presents a variety of assessment models
that allow for differentiation of evaluation requirements. Chapter 7 demonstrates
the application of many of these strategies in the area of reading instruction
for the elementary and middle grades. The final chapter discusses improving
instruction using the differentiated instruction model. (Contains approximately
150 references.) (CR)
Bennett, A. M. (1978). Telehealth Handbook. A Guide to Telecommunications Technology
for Rural Health Care. District of Columbia: 164.
Emphasizing primary care, this handbook focuses on the application of specific
types of telecommunications technology to the process of information exchange
within a rural health care system. Its purpose is to provide guidance to health
care planners who want to consider the potential of telecommunications technology
for improving quality, accessibility, and efficiency of care. Taking a functional,
applications-oriented approach, it integrates the issues and recommends a decision-making
process. The range of technologies discussed includes not only the expensive
and exotic but also the rather inexpensive, everyday technologies that should
be available in many parts of the country. Content includes background material
on health care and information exchange; the concept of a network and the distinction
between telecommunications links and end-instruments; functional applications
of telehealth systems (patient care management, administration, education);
technical components of telehealth--transmission (narrowband, telephone, radio,
broadband, networks), end-instruments (audio, telemetry, data/record, video,
slow-scan television, patient-viewing video devices); process for assessing
feasibility of telehealth in a specific setting; paying for telehealth. More
than 50 current and planned telehealth projects and references for additional
information are briefly described. (RS)
Bennett, J. E. (1998). Early Childhood Care and Education as a Structural Approach
to Integrating Children and Families at Risk: A Challenge for Policy Makers.
Report of the European Policy Conference on Early Childhood Education (Amsterdam,
Netherlands, April 23-24, 1998). France: 105.
Initiated by the government of the Netherlands and UNESCO, the European Policy
Conference on Early Childhood Education focused on early childhood policy issues
with special reference to the social integration of children and families at
risk. The conference was organized around three themes including quality, accessibility
and going-to-scale. This report summarizes highlights from the conference proceedings.
Following a foreword and executive summary noting six emerging policy issues
in early childhood education, the report presents a summary of proceedings,
including: (1) conference organization; (2) pre-conference meeting of experts;
(3) keynote speeches; (4) workshops; (5) meeting with participants of Averroes
Step programs; and (6) panel of selected guests. The next section of the report
contains the following three position papers: (1) "Early Childhood Development:
Quality in Policy and Practice" (J. Kloprogge); (2) "Access to Early
Childhood Development: Strategies for Enhancing Social Integration" (N.
van Oudenhoven & R. Wazir); and (3) "Early Childhood Policy: Implications
for Large-Scale Implementation" (B. Bekkers). The final section presents
in-depth discussion of the six emerging policy issues noted in the executive
summary. A concluding statement and a list of participants are appended. (SD)
Benson, G. M., Jr. (1995). SUNY Campus Leadership as a Catalyst for Developing
Virtual Community Learning Systems. New York: 40.
This paper reflects SUNY's (State University of New York) efforts at applying
technology and telecommunications to improve the quality, accessibility, and
productivity of educational programs and to enhance the return on the public
investments in education. It is built upon the experiences of SUNY campuses,
local schools, and industry which have focused on developing community application
designs that are affordable and educationally sound. This paper outlines why
SUNY leadership is necessary to foster community collaboration, shows the community
benefits to be derived through assumption of this leadership role, and suggests
actions for those willing to accept the challenge. Adult learning, technical
training, workplace literacy, homebound instruction and community learning sites
are among the goals of the proposed community collaboration. Community leadership
strategies discussed in section one include: (1) educational significance; (2)
wide community applicability and access; (3) integration with sound educational
practices and among the technologies themselves; and (4) collaboration among
key community partners. Section two, "Needs and Directions," discusses
nine issues to be considered in making a community effort; and "Where Are
We Now?" compares the myth versus reality of educational technologies.
In section three, 13 requirements of a community learning system design are
outlined, and ten steps toward taking a community leadership role are presented
in section four. Finally, section five argues that a community lifelong learning
system is possible, and must be done. Specific SUNY community and statewide
learning technology projects are discussed in an appendix. (MAS)
Benton, S. L. and K. A. Kiewra (1986). "Measuring the Organizational Aspects
of Writing Ability." Journal of Educational Measurement 23(4):
377-86.
This paper assessed the relationships among holistic writing ability, the Test
of Standard Written English, and four tests of organizational ability. Findings
showed a significant correlation between writing ability and the tests. It was
concluded that tests assessing organizational strategies ought to be included
in assessments of writing ability. (Author/JAZ)
Benz, C. R. and I. Newman (1986). Qualitative-Quantitative Interactive Continuum:
A Model and Application to Teacher Education Evaluation. Ohio: 45.
This paper presents a model for qualitative and quantitative evaluation research
that has been used in a preliminary way in evaluating a teacher education program.
The model is based on three underlying constructs which are hierarchical in
nature: (1) the assumption that the question of interest always must dictate
the structure of the research design; (2) accessibility of data; and (3) that
data are operationally defined as qualitative or quantitative according to their
use. Graduates of teacher education programs in 1980 through 1983 responded
to two open-ended questions regarding the most important topic to be added to
the teacher education program and the most important topic to be deleted from
the program. Quantitative and qualitative analyses revealed: (1) where first-year
teachers felt ill-equipped; (2) where the teachers reported themselves to be
well prepared and satisfied; (3) how these findings relate to new standards
on teacher certification; (4) implications for what college students and new
teachers expect teaching to be like; and (5) methodological implications for
using qualitative and quantitative methods to enhance a study. (CB)
Bergland, M. and D. Hoffbauer "New Opportunities for Students with Traumatic
Brain Injuries: Transition to Postsecondary Education." TEACHING Exceptional
Children. v28 n2 p54-56 Win 1996.
This article presents issues for consideration by planning teams making transition
decisions for students with traumatic brain injuries. Factors in selecting a
postsecondary setting are outlined, such as physical accessibility, living arrangements,
academic programs and support services, social and personal support systems,
and career/vocational training and job placement. (DB)
Bergman, E. (1981). Arts Accessibility for the Deaf. District of Columbia:
24.
The booklet provides information and resources for cultural organizations and
institutions interested in making the arts accessible to deaf citizens. Preliminary
information includes a discussion of deafness in America and the deaf in the
history of the arts and notes that the era of silent films was the golden age
of cinema. Listed are 36 theaters of and for the deaf as well as 18 hearing
theaters with accessibility for the deaf. Also considered are television shows
with deaf characters, entertainment programs for the deaf, news programing,
the deaf and educational television, closed captioning, and videodiscs. Brief
sections discuss resources for deaf dance as well as music and the visual arts.
Museums offering interpreted tours and/or special programs for the deaf are
listed. The booklet's suggestions for improving arts accessibility include involving
the staff in awareness training, developing a deaf audience, and designing programs
which consider visual cueing, lighting, fire and emergency warning, acoustics,
and hearing amplification. Sources of design information are noted. Finally,
resources are given for locating deaf people in the community, locating deaf
artists, and reaching deaf audiences. (DB)
Berkeley Planning Associates Oakland CA.[BBB31553] (1997). Serving Mothers with
Disabilities in Your Child Care Program. Meeting the Needs of Women with Disabilities:
A Blueprint for Change. California: 52.
Designed for child care workers who provide day care to children of disabled
mothers, this booklet provides information about the needs of disabled women
and gives suggestions for how to accommodate women with various disabilities.
The booklet may also be useful for parents with disabilities who have young
children and who want to work with child care providers to become more accessible.
Following a rationale for the booklet, sections of the booklet discuss: who
are mothers with disabilities; barriers preventing disabled mothers from accessing
child care services, specifically bias against the disabled, and inaccessible
facilities; accessibility needs of women with different disabilities, including
physical disabilities, psychiatric disabilities and disabilities arising from
chronic health conditions such as AIDS or epilepsy; caregiver responsibilities
under the Americans with Disabilities Act; and making the child care program
welcoming to mothers with disabilities. Four appendices list resources, disability
organizations, references and suggested readings, and a glossary of terms. (JPB)
Berkley, A. (1996). Vocational-Technical Education: A Matter of Access. An Evaluation
of the Accessibility of Vocational-Technical Education. Georgia: 53.
A study was conducted in Georgia to determine if members of special populations
have an equal opportunity to enter vocational-technical programs in the state
and to examine support programs and services funded by the Perkins Act that
assists members of special populations in successfully completing vocational-technical
education programs. Data were gathered from Georgia educational planning documents,
interviews with staff at the state department of education and the department
of technical and adult education, and discussions with teachers from various
school systems. The study found that at both the secondary and postsecondary
levels, members of special populations appear to have an equal opportunity to
enter vocational-technical education programs as readily as all other vocational
students. In fiscal year 1993, 39 percent of the students enrolled in secondary
and 37 percent in postsecondary vocational education courses were identified
as members of special populations. In fiscal year 1994, the percentage of special
population students enrolled increased to 44 percent in secondary vocational
education courses and to 34 percent in postsecondary courses. Educationally
and economically disadvantaged persons comprised the largest percentage of the
special populations (about 33 percent of all students enrolled in vocational-technical
programs in the state). The study also found that members of special populations
appeared to be somewhat successful in completing vocational-technical education
programs, with 42 percent of these students graduating from the postsecondary
level in 1993. The study was unable to determine if any direct causal link exists
between the support programs and services funded through the Perkins Act and
the graduation rates lot members of special populations in postsecondary institutions.
(Graduation rates for members of special populations enrolled in secondary vocational
education programs were not available.) The research did reveal that services
to members of special populations can be improved in funding and program evaluation.
(KC)
Berlin, G. (1977). Interactive Computing and DIME for the Analysis of Pupil
Assignment Alternatives: 36.
This description of the Census DIME (dual independent map encoding) file is
directed toward school administrators and their staffs rather than to computer
analysts. DIME can be used as the central component for a geographically based
management information system. It provides the mechanism for the spatial display
of data and for the determination of accessibility on either a vehicular or
pedestrian network. The system can be extended to include other information
available from the Census Bureau that could be used for a variety of socioeconomic
studies such as to project student population changes at the block level and
to analyze those areas most affected by the local school taxing scheme. (Author/IRT)
Berliss, J. R. (1990). Checklists for Implementing Accessibility in Computer
Laboratories at Colleges and Universities. Wisconsin: 33.
This paper discusses the issue of providing equitable access to computer equipment
for disabled students in postsecondary education. Potential access problems
may exist in the areas of input, output, environment, and documentation/support/training.
Five checklists are provided that focus on generic strategies to fully or partially
cover the needs of the majority of users with disabilities. The first checklist
covers team preparation for development of campus adaptive computing services,
while the other four cover different levels of implementation (low cost/short
implementation time measures, moderate cost/moderate implementation time measures,
annual budget measures, and long-term planning measures). For students requiring
equipment that is highly individualized and specialized, it is recommended that
a contingency fund be created to acquire necessary adaptations and that funds
be pooled among a number of institutions and equipment acquired be made available
to each institution. Appendixes list sources of general information, computer
access guidelines information, product information, and alternative funding
information, as well as disability-related organizations and organizations/conferences
relating to computers and disability. (JDD)
Berning, E. "Disabled Students in the Federal Republic of Germany."
Higher Education in Europe. v10 n3 p76-81 Jul-Sep 1985.
Recent policy and attitudinal trends in West Germany concerning the need for
accessibility to higher education for the disabled are reviewed. Specific changes
made in programs, facilities, and information dissemination for this group are
described. (MSE)
Best, F. (1992). Adult Education Needs for a Changing State. Discussion Paper
on Long-Term Adult Education and Training Needs in California. California:
52.
Demographic, social, and economic factors are shaping the future environment
and clientele of California's adult education system. Continued population growth
means adult education will have to serve larger populations. Direct implications
of increasing ethnic and racial pluralism are demands for more flexible delivery
systems that accommodate cultural diversity and demands by English-speaking
persons to study a second language. Implications of an aging population are
competition for resources, special systems for educational delivery, and a shortage
of adult education teachers. The rise in the numbers of working and single parents
has important implications for adult education: accessibility and need for classes
on parenting and domestic skills. Changes in the labor market and world of work
will create needs to increase the skills of adult workers, offer recurring job
training, and provide resources to help workers cope with career change and
job displacement. Trends concerning educational attainment and skill deficiencies
point to roles for adult education in providing literacy, basic education, and
upgrading. Two new public policy initiatives, the Immigration Reform and Control
Act and Greater Avenues for Independence welfare reform program, will increase
demand for programs in adult basic education and English as a Second Language.
Two special groups are likely to place increasing demands on adult education:
prison inmates and parolees and disabled adults. (YLB)
Beziat, C. "Educating America's Last Minority: Adult Education's Role in
the Americans with Disabilities Act." Adult Learning. v2 n2 p21-23 Oct
1990.
An action plan for adult educators working with students with disabilities includes
(1) getting to know disabled people and observing their physical and psychological
barriers; (2) examining curricula and facilities for accessibility; (3) using
speakers with disabilities as subject experts; (4) recruiting disabled students;
and (5) working with advocacy groups. (SK)
Bhaerman, R. D. (1992). Report on the Delaware Rural Assistance Council's Public
Forums: Achieving Quality Education and Promoting Partnerships for Academic
and Social Success. Delaware: 23.
This report summarizes discussions held in 1992 at two public forums to examine
ways to improve the quality of rural education in Delaware. The forums focused
on two goals: building support for quality education and promoting partnerships
between families, communities, and schools. Participants discussed expanding
schools to become "community learning and service centers," possibly
integrating them with social-service agencies as a means of overcoming duplication
and fragmentation in services. Problems with this approach include school accessibility,
establishing roles and responsibilities, and the lack of existing services.
Family and parental involvement was discussed in terms of changing family roles
and parental disenfranchisement from the educational system. Participants recommended
that schools take a leadership role toward redesigning themselves as learning
centers while improving their relationships with social-service agencies. It
was also recommended that schools work more closely with parents and communities
in decision-making. Other recommendations dealt with the need for professional
development and community cooperation. The paper ends with conclusions and reflections
of the Delaware Rural Assistance Council, which expressed the view that the
ultimate commitment must be reflected in the policies and programs of the State
Board of Education and invited the board to work jointly with the council to
define a "rural education agenda." (TES)
Bhagwanji, Y., D. Thomas, et al. "Enabling Families of Children with Disabilities
to Better Access Quality Child Care. Issues in Education." Journal of
Early Education and Family Review. v8 n2 p12-16 Nov-Dec 2000.
Argues that collaboration between Head Start and early intervention programs
can improve accessibility to high quality child care and supports needed to
reach and maintain self-sufficiency for low-income families of children with
disabilities. Discusses how these systems can develop trusting collaborative
relationships, increase affordability of child care by pooling resources, and
implement a unified and effective staff training system. (KB)
Bhatt, M. "Resources on the Internet for Engineering Education." European
Journal of Engineering Education. v21 n3 p235-43 Sep 1996.
Provides examples of search strategies that are useful in acquiring and accessing
engineering education resources. Argues that wider bandwidth and increased accessibility
are essential to any pedagogic approach that makes use of the Internet. (43
references) (DDR)
Biehl, G. R. (1978). Guide to the Section 504 Self-Evaluation for Colleges and
Universities: 132.
Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (P.L. 93-112), as amended (P.L.
93- 516), mandates equal opportunity for qualified handicapped persons in education
programs, and activities of all recipients of federal financial assistance.
Section 504 is a civil rights statute that prohibits descrimination on the basis
of handicap, obligates colleges and universities to make certain adjustments
and accommodations, and offers to handicapped persons the opportunity to participate
fully in all education programs and activities. The Self-Evaluation under Section
504 is the principal process through which compliance with the statute is to
be assessed and full participation in programs and activities is to be ensured.
This guide is designed to assist college and university officials in the completion
of their section 504 institutional self-evaluations. The five chapters cover:
general provisions, key terms, and general actions contained in the regulations;
program accessibility; student programs, activities, and services (including
admissions and recruitment, academic programs and adjustments, and services
such as transportation, health and insurance, housing, financial and employment
assistance, and nonacademic services); and employment. A discussion of plan
implementation includes a format for organizing the tasks of planning records,
collecting and evaluating data, implementing actions, maintaining necessary
records, and monitoring the evaluation and compliance efforts. Sources of additional
information and technical assistance are appended. (Author/SPG)
Biehle, J. T., L. L. Motz, et al. (1999). NSTA Guide to School Science Facilities.
Virginia: 203.
The National Science Teachers Association, in response to the emergence of new
science curricula and the need for updated science facilities in the nation's
public schools, convened a task force to develop guidelines for K-12 science
facility design and use. This guide, a result of NSTA Task Force on Science
Facilities and Equipment, includes information about planning facilities design;
budget priorities; space considerations; general room and laboratory design;
and furnishings for the laboratory/classroom specifically targeting K-5, middle,
and high schools. It is designed to familiarize educators, administrators, and
citizens with the stages of the planning process for new and renovated science
facilities and provides specific, detailed information on many aspects of the
planning and design phases. Additionally, chapters address current trends and
future directions in science education and safety, accessibility, and legal
guidelines. Appendices include discussions on solar energy for school facilities,
equipment needs planning, checklists, a glossary of construction terms, and
classroom dimensional considerations. (GR)
Bigger, A. S. and L. B. Bigger "Ten Tips for Better Washroom Design."
College Planning & Management. v1 n4 p57-58,60-61 Jul 1998.
Offers 10 tips for renovating or building school washrooms that enhance user
satisfaction while making them easier to maintain. Tips cover all aspects of
school washroom design and highlights the following elements of effective washroom
design development: user input; ease of maintenance; accessibility; and functionality.
(GR)
Birkenholz, R. J. E. and L. G. E. Schumacher (1995). Peak Performance...Reaching
for Excellence in Agricultural Education Research. Proceedings of the Annual
National Agricultural Education Research Meeting (22nd, Denver, Colorado, December
1, 1995). Volume XXII. Colorado: 571.
The theme of this conference reflects the continuing need to conduct and report
research that addresses significant problems and issues in Agricultural Education.
Selected research papers are as follows: "Opportunities and Obstacles for
Distance Education in Agricultural Education (AE)" (Murphy, Terry); "Faculty
Needs Associated with Agricultural Distance Education" (Murphy, Terry);
"Learning Styles of Agricultural Distance Learners" (Miller); "Effectiveness
of Distance Learning Courses" (Swan); "A National Validation Study
of Research Priorities for Adult Education" (Harbstreit et al.); "Goals
Met by Adult Organizations in AE, Nationally" (Dormody et al.); "Analysis
of the Inservice Needs of Beginning Teachers of Agriculture" (Garton, Chung);
"Conducting AE Research Using Electronic Surveys" (Kawasaki et al.);
"Using Assessment Information in Educational Decision Making" (Kershaw,
McCaslin); "Perceptions of Secondary School Principals toward AE"
(Jewell); "Arkansas Agriculture Teachers' Opinions Concerning Science Credit
for Agriculture" (Johnson); "Factor Analysis of Attitudes of Illinois
Guidance Counselors toward Agriculture Programs" (Dyer, Osborne); "Toward
a Model for Increasing Cognitive Level Reached by Students in College Classrooms"
(Whittington); "Decision Cases versus Traditional Lecture in a University
Agriculture Course" (Allen et al.); "Interaction in the Distance Education
Setting" (King, Doerfert); "Computer Use, Experience, Knowledge, and
Attitudes of Extension Personnel" (Park, Gamon); "Distance Education
Needs of Cooperative Extension Agents" (Jackson et al.); "Effects
of Teaching Approach on Problem Solving Ability of AE Students with Varying
Learning Styles" (Dyer, Osborne); "Learning Style" (Torres, Cano);
"Factors Influencing Enrollment in AE Programs as Expressed by Iowa Secondary
AE Students" (Reis, Kahler); "Evaluating the Physical Accessibility
of Indiana High School AE Facilities" (Ploss, Frick); "Present and
Future Emphasis of Secondary School Agricultural Mechanics Programs in the United
States" (Laird, Kahler); "Mathematical Problem-Solving Proficiency
of AE Teachers in Alabama" (Hunnicutt, Newman); "Attitudes of University
of Illinois College of Agriculture Freshmen toward Agriculture" (Dyer et
al.); "Comparison of the Career Choice and Job Satisfaction of Scholarship
Recipients with Non-Scholars in a College of Agriculture" (Fraze, Ritz);
"Food and Agriculture Awareness of Land Grant University Education Faculty"
(Elliot, Frick) "Defining Internationalization for Extension" (Ludwig,
Barrick); "Agent Turnover in Ohio State University Extension" (Rousan,
Henderson); "Safety Attitudes of Agricultural Mechanics Students and Their
Relationships to Selected Variables" (Lawver, Fraze); "Career Decision-Making
Processes of Minority Youth in One Rural Mississippi Delta Community" (Wardlow
et al.); "Barriers to Professional Careers as Perceived by Minority Professionals
in Agriculture" (Wardlow et al.); "Mentoring Activities of Women Graduates
in Agricultural Education at the Pennsylvania State University" (Baker,
Baggett); and "College Faculty Motives and Barriers for Participating in
International Activities" (Kelsey, Dormody). (YLB)
Bittle, E. H. E. (1996). Planning and Financing School Improvement and Construction
Projects. NOLPE Monograph Series, No. 57. Kansas: 171.
Suggestions and guidelines to help school administrators, business officials,
board members, and others interested in improving school facilities are presented
in this book. Chapter 1, "School Building Programs, Equipment Acquisition:
The Anatomy of School Debt Financing" (Edgar H. Bittle), provides an overview
of the legal and planning issues that school boards face. Chapter 2, "Planning
and Constructing School Facilities" (Arlis Swartzendurber), provides practical
insights from a school administrator for planning and implementing capital improvement
projects. Chapter 3, Typical Problems in School Building Programs, An Architect's
Perspective (L. Bradford Perkins), offers an experienced architect's insights
concerning the planning process. Financial concerns that school districts face
in planning a capital improvement project are detailed in Chapter 4, "Development
and Implementation of the Financing Plan" (Jeanne Frederick Vanda, Christopher
M. Gibbons). Chapter 5, "Accessibility of a Public Entity's Facilities
under the Americans with Disabilities Act," (Janet Little Horton, Christopher
B. Gilbert), outlines the considerations for complying with the Americans with
Disability Act in building or renovating a building. Chapter 6, "Fundamentals
of Competitive Building" (Edgar H. Bittle, Elizabeth A. Grob), is an overview
on how to conduct competitive bidding including the requirements of public sector
bidding. The last two chapters, "A Federal Tax Law Primer for School Finance
Officials" (Michael K. Reppe) and "A Federal Securities Law Primer
for School Finance Officials" (Dennis L. Holsapple, Jeffrey S. Ballard),
present a detailed summary of the federal tax and securities laws, which govern
the marketing of securities for financing capital improvement projects. (Includes
an index.) (RJM)
Black, H. (1989). Perceptions Re: Adequacy and Effectiveness of the JTPA and
V.E. Perkins Act Programs in Illinois. Report 23. Illinois: 26.
A study was conducted in Illinois to determine the perceptions of "grassroots"
personnel who have responsibility for administering programs authorized under
both the Job Training Partnership Act (JTPA) and the Carl D. Perkins Vocational
Education Act. Questionnaires were mailed to regional delivery system directors,
community college deans, and service delivery area directors. Respondents were
asked to address (1) the impact of program offerings on unemployment; (2) accessibility
of programs to special populations; (3) relevance of training and retraining
to labor market needs; (4) improvement and expansion of programs to meet the
state's work force needs; and (5) promotion of economic growth. Results of the
84 responses indicated that people involved with JTPA and vocational education
know much about the purposes of their own program and are vague about the other.
Respondents representative of both programs felt that the Perkins Act was helpful
in helping the states improve, expand, modernize, and develop vocational education
programs. They indicated that services for special populations were in place.
Educators were more supportive of conditions under the Perkins Act than were
JTPA personnel. Respondents for all agencies felt that the Perkins Act is good
and could be strengthened if coordination with JTPA was improved. Suggested
changes in the two acts were centered on coordination, costs, set-asides, and
eligibility. (KC)
Blamires, M. (1999). Universal Design for Learning: Re-establishing Differentiation
as Part of the Inclusion Agenda? Support for Learning, Blackwell Publishing
Limited. 14: 158.
Discusses the possible use of universal curriculum design principles in supporting
inclusive practice within education. Definition of inclusion; Analysis of inclusion
in relation to individual rights; Arguments against increased professionalism
of teachers of children with special educational needs.
Blanchard, P. D. and R. L. Kline (1977). The Importance of Regionalism in the
Decision-Making Style of Local Boards of Education: 23.
This study examines some of the characteristics of decision-making on school
boards, focusing on the behavior of southern school board members in comparison
with their counterparts in other regions of the country. Data were collected
in 1975 at the convention of the National School Boards Association (NSBA).
Self-administered questionnaires were randomly distributed by the NSBA staff
members to board members and superintendents. This procedure generated a sample
of 1,091 school board members and 116 superintendents. Three areas of board
decisional behavior are studied--representation and representativeness, including
the degree of representation of women on the board and whether the members of
the boards view themselves as representatives or trustees and whether they view
the board as more like a corporation board or like a legislature; accessibility
to groups and the public; and the decision-making style of the board. The latter
topic is concerned with two broad areas--whether the superintendent or the board
is dominant and whether the board is bipolar, unipolar, nonpolar, or concealed
in its decisional conflicts. Generally, school board politics in the South is
different from that found in other regions in several important ways. (Author/IRT)
Blanck, P. D. (1994). Communicating the Americans with Disabilities Act. Transcending
Compliance: A Case Report on Sears, Roebuck and Co. District of Columbia:
49.
This report examines the employment practices of Sears, Roebuck and Company,
before and after the implementation of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
By studying the corporate behavior of Sears, which employs an estimated 20,000
people with disabilities, the report attempts to stimulate discussion of the
communication issues that Sears and other companies face regarding ADA implementation
and identify the implications of Sears' ADA-related experiences, policies, and
philosophy for other companies as they attempt to meet and transcend ADA compliance.
The following implications are drawn from Sears' experiences: (1) the impact
of the ADA on American business is evolutionary, not revolutionary; (2) universal
design and access, not retrofitted technology, fulfill the objective of including
people with and without disabilities in productive work force participation;
(3) education of management about the ADA and capabilities of people with disabilities
must not be based on paternalism or myths; (4) companies can look beyond compliance
to transcendence by fostering independence and providing meaningful career opportunities;
and (5) the ADA can provide a framework for dispute avoidance and resolution.
Special features in the report describe information technology needs and placement
of individuals with visual impairments and hidden disabilities. Appendices offer
statistical data on the Sears workforce with disabilities and a list of employment
and information technology resources. (JDD)
Blaukopf, P. "Education and the Marketplace--Quebec's Policies." Education
Canada. v25 n2 p39-43 Sum 1985.
Provides a summary and analysis of current Quebec policies on continuing education
and manpower training. Describes government plans for manpower training and
youth employment under the categories of accessibility, efficiency, and effectiveness.
(NEC)
Blenk, K. and D. L. Fine (1995). Making School Inclusion Work: A Guide to
Everyday Practice. Massachusetts.
This book tells the story of the Kids are People School in Boston, Massachusetts,
which began as a day care facility, enthusiastically welcomed children with
special needs, and developed a multicultural inclusive elementary school. It
is the story of the school's determination to provide the therapeutic services
essential for each child's development and to adjust the curriculum so that
all children could successfully participate. Its history has been a stormy one,
but its success suggests that the inclusion concept can work given the right
environment. The book was written to show that inclusion can and does work;
to help people who want to create inclusive programs do it right; and to point
out problems with the ways that children with special needs are educated, tested,
and treated. The book addresses the goals and practices required to allow every
child to be included in regular classes, with the expectation that the child's
special needs--educationally, personally, and socially--will be addressed with
appropriate programs. Chapters address characteristics of the children; teaching
methods; staff configuration; curriculum and materials; accessibility; evaluation;
specialists; and comments of parents, children, and staff. Appendices offer
a brief history of special education and inclusion, a glossary, a sample evaluation
checklist for daily living skills, and a list of classroom resources. (Contains
14 references.) (JDD)
Blumenstyk, G. (1998). Few Students Enroll at Western Governors U. Chronicle
of Higher Education, Chronicle of Higher Education. 45: A35.
Reports that the Western Governors University has received admission applications
for its World-Wide Web site enrollment in 1998. Alterations in Web site accessibility;
Expectations of the university regarding the outcome of enrollment; Feedbacks
from customers on the use of program.
Boeren, A. J. J. M. E. and K. P. E. Epskamp (1990). Education, Culture and
Productive Life. Proceedings of the Annual International Meeting of the Centre
for the Study of Education in Developing Countries (25th, December 9-21, 1988).
CESO Paperback No. 13. Netherlands.
This book contains the partial proceedings of a symposium dedicated to concern
for basic education for the masses. The book includes a position paper that
focuses on education in relation to its cultural setting, socio-economic context,
and partnerships in research. The result of the meeting was the identification
of research that seemed instrumental in addressing problematic issues in education
in developing countries. The outcomes of the research were expected to contribute
to an improvement of the accessibility, relevance, and effectiveness of education.
The volume contains 28 articles written by participants in the symposium, beginning
with a position paper that provides the theoretical framework. The articles
are grouped into four sections. The first section (Education, Culture and Development)
contains a review of the major problems that developing countries face in providing
adequate and relevant education to nations, and three articles highlighting
the relationships among education, culture, and development. Section 2, "Education
and Culture," deals more specifically with the link between education and
culture, indigenous knowledge and indigenous learning, popular culture, creating
of a national identity, and the relevance of social research in intervention
systems. The third section is "Education and Productive Life." Articles
in this section discuss education for self employment at the primary school
level, work experience programs in secondary schools, and technical and vocational
training for girls. The final section discusses educational research and networking.
(DK)
Boezerooy, P. and H. Vossensteyn "How To Get In? A Comparative Overview
of Access to Higher Education." Higher Education in Europe. v24 n3 p349-58
1999.
Examines the accessibility of higher education in nine western European countries
in terms of selectivity and affordability. Finds much variation in relative
selectivity, ranging from strong entrance selection procedures (Finland, Sweden,
and the United Kingdom) to those with open systems (Austria, Belgium-Flanders,
and the Netherlands). Finds affordability is best when grants and loans are
given directly to students. (Author/DB)
Boggs, G. R. "Community Colleges at a Crossroads." Presidency.
v4 n1 p14-21 Win 2001.
The president of the American Association of Community Colleges discusses how
numerous trends are challenging the values of accessibility, responsiveness,
and student-focused education at community colleges. Includes sidebar commentaries
from other community college leaders. (EV)
Bohr, L. and J. M. Grant "The Net as Literacy Tool? Educators Respond."
Learning Assistance Review. v2 n2 p5-19 Fall 1997.
Evaluates the "fit" between literacy educators and Internet use through
survey and written journal responses during an Internet course. Literacy educators
were drawn to teacher-teacher e-mailing, electronic (telecommunications) library
research, to the Web, and to a far lesser extent listserv subscriptions and
e-mailing for classroom students. Literacy educators valued tools according
to accessibility rather than function. Contains 52 references. (VWC)
Boothroyd, P. (1989). Housing for the Physically Disabled: A Commentary, Resource
Guide and Selected Bibliography. Prepared for the Coalition of Active Disabled
of Chester County, Inc. Pennsylvania: 33.
This document on housing for the physically disabled contains four parts: a
commentary; a list of bibliographical references for the commentary; a resource
guide; and a selected bibliography of government publications. The commentary
portion discusses the psychological, social, and physical problems which physical
disability presents to the individual; describes the effect of affordable, accessible
housing on that individuals' well-being; and describes relevant federal and
state (Pennsylvania) legislation from 1954 to 1988 with emphasis on the Fair
Housing Act of 1988. In addition, reasons for lack of effectiveness of earlier
legislation, such as lack of protection against discrimination, are summarizes;
an illustrated description of adaptations to wheelchair living designed into
a model home by the South Carolina Vocational Department is provided; and the
concepts of universal design, adaptable housing, design for the life span, and
alternative living arrangements are explained. The commentary concludes with
the observation that solutions to virtually every housing problem known to the
disabled can be found in one place or another in the United States and the need
is for much wider availability of these solutions based on societal acceptance
of the disabled as fully valid human beings. The bibliography contains 19 references.
The resource guide includes lists of Federal, State (Pennsylvania), and local
(Chester County) agencies, commissions, boards, and offices; Federal and State
Senators and Representatives; local information referral services; local nursing
homes and subsidized and private sector housing; Philadelphia area contractors
for home/van modifications; catalogs of products used by the disabled; government-approved
books and resource guides; federal and state legislation impacting the disabled;
and a source for federal grants and information on standards and databases.
The government bibliography contains 26 entries published between 1947 and 1988.
Listed by sources, the entries include title, author, publisher, corporate source,
a brief description, and access numbers. (KM)
Borden, G. A. (1983). Some Social Implications of Distance Education. Delaware:
17.
Social implications of distance education at the university level are considered,
based primarily on the case of La Universidad Estatal a Distancia (UNED) of
Costa Rica. UNED, which is Costa Rica's attempt to implement Great Britain's
open university philosophy of education, was developed in response to the following
needs: to provide opportunities for university education without moving to San
Jose or another large city; and the need to educate persons in specific areas
of national need (e.g., education, management, agriculture, health services).
Six influences or changes of the social environment brought about by this new
system are as follows: (1) long-range social planning is needed; (2) new educational
modes without a lecturer or classroom are adopted; (3) community and individual
development may be enhanced since small study groups may become active social
forces; (4) the accessibility of education is improved; (5) modern communication
channels are used to convey information to learners; and (6) an interplay between
this educational approach and the political atmosphere in the country may occur
(i.e., distance education can be used as an instrument of the government). It
is concluded that a distance education university in a Latin American culture
has the potential of being a major social change agent. (SW)
Borden, P. A. (1988). Trace-Authored Papers from the Annual Conference on Rehabilitation
Technology (11th, Montreal, Canada, 1988). Trace Reprint Series. Wisconsin:
14.
Summaries are presented of five conference papers on communication, control,
and computer access for handicapped individuals. Papers have the following titles
and authors: "Accessibility of Graphically Based User Interface Computer
Systems for Individuals with Visual Impairments" (Charles Lee and Gregg
Vanderheiden); "Data Base vs. Information Base: Preliminary Analysis of
a Computerized Information Base in Rehabilitation Technology" (Roger Smith
et al.); "Multi-Access Rehabilitation Technology Information Network: MARTIN"
(Gregg Vanderheiden); "One Screen Multiplexed Keyboard for Transparent
Access to Standard IBM PC Software: (Jon Gunderson and Gregg Vanderheiden);
"Accessibility of OS/2 for Individuals with Movement Impairments: Strategies
for the Implementation of 1-Finger, Mousekeys, and Software Keyboard Emulating
Interfaces Using Device Drivers and Monitors" (Charles Lee and Gregg Vanderheiden).
(DB)
Borich, P. J. (1970). Adult Educators' Decision-Making Regarding Advanced Degrees.
Final Report: 85.
A study was conducted on how county Extension agents decide whether or not to
seek a postgraduate degree. Using questionnaires completed by 774 agents, the
study obtained background data and investigated economic perceptions (cost effectiveness)
of an advanced degree, personal factors seen as influencing degree decisions,
and attitudes toward the influence of administrative superiors. Relevant factors
included improved competence, prestige, formal study difficulties, economic
gain and sacrifice, better job opportunities, "revitalization" leave,
accessibility of graduate school, and support by peers and supervisors. Agents
without advanced degrees related decisions positively to administrator persuasion,
better job opportunities, and improved competence; negatively, to economic sacrifice
and formal school difficulty. Agents with advanced degrees stressed competence
and job opportunities. Younger agents noted many concerns, while older agents
responded only to administrator persuasion. Based on these and other findings,
several conclusions were reached: the kind of decision making described is complex;
adult education administrators can and do influence such decisions; adult educators
measure the cost effectiveness of advanced degrees quite accurately and are
influenced thereby; and they seem to treat their decision as basically an individual
problem. (LY)
Borriello, G. and C. Ebeling (1993). Research on integrated systems : proceedings
of the 1993 symposium. Cambridge, Mass., MIT Press.
Bosher, P. (2000). Short on vision. New Scientist, Reed Business Information
Ltd. 166: 43.
Focuses on internet accessibility for blind people. How only a fraction of books
and periodicals are transcribed into Braille; Technology which allows blind
people to access sites on the World Wide Web (WWW); How the use of non-readable
internet formats has led to the formation of the Web Accessibility Initiative.
Boshier, R., M. Mohapi, et al. "Best and Worst Dressed Web Courses: Strutting
into the 21st Century in Comfort and Style." Distance Education. v18
n2 p327-49 1997.
A study using a 43-item coding schedule examined 127 Web courses. After analyzing
interrelationships between the variables and issues pertaining to accessibility,
interaction, and attractiveness, a University of Wisconsin history course <http://hum.1ss.wisc.edu/hist102>
was awarded a "Madonna" as best dressed, while an Illinois State University
social-foundations-of-education course <http://coe.ilstu.edu - select "courses">
was chosen as worst. (PEN)
Bounds, S. M. and C. D. Vernon (1976). Community Awareness of Thomas Nelson
Community College and Accessibility of Educational Programs: A Survey of the
Adult Population of the Virginia Peninsula: 39.
The purpose of this study was to determine levels of citizen awareness of the
mission and operations of Thomas Nelson Community College (TNCC), to identify
access barriers to potential TNCC attendance, and to assess the educational
goals of local residents. A 15-item questionnaire was sent to a random sample
of 1,000 local adults. The 381 respondents were typical of mail survey respondents
in that they overrepresented upper socioeconomic groups; however, in other respects
they were generally characteristic of residents in the TNCC service area. Results
indicated a high degree of familiarity with the mission and operations of TNCC
and a positive attitude toward the college. They also showed that the chief
obstacles to enrolling at TNCC were lack of time and/or interest. Most respondents
indicated that their primary goal in attending TNCC would be to satisfy a personal
interest or to meet some specific job-related need; interest in degree programs
was clearly secondary. Many indicated an interest in self-paced instruction
and in televised educational programs. The questionnaire is appended, as are
general comments from the respondents. (DC)
Bowden, J. (1994). The Development of Telematics in a Rural District in Western
Australia. Australia Western Australia: 9.
A case study investigated the use of telematics technology in the delivery of
learning programs from a rural high school in Western Australia to four receiver
schools. Telematics is an audiographic computer system that simultaneously links
a teacher to classrooms in one to five other schools. The program was introduced
in 1991 to widen curriculum choices for rural, isolated students. Interviews
with administrators, teachers, and program coordinators at the delivery and
receiving schools focused on six key program factors: accessibility, ease of
use, reliability, functional application, organization, and lesson delivery.
The study concluded that sharing of resources within a small cluster of schools
has enabled schools to increase curriculum choices, allowed staff and students
to become familiar with computer-based technology, encouraged and motivated
staff to develop innovative educational practices, developed cooperation between
schools in the network, increased retention of students in postcompulsory education,
and increased opportunities for girls to develop technological competencies.
It was also found that the location of the telematics equipment in the school
was significant to program success, and that staff wanted existing facilities
and equipment to be upgraded to improve lesson delivery. Staff also expressed
concerns related to the level of program support and commitment demonstrated
by the Ministry of Education, and the provision of a capable and reliable telephone
service essential for program implementation. Contains 24 references. (LP)
Bowe, F. (2000). Universal design in education : teaching nontraditional
students. Westport, Conn., Bergin & Garvey.
Bowe, F. and J. Rochlin (1983). The Business-Rehabilitation Partnership. Arkansas:
46.
This handbook describes services that rehabilitation has to offer business,
outlines how practitioners may approach business with these services, and provides
resource information and material that the practitioner may find helpful in
this work. Covered in the individual chapters are the following topics: the
basic services that rehabilitation can offer business, authority, common questions
often asked of rehabilitation practitioners, assessment, recruitment, accommodation
and accessibility, compliance, internal mobility, training, supervisor awareness,
interventions, government programs, business response, and procedures for making
the partnership work. A brief bibliography concludes the guide. (MN)
Boyd, J. D. (1978). Case Study: Illinois. Illinois: 10.
Approaches to student financial aid that are used in Illinois are described.
Illinois tries to respond to the separate priorities of guaranteeing both access
and reasonable choice. Over 60 percent of students at public four-year colleges,
and about 18 percent of students attending community colleges receive need-based
aid. The need-based student aid program is available to full-time and half-time
students and to all students regardless of their academic standing. The need
to coordinate with federal financial aid programs is emphasized. Additionally,
some kind of formula based on the accessibility of loans is recommended. Illinois'
maximum award has grown over time from about $600 in the beginning, to a current
$1,650. Illinois has also stabilized the enrollments between the public and
private schools in the state so that institutions equally share the situations
of enrollment growth or enrollment decline. It is projected that half-time students
will increasingly seek to participate in postsecondary education and jobs, or
other pursuits. The importance of scheduling financial aid decisions to provide
students with flexibility in their enrollment decisions is noted. Concerns related
to accountability include the institutions' determination of eligibility of
funds. Some audits may determine whether the packaging of aid is within the
guidelines established by the state. Institutions also need to have clear refund
policies that are implemented by state authorities and that protect students.
(SW)
Boyer, W. A. R. and H. Bandy "Rural Teachers' Perceptions of the Current
State of Inclusion: Knowledge, Training, Teaching Practices, and Adequacy of
Support Systems." Exceptionality. v7 n1 p1-18 1997.
This study investigated the impact of the rural experience on rural teachers'
knowledge and understanding of students with special needs, perceptions of their
own teaching effectiveness and job satisfaction, and perceptions of the accessibility
and availability of support systems within schools and school districts. Recommendations
are made for teacher education and inservice experiences. (Author/CR)
Brace, W. "The Changing World of Government Documents." Catholic
Library World. v67 n2 p21-28 Dec 1996.
Discusses developments in depository librarianship and refers to changes in
library education at Rosary College (Illinois). Highlights include bibliographic
system problems, adoption of standardized cataloging methods (MARC format),
improvement in document accessibility, costs, the National Technical Information
Service, changes in document formats, legislation and the GPO (Government Printing
Office) Access service, and goals of the Electronic Federal Depository Library.
(AEF)
Bradshaw, D. (1995). Multiple Images, Common Threads. Case Studies of Good Practice
in Adult Community Education. Australia Victoria: 134.
This document presents 10 case studies of adult community education programs
(ACE) in the state of Victoria, Australia, in the mid 1990s, that were identified
as exemplifying the following principles of good practice in ACE: expansiveness,
integration, responsiveness, innovation, belonging, explicitness, autonomy,
accessibility, synthesis, and coordination. The courses profiled represent a
broad cross-section of subject areas (child care, prevocational education, furniture
restoration, small business development for women, Koori Art, literacy and community
decision making, women's issues, tourism, applied sport psychology, and horticulture)
and formats (including formal part-time and full-time courses, discussion groups,
workshops, courses that use community resources rather than textbooks, courses
taught primarily by one instructor, and courses taught by a series of different
instructors). Each profile contains information about some/all of the following
aspects of the program: history; educational characteristics (philosophy, aims,
development stage, length, delivery mode, prerequisites, content and methodology,
competencies/expected learning outcomes, assessment criteria/methods, reporting/certification,
accreditation status, pathways); good practice criteria; student characteristics;
and administration and resources. Appended are the following: discussion of
criteria for identifying good practice in adult education; range/spread/mix
of case studies matrix; list of principles used to select case studies; and
acknowledgements. Contains 47 references. (MN)
Bramstedt, W. G. C. (1979). A Bibliography of North American Indians In The
Los Angeles Metropolitan Area--The Urban Indian Capital. Public Administration
Series: Bibliography P-233. California: 15.
Sources of information on North American Indians in the Los Angeles metropolitan
area are listed in this bibliography of 125 entries relating to urban studies,
minority peoples, and migration, as well as specific Indian issues. Citations
are organized alphabetically by author under publication type: masters' theses
and doctoral dissertations, reports and studies, newspapers (mainly the Los
Angeles Herald-Examiner and the Los Angeles Times), journal articles, magazines,
and newsletters, selected material in larger works, and unpublished papers.
Most entries are dated from the 1970's and late 1960's; note is made of documents
obtainable from Dissertation Abstracts International or ERIC. The wide range
of topics covered includes adaptation to urban life, health problems, education,
employment, cultural affairs, housing, and sociolinguistics. The bibliography
is intended to further understanding of Indian problems through increasing accessibility
to the literature; college students, teachers, researchers, and persons involved
in public administration are potential users. (JH)
Brandsma, J., R. Noonan, et al. (2000). Transforming the Public Provision of
Training: Reorganisation or Privatisation? Long-Term Changes in Sweden and the
Netherlands. CEDEFOP Discussion Dossier. Greece: 121.
The public sector is becoming less concerned with who is providing a given service
but more concerned about the quality, reliability, accessibility, and price
of the service. In vocational education and training (VET), one consequence
of this transformation is that the various public stakeholders involved with
funding, purchasing, and providing VET are increasingly being separated, ensuring
that overlaps in responsibilities and sometimes contradicting interests of public
stakeholders are minimized while guaranteeing a greater accountability of the
various agencies, whether public or private. The corporatization of the Swedish
public training provision system, the AMU-Gruppen, is a clear example of deregulation
and market orientation of a formerly highly public body with an almost monopolistic
position. The process, which started in 1986 with the AMU-Gruppen being transformed
from a division under the national board of education to an autonomous agency,
may end with the privatization of the entire structure. Likewise, the restructuring
of the Dutch VET system, which has resulted in the establishment of regional
training centers, has been a long process, initiated by legislation in 1987
that resulted in the first mergers, and continuing so that by 1998-99, the total
number of publicly funded VET institutions has dropped from 396 to 65. (Contains
127 references.) (KC)
Branzburg, J. (2003). Publish Your Lesson Plans Online. Technology &
Learning, CMP Media LLC. 24: 44.
Focuses on the online publication of lesson plans in the U.S. Requirements for
publication at Teachnet.com; Accessibility of lesson plan in Web sites; List
of lesson plan sites. INSET: Submit Your Lesson Plans.
Brassett-Grundy, A. (2002). Parental Perspectives of Family Learning. Wider
Benefits of Learning Research Report. United Kingdom England: 55.
Parental perspectives on family learning were examined through focus group discussions
with parents who had participated in family learning courses at a nursery school,
primary school, secondary school, and family support center in London, England.
Five focus group discussions with a total of 25 family learning course participants,
2 in-depth interviews with family learning course participants, and 1 focus
group discussion with 4 nonparticipating parents were conducted. The "participating"
parents conceptualized family learning very broadly, as an entity involving
a wide network of people, activities, and places. The "participating"
parents saw family learning as a means to gaining qualifications, improving
their employment situation, increasing their stimulation, increasing their contact
with others, gaining more confidence, and enabling them to teach their children
more and better prepare them for their future. The barriers to participation
in family learning cited by the "participating parents" included lack
of time, lack of physical and financial support for child care, and poor accessibility/availability
of courses. Compared with the "participating parents," the "nonparticipating"
parents conceptualized family learning very similarly but cited many more disadvantages
of and barriers to participation. Twenty-one recommendations regarding the marketing,
design, and delivery of family learning programs were formulated based on the
focus group findings. (Contains 23 references.) (MN)
Braswell, R. E. (2000). Special Needs. Alabama: 42.
This document contains the following papers on special needs instruction and
technology: (1) "Hawaii Special Education Teacher Induction" (Kalena
Oliva and Quinn Avery); (2) "The Impact of Group v Individual Use of Hypermedia-Based
Instruction" (Lewis R. Johnson, Louis P. Semrau, and Gail E. Fitzgerald);
(3) "Assistive Technology Meets Instructional Technology: A Standards-Based
Approach to Implementation in Teacher Education" (Joyce Pittman); (4) "Infusing
Technology into a Preservice Teacher Education Program for Special Educators"
(Evelyn M. Dailey); (5) "Web Enabled Teaching Aid for Non-Orthographic
Languages" (Georgios Kouroupetroglou, Constantinos Viglas, and Christina
Metaxaki-Eossionidis); (6) "Special Needs Software Evaluation: Choosing
the Right One" (James W. Forgan, Roberta K. Weber, and Perry L. Schoon);
(7) "Effective Technology Practices in an Inclusion Classroom: A Proposed
Teacher Training Model" (Tandra Tyler-Wood, Joyce Rademacher, and Mark
Mortensen); and (8) "Teaching Faculty and Future Teachers about Web Site
Accessibility: Issues and Challenges" (Pamela Luft and Drew Tiene). Individual
papers contain references. (MES)
Bray, M. (2001). Accessibility of Schools and Colleges of Education Home Pages
for Individuals with Disabilities. North Carolina: 15.
Colleges of Education (COEs) use the World Wide Web to disseminate and gather
information. Online barriers limit the accessibility of the Web for individuals
with disabilities. This study evaluated the accessibility of COE home pages.
Two hundred and fifty Web sites were randomly selected for evaluation. A software
program was used to quantify the number of accessibility errors at each site.
The results indicated that most (79%) institutions of higher education home
pages had accessibility problems, and the majority of these problems (67%) of
the errors were severe problems that should be given a high priority for correcting.
The good news is that the majority (74%) of the errors can easily be corrected.
The work reflects a need for COEs to examine the accessibility of their home
pages. Direction for improving accessibility is provided. Two tables present
information on type of accessibility error, percent, severity, and ease to correct,
and World Wide Web resources. (Contains 12 references.) (Author/AEF)
Bray, M., C. P. Flowers, et al. (2003). ACCESSIBILITY OF ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS'
WEB SITES FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES. Education, Project Innovation.
123: 815.
Many Elementary Schools use the World Wide Web (WWW) to disseminate and gather
information. On-line barriers limit the accessibility of the WWW for students
with disabilities. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the accessibility
of Elementary Schools' home pages. A total of 244 Elementary School web sites
were located using a popular online directory and evaluated for accessibility.
A software program was used to quantify the number of accessibility errors at
each site. The results indicated that most (57.4%) Elementary School home pages
had accessibility problems, many of which were severe and should be given a
high priority for correcting. The good news is that the majority of the errors
can easily be corrected. The work reflects a need for Elementary Schools to
examine the accessibility of their home pages. Direction for improving accessibility
is provided.ABSTRACT FROM AUTHOR
Bray, N. J. "Research Activity and the Support of Undergraduate Education."
New Directions for Institutional Research. n90 p23-29 Sum 1996.
A study examined the relationship between faculty research productivity and
the importance faculty attach to the undergraduate education goal of knowledge
breadth and to faculty accessibility to students. Differences between "hard"
and "soft" disciplines were also assessed. Results indicate that there
is no correlation between productivity and these attitudes, contrary to public
perception. (MSE)
Brazier, M., M. Parry, et al. "Blind Students: Facing Challenges in a College
Physics Course." Journal of College Science Teaching. v30 n2 p114-16
Oct 2000.
Introduces programs that assist blind students such as Tactile Access to Education
for Visually Impaired Students (TAEVIS). Reports on two blind students who successfully
completed physics courses and their learning strategies. Discusses the accessibility
of visual aids. (YDS)
Bremer, C. D., A. T. Clapper, et al. (2002). Universal Design: A Strategy To
Support Students' Access to the General Education Curriculum. Information Brief.
Minnesota: 8.
This information brief explains principles of universal design as an approach
to providing access for students with disabilities to the general education
curriculum. The premise of universal design is that environments and products
should be designed for maximum usability including flexible curriculum and learning
environments to allow students with widely varying abilities to achieve established
academic content standards. A table offers classroom examples of seven universal
design principles. These include: (1) equitable use; (2) flexibility in use;
(3) simple and intuitive; (4) perceptible information; (5) tolerance for error;
(6) low physical effort; and (7) size and space for approach and use. Three
overlying principles for adapting instruction to individual student needs are:
first, multiple means of presentation of information; second, multiple means
of expression by students; and third, multiple means of engagement for students.
(Contains 17 references.) (DB)
Brennan, M. L. "The ADA: What's Your Plan?" Facilities Manager.
v19 n2 p32-33 Mar-Apr 2003.
Discusses how to create or refocus a transition plan for compliance with the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Steps include documenting needs, documenting
solutions, prioritizing needs, and creating a schedule. Also briefly addresses
accessibility requirements, the concept of undue burden, finding help, and summarized
Title II requirements. (EV)
Brindis, C. "Reducing Adolescent Pregnancy: The Next Steps for Program,
Research and Policy." Family Life Educator. v9 n1 Fall 90 spec iss:
66.
This special issue of the "Family Life Educator" features a planning
document on adolescent pregnancy prevention designed to assist communities throughout
the United States in translating the National Research Council's recommendations
and strategies from the "Risking the Future" study into steps for
future action. An introduction provides a general overview of the problem and
of strategies for attacking it, and explains the genesis and purpose of the
document. This is followed by three sections with the following headings: (1)
Helping Teens Wait: Abstinence Education; (2) When Teens Don't Wait: Encouraging
Contraception; and (3) Reasons to Wait: Enhancing Life Options. A brief concluding
summary encourages communities to use the strategies and action steps included
in the document in their efforts to meet the challenge of preventing adolescent
pregnancy. The summary also enumerates the key factors that have been found
to be present in successful programs: early intervention, accessibility and
acceptability, continuity of services over an extended period of time, targeting
of strategies to meet the varying needs of young people, multipronged and integrated
approaches that incorporate a variety of concurrent strategies within a comprehensive
community-wide plan, and broad-based commitment from major community institutions.
(NB)
Brindley, J. E. (1989). Retention Strategies: A Pre-Admission Program for Adult
Distance Learners. Canada Alberta: 10.
Provision of orientation programs is of primary importance in postsecondary
education in order to help students assess themselves in relation to the challenge
presented by their chosen program and institution and to develop the skills
necessary to meet that challenge. Open institutions using distance teaching
methods have a special responsibility to ensure that prospective students are
not set up for failure by the promise of accessibility and flexibility. Athabasca
University in Edmonton, Ontario, Canada, tries to meet this responsibility by
supplying a range of preadmission services that can be delivered through a variety
of modes to prospective and new students. These services include: (1) information;
(2) orientation; and (3) a self-assessment questionnaire to help students or
prospective students determine their reasons for returning to study and the
commitment they can make to it. Evaluation of preadmission services is ongoing
to ensure that they are meeting student needs. For the future, Athabasca University
will attempt to improve preadmission services through increasing accessibility,
using new technologies, and taking a more integrated approach. (KC)
British Columbia Dept. of Education Victoria.[BBB06852] (1991). Province of
British Columbia Ministry of Education Annual Report. July 1, 1990 to June 30,
1991. Canada British Columbia: 82.
This Ministry of Education report describes the effectiveness of the British
Columbian school system in educating learners. A picture of the school system
as seen in the performance of students and schools in 1990-1991 is presented.
The report focuses on results that are representative of the province-wide performance
of students and schools and contains descriptions, anecdotes, and photographs
of schools and school districts of British Columbia. The first section describes
the performance of British Columbia learners in achieving the three educational
goals of the school system in student development: (1) intellectual; (2) human
and social; and (3) career. The second section details the extent to which the
school system demonstrates five attributes: (1) accessibility; (2) relevance;
(3) equity; (4) quality; and (5) accountability. The two initial appendices
list sources of information and key Ministry publications. The third appendix
presents 13 detailed tables of data. (Author/CK)
Brodeur, D. and R. Heinich (1980). Report of the Third Annual Survey of the
Circulation of Nonprint Educational Media in Public Schools, 1979-1980. Indiana:
54.
The third of a series on the circulation of nonprint educational media by media
centers at district, county, and regional levels, this report is primarily concerned
with the distribution of nonprint materials for handicapped learners, and the
selection and evaluation methods used by media directors in building collections
of materials that are available to teachers and learners. The study focuses
on procedures for the identification and selection of nonprint educational media
for circulation to public schools, and examines the extent to which nonprint
materials for handicapped learners are included in the system of distribution.
A profile of 16mm films, videotapes, and filmstrip set collections is provided.
Funding sources, user requests, accessibility to materials, and profiles of
the professional orientations of media directors surveyed are also given. (Author/MER)
Brody, M. (1988). Marine-Related Education in Maine: A Survey of K-12 Public
School Teachers. Maine: 71.
This document reports on a survey that was conducted to determine the extent
to which a random sample (N=2,112) of Maine public school teachers (K-12) included
marine-related topics or activities in their teaching, as well as how informed
they were about existing marine education curricula. A total of 588 questionnaires
were returned. Findings indicate that the: (1) amount of time spent on marine
education; (2) number of marine topics taught; and (3) proportion of teachers
who taught marine topics all decreased as distance from the coast increased.
These trends were attributed to the level of accessibility to the ocean environment
and to local cultural factors and priorities. Recommendations for further research
in several areas relating to marine education in general, as well as specifically
in Maine, are presented. The survey instrument is included. (TW)
Broholm, J. R. (1993). Networking on the Network: Teachers and Electronic Mail.
Louisiana: 9.
The ways that early adopters of electronic messaging have used electronic mail
(e-mail) in the schools were studied using the Unified Network for Informatics
in Teacher Education (UNITE) system at the Instructional Technology Center of
the University of Kansas. At the time of the study, UNITE was operating in 6
school districts and 16 schools. The UNITE system provides other services of
access and planning, but the e-mail functions were the focus of the study. A
network analysis was conducted of one-to-one messaging on the e-mail system,
with the permission of 65 volunteer users. The largest group of e-mail users
was the science teachers (36 percent of the users). The most avid users were
the librarians, representing about 24 percent of the users, who corresponded
with more individuals and sent more messages. It was evident that constraints
on the time of teachers limited their uses of the system. Time, accessibility,
and existing routine discouraged teacher use of e-mail and must be considered
in any strategy to promote its use. (Contains 22 references.) (SLD)
Bronson, V. (1964). Naeb technical report on the impact of airborne television
transmission on land-based uhf television assignment plans: 44.
Operational effects of airborne educational television on ultrahigh frequency
(uhf) television assignments on land were investigated. specifically, the effort
related to expansion plans of the midwest program on airborne television instruction
(mpati). previous studies by the national association of educational broadcasters
(naeb) led to the development of computer programs which were used in prescribing
a uhf assignment table. the speed of the computer and accessibility of data
in the computer program made it practical to determine the impact of the proposed
mpati expansion in two contexts--(1) by using new standards which mpati had
recommended, and (2) by using standards developed by naeb engineers. the computer
was programed to print out the location and channel number of assignments which
would have to be deleted if mpati propagation curves were adopted, and those
which would have to be deleted if naeb standards were adopted. the study indicated
that no fewer than 60 channels would be affected by the mpati proposal. for
the naeb plan, 83 channels would be involved. if new standards proposed by the
mpati were used, as many as 46 proposed assignments would need to be deleted.
(jc)
Brookfield, S. "On Ideology, Pillage, Language and Risk: Critical Thinking
and the Tensions of Critical Practice." Studies in Continuing Education.
v13 n1 p1-14 1991.
Adult educators engaged in critical practice must address four issues: (1) the
connection between their own political commitment and encouragement of learners'
critical thinking (CT); (2) whether CT should be based on one intellectual tradition;
(3) accessibility of the language of CT to learners; and (4) balance between
CT's liberatory possibilities and the risks and consequences involved. (SK)
Brooks, D. K. (1978). Counseling the Hearing Impaired Child in the Public Schools:
Techniques and Strategies. District of Columbia: 14.
One of the most far-reaching results of the passage of the Education of All
Handicapped Children Act (P.L. 94-142, signed into law November 29, 1975) is
the increase in the number of deaf children being mainstreamed into regular
public school programs. This increase in deaf children in public school programs
will demand not only modification of existing academic programs to permit equal
program accessibility to the deaf child, but also the development and implementation
of appropriate support service systems. It is anticipated that the school counselor
will emerge as the key support system for the deaf child attending a public
school program. This increasingly important function of the counselor will necessitate
an understanding of the specific social and psychological needs of the deaf
child, and the strategies that may be employed to meet these needs. An overview
of the social and psychological needs of the deaf child attending the public
school system is provided. Suggestions and strategies for counseling and "outreach"
support activities are offered. (Author)
Brooks, K. W. (1979). Facilities Planning Guide for Special Education Programs:
Planning Accessibility for the Handicapped in Public Schools. District of Columbia:
29.
The guide details characteristics to provide architecturally accessible special
education programs for handicapped students. Impetus for the accessibility movement
is traced to legislation, including the Architectural Barriers Act and Sections
503 and 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. Planning features considered
are the development of a master plan, identification of qualitative and quantitative
needs, determination of resources, and staff involvement. A final section outlines
specific accessibility requirements and current and proposed ANSI (American
National Standard Specifications) standards for general interior considerations,
specific areas within facilities, ground and floor surfaces, parking and passenger
loading zones, ramps, stairs, elevators, drinking fountains, bathrooms, alarms,
signage, telephone, and assembly areas. (CL)
Brooks, L. "Counseling Psychology in Colleges of Education: A Survey of
Training Directors." Counseling Psychologist. v17 n3 p470-76 Jul 1989.
Surveyed counseling psychology (CP) training directors (N=34), housed partly
or completely in colleges of education. Found advantages were compatibility
of CP program with the college mission, esteem of the program, and accessibility
of related programs. Found disadvantages were perception by colleagues that
housing in education was not credible, lack of fit with K-12 mission, and limited
funding. (Author/ABL)
Brouder, K. "Parental Attitudes Toward Pre-College Planning." Journal
of Student Financial Aid. v17 n2 p5-13 Spr 1987.
The findings are summarized from a Spring 1986 survey of parents of 7th, 8th,
9th, and 10th grade students, which was intended to improve the quality and
accessibility of information about postsecondary educational options. (MLW)
Brown, B. L. (2000). Web-Based Training. ERIC Digest No. 218. Ohio: 4.
Reduced training costs, worldwide accessibility, and improved technological
capabilities have made Web-based training (WBT) a viable alternative to classroom
instruction. WBT enables businesses to cut their training costs. Efficiency
of operation is another major advantage of WBT. The flexibility of time, place,
and programs offered via WBT appeals to learners who must balance school with
work and home responsibilities. Task- and detail-oriented people who are focused
in their study habits and engaged in learning tasks requiring creative thinking
and analysis are most successful in using computer-based, online programs. Virtual
classrooms can be asynchronous and synchronous. Asynchronous classrooms allow
students and instructors to engage in collaborative learning activities without
being online at the same time. Synchronous classrooms are more reflective of
traditional classrooms because they allow instructors and students to be online
simultaneously. WBT programs must be designed to accommodate learners' needs,
allow learners the freedom to follow unique paths to learning in their own cognitive
styles, and require students to construct meaning. Studies of the advantages
and disadvantages of WBT training have identified tips to help instructors use
the Web's technological capabilities to advance their teaching and learning
goals with the same quality achievable through the best classroom instruction.
(Contains 14 references.) (MN)
Brown, D. (1978). Wider Doors for Handicapped Children: Section 504, Part C.
OSSC Bulletin Vol. 22, No. 3. Oregon: 39.
This bulletin speaks to the major issue of providing equal opportunity for handicapped
students through implementation of the program accessibility requirements of
Section 504, Subpart C of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973. The purpose of this
bulletin is to share significant highlights of a conference on "Barrier-Free
Environments and the Schools," discuss the idea of "program accessibility,"
and suggest steps for compliance with this legislation. The scope of the act
is illustrated in tables and the document explains how the subparts require
immediate action by educational leaders. With regard to existing facilities,
the section is a "program access" law rather than a "barrier-free"
law. The major concept is that the program must be available to and usable by
handicapped persons. For new facilities, the law is unequivocal regarding accessibility--all
new facilities (or new parts of facilities) must be "readily accessible
to and usable by handicapped persons." Procedures that administrators should
follow to ensure compliance with the law are outlined and sources of assistance
are listed. The appendices contain rules and regulations for the legislation,
a checklist to determine whether buildings are accessible to the physically
handicapped, and an annotated bibliography. (Author/MLF)
Brown, D. G., Ed. (2000). Teaching with Technology:Seventy-Five Professors
from Eight Universities Tell Their Stories. Boston, Anker Publishing Company,
Inc.
Brown, D. R. (1983). Testing Physically Handicapped Students in Science. A Resource
Book for Teachers. West Virginia: 78.
The four chapters in this resource book provide general considerations for the
development of teacher-made achievement tests in science for students with visual,
hearing, and/or orthopedic impairments. Chapter 1 focuses on changes in classroom
testing by considering the testing of handicapped students, norm-referenced
versus criterion-referenced testing, individualized educational planning, and
the science test. Chapter 2 discusses the testing of visually impaired students.
Topic areas addressed include: determining an appropriate testing technique;
visual, auditory, and tactile testing techniques; student response to test questions;
laboratory type tests; and non-teacher made tests. Chapter 3 discusses the testing
of hearing impaired students, examining language considerations, item format,
test administration, and non-verbal tests. Chapter 4 focuses primarily on facilitative
techniques for testing motor impaired and orthopedically disabled (MIOD) students.
Areas addressed include the breadth of the problem, the need to assess life
function impairment (with a sample assessment included), administration techniques,
accessibility, time factors, and possible mitigative testing strategies (listed
according to MIOD limitation). A list of references, a list of organizations
and agencies for the disabled, and glossary are provided in appendices. (JN)
Brown, D. S., S. M. Bruyere, et al. (1994). The ADA and Total Quality Management.
Implementing the Americans with Disabilities Act. New York: 5.
One of a series of guides on implementing the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA), this guide focuses on the relevance of total quality management (TQM)
principles to the ADA. First, the guide briefly explains both the ADA and TQM.
Next, "reasonable accommodation" under the ADA is discussed and suggestions
for using TQM to help implement the ADA are offered. These suggestions urge
implementation of four TQM principles: capacity building, universal design,
focus on strengths rather than deficits, and use of data for decision making.
The planning process of TQM is then applied to reasonable accommodation in the
form of the Plan-Do-Check-Act cycle. Suggestions for educating personnel about
the ADA include adding it to existing TQM training efforts. Several organizational
resources are listed. (DB)
Brown, D. W. E. (1997). Higher Education Exchange 1997. Ohio: 84.
A foreword and 11 articles discuss the nature and structure of public scholarship.
The contents include: "Foreword" (Deborah Witte); (1) "Public
Scholarship: The Dissemination of Knowledge" (Jean Cameron) which maintains
the public has claims on higher education as a creator and disseminator of knowledge;
(2) "Daring to Be Unprofessional" (David W. Brown) which suggests
the professional ethos is often at odds with the needs of students and other
realities on campus; (3) "Towards an Ethic of Academic Discourse, Or, Why
Do Professors Talk the Way They Do?" (Bennett Ramsey) which considers the
need to balance academic research and academic accessibility; (4) "Pedagogical
and Civic Response-Abilities" (Stephen M. Johnson) which examines open-ended
learning and multicultural classrooms; (5) "An Agenda for Involving Faculty
in Service" (Deborah Hirsch) which proposes service learning as a form
of faculty professional service; (6) "The Promise and the Flaws of Public
Scholarship" (Alan Wolfe) which presents public scholarship as an obligation
to share knowledge; (7) "Public Scholars: In Search of a Usable Present--A
Reply to Alan Wolfe" (Jay Rosen) which stresses the need to disseminate
knowledge and create it in a group fashion; (8) "Public Scholarship and
the Land-Grant Idea" (Scott J. Peters) which notes the legacy of partnership
between university and community; (9) "Civic Education in a New Key"
(Bernard Murchland) which urges the centrality of educating for a healthy civic
society; (10) "Public Deliberation: A Resurgence of Scholarly Interest"
(Dennis Gilbert) which notes that public deliberation strengthens the legitimacy
of public institutions; and (11) "The Public and the Academy" (David
Mathews) which offers a broad look at the relationship between institutions
of higher education and the civic realm. (Papers contain references.)(JLS)
Brown, J. D. and S. N. Keller (2000). Can the Mass Media Be Healthy Sex Educators?
Family Planning Perspectives, Alan Guttmacher Institute. 32: 255.
Discusses the role of mass media in sex education in the United States. Evidence
of the accessibility of mass media to young people; Why the media is considered
by adolescents as important sources of sexual information; Information on sexuality
education Web sites.
Brown, R. W. (1982). Resource Specialist Training Resources. Volume II. California:
133.
Materials for special education resource specialists in California on implementing
a team approach and facilitating change are presented as the second of four
volumes. The first section includes a description of the resource specialist
program; the interaction between the resource specialist and the principal;
the roles of the resource specialist, principal, program specialist, and resource
specialist aide; and the teamwork responsibilities of the resource specialist
and aide. The second section contains a list of conditions that facilitate change;
a form for rating readiness for change for six clusters (e.g., accessibility
of resources and support, and skill in collaborative group work); a list of
reasons that human resources are important to managers; a reading list on self-directed
management; a description of A. Maslow's need hierarchy; and management guidelines.
Thirteen pages of overhead transparencies are appended. Additional appendices
include activities excerpted from "Handbooks of Structured Experiences
for Human Relations Training" (Pfeiffer and Jones). These activities include
the following topics: communications stress management, group dynamics, closure
debriefing, individual differences, communication group processes, communication
problem solving, and personal development. Rating forms are included in the
activity units. (SEW)
Brown-Chidsey, R. and M. L. Boscardin (1999). Computers as Accessibility Tools
for Students with and without Learning Disabilities. Massachusetts: 40.
This study investigated the attitudes and opinions of three students with and
three students without learning disabilities regarding the use of computers
for school-related work. The students (in grades 5 through 12) were selected
from three school sites and interviewed in-depth. Analysis of interviews with
open-coding procedures identified five general themes: applications of computers,
instructional uses of computers, attitudes about computers, personal experience
with computers, and resource needs. Comparison of students with and without
learning disabilities showed that although most students were generally positive
about computers, students with learning disabilities had qualitatively different
experiences with computers and less positive attitudes about computers than
those without learning disabilities. These students also expressed greater frustration
about learning to use a computer and were more equivocal about the role of computers
in educational programs. The most salient finding was the connection between
participant attitudes and prior computer-related experiences. Results suggest
the need to integrate instruction about technology into early intervention programs
for students with learning disabilities. (Contains 35 references.) (DB)
Brumback, E. L. "Accessibility is the Key: The Organization of Locally
Produced Materials." High School Journal. 59, 8, 354-61, May 76.
Provides five guiding principles helpful in cataloging, storing, and circulating
teacher-made materials as well as commercially produced media. (Author/RK)
Brumbaugh, A. J. (1965). The two-year college in virginia: 122.
Following a review of the status of post-high school education, a committee
of the higher education study commission recommended (1) a statewide system
of comprehensive community colleges, coordinated with other segments of higher
education, (2) a board of community colleges and technical education, to operate
under the state council of higher education in development of a statewide plan,
formulation of policies, and determination of financial needs, (3) transfer
of 2-year branches of senior institutions to the new board, (4) development
of criteria for the establishment of 2-year post-high school institutions, (5)
local boards or advisory committees for each institution, (6) effective articulation,
and (7) policies and regulations to protect and preserve the identity of the
2-year college. recommended criteria for establishment of 2-year colleges include
(1) minimum potential enrollment of 400 students, (2) strong local interest
in the college, (3) assurance of adequate financial support for capital outlay
and operating costs, and (4) accessibility. (wo)
Brun, J. K. and K. L. Clancy "Low-Income and Elderly Populations."
Journal of Nutrition Education. v12 n2 p128-30 1980.
Recommendations are given in this task force report which focus on nutrition
education programs for the low income and elderly. Issues include: accessibility
to food, national policy, nutritionally vulnerable individuals, program development,
health care, preparation of nutrition educators, and evaluation of existing
nutrition programs. (SA)
Brunken, R., J. L. Plass, et al. (2003). "Direct Measurement of Cognitive
Load in Multimedia Learning." Educational Psychologist 38(1):
53-61.
Buccino, A. (1986). Technology in Science and Mathematics Education. Georgia:
25.
Provided are several perspectives on technology, addressing changes in learners
related to technology, changes in contemporary life related to technology, and
changes in subject areas related to technology (indicating that technology has
created such new tools for inquiry as computer programming, word processing,
online database searches, and collegial communication networks). Also provided
are prospectives on the content of mathematics and science education, noting
that, within the context of current educational reform, there is a fundamental
shift regarding the purposes, audiences, and substantive content of science
and mathematics education. For example, science today should be for all students,
not just those few students who are talented and motivated for professional
careers in science and engineering. Other areas addressed include: (1) current
uses of technology (particularly computers) in mathematics and science education;
(2) trends influencing the use of technology in education (considering demographic
and economic transformation, declining cost of technology, economics of scale
and market pull, integration of technologies, and accessibility of technology);
(3) the computer as a tool; (4) levels of the mind (word processing, spreadsheets,
and databases); and (5) suggestions for publishers. (JN)
Buckley, H. and G. Walters (1994). A Report Prepared for: The Commonwealth of
Learning for Consideration in a Handbook for Developing Gender Sensitive Educational
Materials. Saint Lucia: 113.
Sample components of the Comprehensive Teacher Training Programme (CTTP), a
distance education program offering four academic upgrading courses to Caribbean
women who are untrained elementary school teachers are presented. Though the
bulk of the publication is made up of materials from these distance education
courses, the opening section contains descriptions of the program's general
goals, its design for easy access, its flexibility, its relevance and functionality,
its teaching and learning processes, its accessibility and gender inclusiveness
and simplicity, and its delivery and support system. These points suggest that
the program is well designed to serve nontraditional women students. The sample
materials appended include: (1) the program brochure; (2) tables of contents
for mathematics modules and for the integrated science school-based assessment
assignments showing program accessibility; (3) information on designing materials
for and supporting busy learners to show course management flexibility; (4)
graphics, reading exercises, and home science experiments showing relevance
and functionality; (5) an integrated science module table of contents, introduction,
summary and glossary, a module test marking sheet, and a science module; (6)
data on program employee gender, sample edits of program materials highlighting
sexist material, and material on identifying and correcting sexist language
to demonstrate the program's accessibility, inclusiveness, and simplicity; and
(7) a sample radio announcement to show the program's delivery and support system.
(JB)
Budd, K. B. and J. L. Charlton (1968). Analysis of County School Districts in
Arkansas: 60.
The 1948, Arkansas School District Reorganization Act was passed in an effort
to reduce the 1589 small school districts to a smaller number. Those districts
not consolidated would form county districts. As of the 1967-68 school year,
26 of these county districts remained. The purpose of this study was to provide
information drawing attention to the situation existing in these districts.
In an effort to initiate improvement of schools in these areas, the study examined
the districts in terms of rurality, settlement patterns, spatial accessibility,
financial resources and expenditures, quality of school operation, and school
performance in terms of the extent to which school-age population enroll in
and continue through high school. Comparisons were drawn between the county
districts and existing independent school districts within the same county.
Since the county districts were small, many of the problems encountered were
similar to those experienced by small independent school districts. It was concluded
that although consolidation of county with independent districts would not solve
all problems of county districts, advantages of student and community participation
would outweigh the disadvantages. (DK)
Bureau of Education for the Handicapped (DHEW/OE) Washington DC. Div. of Innovation
and Development.[BBB11930] National Committee Arts for the Handicapped Washington
DC.[BBB15890] (1977). The Arts and Handicapped People: Defining the National
Direction. District of Columbia: 78.
Proceedings from an April, 1977 conference focus on the current status and future
directions of arts programming for the handicapped. M. Appell provides an overview
of the field; while W. Kalenius, Jr. reviews data from 138 current research
studies which indicate that handicapped children were able to learn the art
forms, enjoyed the activities, increased feelings of self worth and learned
academic skills as a result of arts activities. S. Madeja discusses the role
of aesthetic perception, the critical process, and knowledge about the arts
in arts instruction for the handicapped. L. Molloy discusses architectural and
program accessibility factors for public arts facilities. Methods of facilitating
career development and leisure time enjoyment of the arts are discussed by J.
Goldstein. Papers by J. Newberg and J. Kukuk deal with the artist's role in
working with handicapped people and the major components of comprehensive arts
education programs for the handicapped. G. Barlow cites the negative attitudes
of society toward the handicapped in general, and suggests the need to identify
attitudes specific to the handicapped in the arts. Further research needs are
projected by J. Morrison. A conference summary outlines conclusions (regarding
the Federal role, research, and arts in education, public facilities and attitudes),
implications, and projections. (CL)
Bureau of Indian Affairs (Dept. of Interior) Window Rock AZ.[BBB00080] Southwest
Regional Resource Center Salt Lake City UT.[BBB10868] (1980). Special Education
Handbook. Arizona: 472.
In order to provide special education programs that are responsive to the needs
of Navajo students and in order to comply with the Rules and Regulations of
Public Law 94-142 (The Education for All Handicapped Children Act) and Public
Law 95-561 (Education Amendments of 1978), the information in this handbook
provides guidance to teachers and administrators who are charged with educating
handicapped Navajo students to their full potential. The handbook is divided
into 12 chapters about: the special education process; eligibility criteria
and programming considerations for the deaf and hearing handicapped, deaf-blind,
homebound or hospitalized, mentally handicapped, multihandicapped, orthopedically
impaired, other health impaired, seriously emotionally disturbed, specific learning
disabled, and speech impaired; the Individualized Education Program; procedural
safeguards; teacher performance standards; memoranda; coding information; and
allowable costs and Element 18 applicable components. Appendices offer guidelines
for reviewing assessment procedures and psychoeducational reports, identification
of bias in testing, an accessibility checklist, a staffing guide for programs
for the handicapped, directions for completing a LEA appplication, and proposed
rules and regulations for PL 95-561 and PL 94-142. (ERB)
Bureau of Labor Statistics (DOL) Washington DC.[FGK08392] (1995). Huge Increase
in Day-Care Workers: A Result of Multiple Societal Changes. District of Columbia:
30.
Using Bureau of Labor Statistics estimates of employment in day-care establishments,
this study analyzes changes in day care over the past 20 years. Growth in day-care
employment has been much stronger than that of other industries. Since 1972,
employment has increased by nearly 250 per cent. Causes of growth includes changing
trends in enrollment and staffing ratios. Increased enrollment can be inferred
from a variety of measures, including an increase in the child population; changes
in family composition which have resulted in more single-parent families; and
an increase in the number of working women. There are also factors which enable
more children to attend day care programs. In particular, day care has become
more affordable. This has been the result of increased government funding of
day care; the growth of Head Start and other programs for children from low-income
families; an increase in state and local initiatives for the further establishment
of day care; tax breaks related to day-care expenses; and private initiatives
stemming from both corporate and non-profit efforts to increase accessibility
to day care. Another mitigating factor is the low cost of labor in the day care
industry. (JW)
Bureau of School Systems (DHEW/OE) Washington DC. Office of Libraries and Learning
Resources.[BBB12455] (1969). School Library Resources, Textbooks, and Other
Instructional Materials. Title II, ESEA. Strengthening Instruction in Science,
Mathematics, Foreign Languages, and the Humanities and Arts; Title III, NDEA.
Fifth Annual Report. District of Columbia: 58.
Two federal educational programs are covered in this annual report for FY 1969:
Title II of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act and Title III of the
National Defense Education Act. The first report describes how the 50 states,
the District of Columbia, Guam, Puerto Rico, the Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands, the Virgin Islands, and the Department of the Interior (operating schools
for Indian children) utilized Title II funds for the improvement of educational
quality and opportunity through increased school library resources, textbooks,
and other instructional materials. Also covered are staffing patterns for the
first three years of the program, special purpose grants, participation of private
school children and teachers, program coordination, accessibility of loaned
materials, management activity, school media personnel, staff development, selection
of materials, standards for instructional materials, and program evaluation.
The second report describes the use of Title III funds to strengthen instruction
in science, mathematics, foreign languages, and the humanities and arts through
the purchase of equipment and materials, minor remodeling, and through state
supervisory and related services. Major topics include priorities, program coordination,
adequacy of equipment and reimbursement, improved instructional patterns and
teaching techniques, curriculum improvement, student achievement, and program
evaluation. (JD)
Bureau of School Systems (DHEW/OE) Washington DC. Office of Libraries and Learning
Resources.[BBB12455] (1970). School Library Resources, Textbooks and Other Instructional
Materials: Title II, ESEA [and] Strengthening Instruction in Science, Mathematics,
Foreign Languages and the Humanities and Arts: Title III, NDEA. Annual Report,
1970. District of Columbia: 56.
Annual reports of two federal education programs for FY 1970 comprise this document:
Title II of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act and Title III of the
National Defense Education Act. Both reports describe how the 50 states, the
District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the Virgin Islands,
the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, the Department of the Interior (for
schools operated by its Bureau of Indian Affairs), and the Department of Defense
(for overseas dependents' schools) utilized their program funds. Areas covered
in the first report include standards for instructional materials, selection
of materials, effect on curriculum and teaching methods, special-purpose grants,
special programs, program evaluation, state and local needs for instructional
materials and management, improved management techniques, accessibility of loaned
materials, coordination with other programs, participation by private school
teachers and children, and staffing and staff development. The major sections
of the second report delineate state education agency services to local education
agencies, priorities, coordination with other programs, reimbursement and adequacy
of equipment and materials, evidence of improved instruction (instructional
patterns/techniques, curriculum, student achievement), evaluation, and data
on fund sources and expenditures. Both reports provide supportive statistics.
(JD)
Burgstahler, S. "Distance Learning: Universal Design, Universal Access."
Educational Technology Review. v10 n1 2002.
Discussion of distance learning focuses on access, legal, and policy issues
for people with disabilities and presents an overview of design considerations
for assuring that a distance learning course is accessible to potential instructors
and students with a wide range of abilities and disabilities. Uses universal
design as a framework. (Author/LRW)
Burgstahler, S. "Distance Learning: The Library's Role in Ensuring Access
to Everyone." Library Hi Tech. v20 n4 p420-32 2002.
Discusses the increasing number of student with disabilities that are attending
higher education institutions and participating in distance learning programs,
focusing on the role that libraries can play in assuring access to electronic
resources. Highlights include the digital divide; legal issues; universal design;
accessible design; and standards for accessible electronic resources. (Contains
52 references.) (Author/LRW)
Burgstahler, S. (2001). Real Connections: Making Distance Learning Accessible
to Everyone. Washington: 10.
This report discusses access issues related to distance learning for individuals
with disabilities and presents design considerations for assuring that a course
is accessible to potential instructors and students with a wide range of disabilities.
The field of universal design provides a framework for this discussion. It begins
by describing examples of access challenges faced by students and instructors
with different disabilities in typical distance learning courses. Challenges
faced by students with blindness, visual impairments, specific learning disabilities,
mobility impairments, hearing impairments, speech impairments, and seizure disorders
are discussed. The concept of universal design is then introduced and strategies
are provided for making distance learning courses accessible to everyone. Strategies
are provided for on-site instruction, Internet-based communication, Web pages,
printed materials, video presentations, and telephone conferences. The benefits
of accessible design for people without disabilities are also explored. A list
of 21 additional Web-based resources is provided. (CR)
Burgstahler, S. (2001). Universal Design of Instruction. Washington: 6.
This brief discusses how faculty can use principles of universal design to maximize
the learning of all college students, including students with disabilities.
Principles of universal design are first explained, including: equitable use,
flexibility in use, simple and intuitive use, perceptible information, tolerance
for error, low physical effort, and size and space for approach and use. The
brief then lists examples of instructional methods that employ principles of
universal design and make course content and activities accessible to people
with a wide range of abilities: (1) inclusiveness, which creates a classroom
environment that respects and values diversity; (2) physical access, which assures
that classrooms, labs, and field work are accessible to individuals with a wide
range of physical abilities and disabilities; (3) delivery methods and alternate
delivery methods, which includes lecture, discussion, hands-on activities, Internet-based
interaction, and field work; (4) information access, which uses captioned videotapes;
(5) interaction, which encourages different ways for students to interact with
each other and faculty; (6) feedback, which provides effective prompting during
an activity and feedback after the assignment is complete; and (7) demonstration
of knowledge, which provides multiple ways for students to demonstrate knowledge.
A list of 17 resources on universal design is provided. (CR)
Burgstahler, S. (2002). Bridging the Digital Divide in Postsecondary Education:
Technology Access for Youth with Disabilities. Information Brief. Minnesota:
6.
This issue brief discusses the barriers to technological access for students
with disabilities. Challenges for bridging the digital divide are discussed
and the following recommendations are provided: (1) stakeholders should have
access to training so they can design and select accessible facilities, utilize
computers and software, purchase appropriate assistive technology, and ensure
that students with disabilities use technology for their maximum benefit; (2)
policies and procedures should be established at all academic levels to ensure
that universal accessibility is considered when electronic and information technology
is procured; (3) policies, procedures, training, and support should be established
at all educational levels to ensure that Web page, library resource, and distance
learning program developers make their electronic resources accessible to everyone;
(4) interagency collaboration planning, funding, selecting, and supporting assistive
technology should be fostered; (5) students with disabilities should be included
at all stages of technology selection, support, and use, so that they learn
to self-advocate; (6) students with disabilities at high school and college
levels should participate in internships where they can practice using technology
in work settings; and (7) policy makers should disseminate information about
current laws, policies, and resources that are universally designed to meet
the needs of various stakeholders. (CR)
Burgstahler, S., D. Comden, et al. "Universal Design for Universal Access:
Making the Internet More Accessible for People with Disabilities." ALKI.
v13 n3 p8-9 Dec 1997.
Discusses how to enable library staff and patrons with disabilities to use the
resources of the Internet, including access to the computers themselves as well
as access to the electronic resources and tools that make up the Internet. Topics
include universal design; adaptive technology; and guidelines for accessible
Web pages. (LRW)
Burgstahler, S. and S. Nourse (2000). Accommodating Students with Disabilities
in Math and Science Classes: A Resource for Teachers [and Videotape]. Washington:
252.
This kit is designed to help science and mathematics teachers become more aware
of the rights, responsibilities, potential contribution, and needs of students
with disabilities, teachers' responsibilities for ensuring equal educational
opportunities for all students in their programs, and strategies for accommodating
students who have disabilities in science and math classes. Material includes
a notebook, a 2-hour videotape recording, and informational handouts and a pamphlet
on the DO-IT (Disabilities Opportunities Internetworking Technology) program.
The "Background and General Strategies" section of the notebook covers
general issues related to access to education for individuals with disabilities,
and legal and attitudinal issues as well as general teaching strategies. The
"Computing Access" section covers the three areas that must be addressed
in order to provide full access to computing resources (computer lab access,
provision of adaptive technology, and universal design of electronic resources).
The "Access to Math and Science" section provides strategies and examples
for making educational activities accessible to all students, including students
with disabilities. A list of general resources and a glossary on disability
issues relevant to science and mathematics instruction are also included, along
with reproducible handouts and overhead transparency templates. The videotape
demonstrates how technology can be used to make instruction accessible. (CR)
Burkhalter, B. B. and A. M. Kartis "Planning the Recreational-Educational
Complex of the Alabama Space and Rocket Center." CEFP Journal. v21 n1
p13-15 Jan-Feb 1983.
Planning for the Alabama Space and Rocket Center's new recreational-educational
complex included (1) goal establishment, (2) needs assessment (including accessibility
for the disabled), (3) environmental impact analysis, (4) formulation of objectives
and priorities, and (5) strategy development to meet objectives, as well as
preparation of a master plan. (RW)
Burnett, M. and P. Allenbaugh (1984). Expanding the Respiratory Therapy Curriculum.
Final Report. Washington: 63.
This project was conducted to upgrade Seattle Central Community College's four-quarter
respiratory care program to a two-year associate degree program in respiratory
therapy. The program needed to include a developmental pathway for entry of
nontraditional students and also a college-level prerequisite entry pathway
for traditional students. In developing the core curriculum, the following major
sources of information were used: (1) the Joint Review Committee for Respiratory
Care Education (JRCRTE), which also accredits these programs; the National Board
for Respiratory Care composite examination matrix for their entry-level and
advanced practitioner credentialing examinations; and (3) interviews and discussion
with the Respiratory Technician Advisory Board and other leaders in respiratory
care. The result of this project is an associate-degree level respiratory care
curriculum that addresses two concerns: first, accessibility and successful
completion of the program to and by nontraditional students who lack sufficient
academic background, and second, the local health industry's demand for qualified
entry-level practitioners in respiratory care. The curriculum plan uses lecture/discussions,
laboratory experiences, and clinical settings. Along with traditional audiovisual
materials used in allied health education, the program incorporates computer-assisted
instruction modules into both the lecture and laboratory portions of the curriculum.
This curriculum will make health careers available to a much larger segment
of the college's student population and enable them to compete more effectively
in the job market. (Program descriptions and course outlines are included in
this report.) (KC)
Burnette, J. (1990). Assistive Technology Design in Special Education. Issue
Brief 2. Virginia: 34.
The issue brief discusses technological principles, issues, and design features
discovered or used by projects funded by the Office of Special Education Programs
(OSEP). Information was obtained from interviews with project directors who
were asked about their project experiences, the features and design principles
essential to the success of their projects, the problems they encountered, and
how these problems could be resolved. After a brief discussion of technology
transfer, information is presented according to three major stages in assistive
technology development: designing to fit user needs; prototype development,
testing, and evaluation; and distribution. Key features of 10 projects contributing
to the report are summarized in tabular form and include information on project
director and organization, grant or contract period, prototype educational aid,
function, functional limitations, and features. An appendix charts accessibility
features in relation to user characteristics (such as physical impairments,
visual impairments, hearing impairments, or seizure disorders) as well as features
to facilitate third party manufacturers for all five disability areas. Name,
address, and telephone number of five current OSEP projects promoting the use
of assistive technology are also appended. Twenty-eight additional resources
are suggested. (DB)
Burns and Roe. and United States. Office of Saline Water. Distillation Division.
(1969). Universal design. Washington, U.S. Office of Saline Water ; for
sale by the Supt. of Docs. U.S. Govt. Print. Off.
Bush, M. D. "Connecting Instructional Design to International Standards
for Content Reusability." Educational Technology. v42 n6 p5-13 Nov-Dec
2002.
Discusses the development of instructional technology standards. Topics include
development efforts for electronic learning standards; SCORM (Sharable Content
Object Reference Model), including accessibility, interoperability, durability,
and reusability; electronic learning standards at Brigham Young University (Utah);
instructional design and reusability standards; and benefits of the instructional
design to SCORM connection. (LRW)
Bustos, P. D. "Teen-Age Pregnancies: Can We Afford Not To Prevent Them?"
State Legislative Report. v12 n10 Dec 1987: 14.
This document reviews three teenage pregnancy prevention strategies which were
selected because of their easy access to teenagers and to illustrate the cost
of implementation. After a discussion of the high cost of teenage pregnancy,
the role of the state legislatures is described. Accessibility and acceptability
are cited as two important considerations for legislatures considering programs.
Schools are noted to be good places to start prevention activities since they
provide a captive audience. The three prevention strategies discussed are family
life education, school-based health clinics, and community-based prevention
programs. A specific example of each is provided. Policy implications of each
type are discussed. Evaluations of each type of program in the areas of cost,
accessibility to at-risk teenagers, and expected impact are described; a table
provides ratings of the three program types. References are included. (ABL)
Butin, D. (2000). Classrooms. District of Columbia: 5.
This paper addresses classroom design trends and the key issues schools should
consider for better classroom space flexibility and adaptability. Classroom
space design issues when schools embrace technology are discussed, as are design
considerations when rooms must accommodate different grade levels, the importance
of lighting, furniture considerations, and classroom size ratios and partition
arrangement. Final comments highlight classroom design principles that are considered
important for all classrooms at all grade levels, such as outdoor accessibility,
clustering, the fostering of creativity and student engagement, and classroom
adaptability. (Contains 19 references.) (GR)
Butler, R. P. (1997). The Development and Demise of 8 MM Film Loops in America.
Virginia: 7.
Educators in the late 1960s and early 1970s found that 8 mm film loop cartridges
encouraged learning techniques such as self-tutorials, individualized instruction,
and small-group participation. The single concept approach used in the production
of most 8 mm cartridges contributed to alternative learning strategies in these
settings. The simplicity of the equipment, its portability, indestructibility,
and low cost added to its popularity. Standard and Super 8 mm film loops and
cartridge projectors were compared to books in terms of accessibility and were
a strong promoter of visual communication. For all this, however, they remained
only a short time on the educational scene. Lack of standardization and versatility,
plus a number of economic and social issues, translated into early extinction
for this non-print medium. For example, an analysis of gender in 68 film loops
revealed that it was possible to find a male in a "feminine" role
or in a more neutral role; however, while women, too, were portrayed in gendered
roles as well as in neutral roles, no women were found in subject areas seen
as masculine. These perceptions reflect the times in which the film loops were
created and produced: an era in which the gender gap was only beginning to decline.
Regardless of their short life span, the existence of the 8 mm film loops on
the audiovisual scene makes them a part of educational technology history. (Contains
40 references.) (AEF)
Byers, R. "The Dearing Review of the National Curriculum." British
Journal of Special Education. v21 n3 p92-96 Sep 1994.
This article summarizes and evaluates changes in the British national curriculum
resulting from the Dearing review, with special emphasis on effects on students
with special needs. Major issues and changes in each subject area are identified.
The article sees increased accessibility for students with disabilities but
remaining problems in some subject areas, especially English. (DB)
California Community Colleges Sacramento. Academic Senate.[BBB22251] (1990).
Standards for Accreditation. California: 23.
The standards for accreditation presented in this paper were developed by the
Accrediting Commission for Community and Junior Colleges to measure basic characteristics
of quality required of all accredited institutions. The accreditation standards
are divided into eight areas. Standard one discusses institutional integrity:
purposes; planning; and effectiveness. Standard two discusses educational programs:
general requirements; articulation; curriculum planning and evaluation; and
credit and non-credit courses. Specific topics under standard three are student
services and co-curricular learning environments, which are discussed in terms
of general provisions, counseling services, admissions and records, coordination
and administration, and the comprehensiveness of services. Provisions for faculty
and staff in the areas of selection, qualifications, evaluation, staff development,
and other personnel policies are the focus of standard four. Standard five discusses
various aspects of learning resources, including collection development, accessibility,
faculty and staff, and general provisions. Standard six concerns physical resources,
such as facilities, equipment, facilities planning, and financial resources.
The final standard covers aspects of governance and administration, including
the governing board, administrative services, faculty, support staff, and students.
Supporting documentation is listed for each standard. (JMC)
California Community Colleges Sacramento. Office of the Chancellor.[BBB04341]
(1979). Report to the Legislature, Assembly Ways and Means Subcommittee #2,
as Recommended in Supplemental Language to the 1979 Budget Act (Item 362.1),
Evaluating the Role of the California Community Colleges in Meeting the Need
for Bilingual Teachers in California. California: 15.
In recognition of the critical need for bilingual teachers and in the belief
that bilingual teachers can be most efficiently recruited and trained in the
community college, the Chancellor's Office of the California Community Colleges
has developed several recommendations for a career ladder transfer program in
bilingual education. The first of these recommendations calls for merging the
two state-supported bilingual training programs--the Bilingual Teacher Corps
and the Bilingual Crosscultural Teacher Development Grant Program--to form a
single Bilingual Teacher Grant (BTG) Program. The community colleges were selected
as the most appropriate institutions to implement the program because of their
accessibility to potential bilingual teachers, closeness to the local community,
and experience in working effectively with local districts and community leaders.
The Chancellor's Office recommends that in selecting recipients for the Bilingual
Teacher Grants, factors such as bilinguality, teacher aide and community experience,
and financial need be taken into account. Additional recommendations relate
to: (1) strong central program direction housed in the Office of the Chancellor;
(2) the expansion of current efforts in recruiting and training until the need
for bilingual teachers is met; and (3) not using Extended Opportunity Programs
and Services funds. (AYC)
California Community Colleges Sacramento. Office of the Chancellor.[BBB04341]
(2000). TECHnology// Strategic Plan, 2000-2005. California: 33.
This strategic plan provides a broad template of strategies for improving and
strengthening technology throughout the California Community College system.
Challenges facing California community colleges today include an increased enrollment
demand; the explosive use of the Internet and computers as a required occupational
and citizenship skill; the digital divide; an increased demand for the integration
of technology in teaching; the sustainability of technology infrastructure;
the need for adequate levels of intra-campus and inter-campus connectivity;
and the need to provide accessibility for persons with disabilities. This plan
focuses on two major goals: (1) promoting student access to community colleges,
instruction, and student support services; and (2) promoting students' success
in their educational and career goals. The colleges will use technology to enable
students and communities to be successful in a knowledge-based society by providing
universal access to quality learning. Current investment in technology is insufficient
to meet these goals. The colleges require a substantial infusion of funds to
meet the growing technological needs of students, faculty, and staff. This plan
would provide additional resources into the system's base each year for 5 years.
The funding of this plan would involve a collaborative effort of the state and
the private sector. (KP)
California State and Consumer Services Agency Sacramento. Office of Statewide
Compliance Coordination.[BBB21258] (1981). Index of Federal Regulations and
Court Cases on the Implementation of Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of
1973. California: 247.
This index is divided into two sections: an Index on Federal Regulations and
an Abstracts section of Court Cases and Administrative Decisions. Section 1
provides a topic index and comparison of contents and coverage of 16 federal
departments with regulations established as of August 1981. Presented in tabular
form, this index shows major topics and subtopics; in alphabetical order, names
of each federal department whose regulations are cited; Federal Register volume
numbers, dates, and Codes of Federal Regulations; specific regulation sections
or "part numbers"; and "subpart numbers." Seven topics are
covered: Administrative Requirements; Assurances; Discrimination; Education
(all but postsecondary); Education--Postsecondary; Employment; Health, Welfare,
and Social Services; and Program Accessibility. An appendix lists federal departments
with regulations, guidelines, or requirements. Section 2 provides short summaries
of court cases (1976-81) and administrative decisions relating to discrimination
of persons with disabilities and to compliance with federal and state laws.
The format for administrative decisions is topic, plaintiff/defendant, court,
reference, and synopsis. Court cases are listed by eight topics: Administrative
Requirements, Complaints, Definition of Handicap, Discrimination, Education,
Employment, Institution vs. Community Placement, and Transportation. Cases within
topics are listed in chronological order. Other information provided includes
the plaintiff/defendant, court, reference, and synopsis. A glossary is appended.
(YLB)
California State Legislature Sacramento. Joint Committee on the Master Plan
for Higher Education.[BBB07402] (1973). Draft: Report of the Joint Committee
on the Master Plan for Higher Education: 125.
To enable California higher education to realize its major purpose of responding
to the learning needs of California citizens and society, the Joint Committee
on the Master Plan for Higher Education finds the following objectives critical
for planning in the next decade: (1) academic freedom and responsibility; (2)
equal and universal accessibility for persons of both sexes and all races, ancestries,
incomes, ages, and geographies; (3) lifelong learning opportunities for persons
with capacity and motivation to benefit; (4) diversity of institutions, services
and methods; (5) flexibility to adapt to the changing needs of students and
society; (6) cooperation between institutions in assessing area educational
needs and resources, and meeting those needs; (7) involvement with local communities
in providing educational services and utilizing community resources in the educational
process; (8) increased understanding of the learning process to be sought and
applied throughout higher education; (9) discovery of qualitative and quantitative
evaluation methods for learning, research and teaching; and (10) accountability
throughout higher education. Thus, this document presents recommendations for
the master plan of higher education in California in keeping with these objectives.
(HS)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1991).
Approval of Las Positas College in Livermore: A Report to the Governor and Legislature
on the Development of Las Positas College (Formerly the Livermore Education
Center of Chabot College). California: 122.
The Livermore Education Center (LEC), an off-campus center of Chabot College,
was established in 1975. In 1986, the South County Community College District
designated the LEC a full-service community college campus eligible for state
funding of facilities, and in 1988, the Board of Governors of the California
Community Colleges approved Las Positas College (LPC) as the 107th college of
the system. Although the college was built entirely with local funds, to receive
state funds for capital expansion, the California Postsecondary Education Commission
(CPEC) must formally review plans for the college, just as it reviews proposals
and plans for new college campuses. This report constitutes CPEC's review of
plans for LPC and its approval of the college within the California Community
College System, making it eligible for state capital outlay funding as of the
1991-92 fiscal year. After part 1 reviews CPEC's conclusions and recommendations,
part 2 describes CPEC's involvement in the college planning process and the
history of the proposal for Las Positas College. Part 3 reviews the following
aspects of the Las Positas proposal: adequate funding projections; alternatives
to new campuses or off-campus centers; serving the disadvantaged; geographic
and physical accessibility; environmental and social impact; effects on other
institutions; academic planning and program justification; and consideration
of needed funding which includes projected capital outlay projects for LPC from
1990-91 through 1994-95. Appendixes include CPEC guidelines and procedures for
the review of new campuses and off-campus centers; a history of LEC and LPC;
and a copy of the LPC master plan educational program. (PAA)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1992).
Approval of the Lemoore Center of the West Hills Community College District.
A Report to the Governor and Legislature in Response to a Request from the Board
of Governors to Recognize the Center as the Official Community College Center
for the Lemoore/Hanford Area of Kings County. California: 35.
The Lemoore Center of the West Hills Community College District serves the Lemoore/Hanford
area of Kings and Fresno Counties--an area lying within both the West Hills
and the College of the Sequoias Community College Districts. Jurisdictional
problems between the districts prompted the Board of Governors of the California
Community Colleges to grant permanent educational center status to the Lemoore
operation. In May 1991, the Board agreed that the best solution was to recognize
the Lemoore Center officially, for three reasons: (1) the center is already
built and offers a wide range of programs; (2) it qualifies for educational
center status, given its enrollment is in excess of 700 average daily attendance
(ADA); and (3) a decision to locate a permanent center in Hanford would have
a deleterious effect on the financial viability of the West Hills District.
The report presents the eight criteria the Postsecondary Education Commission
uses to evaluate all center proposals and describes how the Lemoore facility
satisfied these criteria: enrollment projections, alternatives to new campuses
or off-campus centers, serving the disadvantaged, geographic and physical accessibility,
environmental and social impact, effects on other institutions, academic planning
and program justification, and consideration of needed funding. Appended in
this report are the Guidelines for Review of Proposed Campuses and Off-Campus
Centers (1990 Edition). (VWC)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1992).
Proposed Construction of Folsom Lake College in the Los Rios Community College
District. A Report to the Governor and Legislature in Response to a Request
from the Chancellor's Office of the California Community Colleges. California:
88.
In this report, the California Postsecondary Educational Commission responds
to a request by the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges that it
review a proposal for a new community college--Folsom Lake College in Sacramento
County within the Los Rios Community College District. The Commission offers
eight conclusions and two recommendations, based on criteria adopted in its
recently revised Guidelines for Review of Proposed University Campuses, Community
Colleges, and Educational Centers (1992). The criteria are: enrollment projections,
alternatives, serving the disadvantaged, academic planning, accessibility, effects
on other institutions, environmental impact, and economic efficiency. The Commission
recommends to the Governor and Legislature: (1) that Folsom Lake College be
approved as the fourth college of the Los Rios Community College District and
the 108th college within the California Community Colleges system; and (2) that
Folsom Lake College become eligible for State capital outlay funding as of the
1993-94 fiscal year. Appended in this report are the Los Rios Community College
District Mission Statement, Goals, Planning Assumptions, and Implications; the
Board of Governors' Agenda Item 17, September 10-11, 1992; the Preliminary Capital
Outlay Cost Estimate for On-Site Development at Folsom Lake College; and Letters
of Support for Folsom Lake College. Contains 24 references. (VWC)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1992).
Proposed Construction of the Lompoc Valley Center in the Allan Hancock Joint
Community College District. A Report to the Governor and Legislature in Response
to a Request from the Chancellor's Office of the California Community Colleges.
California: 56.
The Allan Hancock Joint Community College District proposes establishing a permanent
educational center in the Lompoc area of Santa Barbara County, primarily to
consolidate its current outreach operations in the area but also to accommodate
anticipated enrollment growth in the area. Donated by the United States Army,
the 155-acre site will be given by the City of Lompoc to the Allan Hancock District.
The California Postsecondary Education Commission bases its eight conclusions
and two recommendations on its recently revised Guidelines for Review of Proposed
University Campuses, Community Colleges, and Educational Centers (1992c), which
require an analysis of enrollment projections, alternatives, serving the disadvantaged,
academic planning, accessibility, effects on other institutions, environmental
impact, and economic efficiency. The Commission has concluded that the proposal
satisfies all criteria for approval, and thus it offers two recommendations
in the report: (1) the Lompoc Valley Center should be approved as an educational
center of the Allan Hancock Joint Community College District; and (2) the Lompoc
Valley Center should become eligible for State capital outlay funding as of
the 1993-94 fiscal year. Appended in this report are the Board of Governors'
Agenda Item 17, September 10-11, 1992; and Letters of Support for the Lompoc
Valley Center. Contains 14 references. (VWC)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1993).
Proposed Construction of the Madera County Educational Center in the State Center
Community College District. A Report to the Governor and Legislature in Response
to a Request from the Board of Governors of the California Community Colleges.
California: 98.
In this report, the California Postsecondary Education Commission responds to
a request by the Chancellor of the California Community Colleges to review the
need for and location of a new educational center, the Madera County Educational
Center, north of Fresno within the State Center Community College District.
The report contains nine conclusions made by the Commission regarding enrollment
projections, alternatives, serving the disadvantaged, academic planning, funding
projections, accessibility, effects on other institutions, environmental impact,
and economic efficiency. It makes four recommendations regarding the proposed
center: (1) the Madera County Educational Center should be approved as an educational
center of the State Center Community College District, (2) the Madera County
Educational Center should become eligible for State capital outlay funding as
of the 1994-95 fiscal year, (3) the State Center Community College District
should provide the Commission with a copy of the Final Environmental Impact
Report upon its completion, and (4) should the State Center Community College
District propose to convert the Madera County Educational Center to a full service
community college, it should submit a request for that conversion to the Commission.
Part 1 presents conclusions and recommendations, Part 2 discusses the background
to the proposal, and Part 3 presents an analysis of the proposal. This report
contains five appendices and 17 references. (VWC)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1999).
Recommendations on Strategies To Enhance the Delivery of Health Care to All
Californians. The Commission's Response to Senate Concurrent Resolution 23.
Commission Report 99-1. California: 33.
This report responds to a California Senate directive to the state's postsecondary
education commission to examine the extent to which health care is accessible
and equitably distributed throughout the state. The Commission, in conjunction
with several state agencies and the University of California, conducted an analysis
and offered 11 recommendations to achieve the policy goal of access to medical
care for all California residents and communities. Recommendations emphasize
the link between educational experiences and the supply and choice of physicians.
Introductory material describes the collaborative process of the study and the
context for the Commission's recommendations and is based on equity as the fundamental
Commission principle. The recommendations on expanding accessibility of health
care are grouped into six categories: (1) precollege strategies; (2) undergraduate
education; (3) admission to medical school; (4) medical school; (5) transition
to practice; and (6) evidence of effectiveness. Appended are the text of the
Senate resolution authorizing the investigation and an executive summary which
groups recommendations into those for the short-term, mid-term, and long-term.
(DB)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (1999).
Review of the Proposed San Ramon Valley Center of the Contra Costa Community
College District. Higher Education Update. California: 10.
The report evaluates a proposed San Ramon Valley Center community college and
responds to California legislative requirements that the California Postsecondary
Education Commission (CPEC) advise the legislature and governor regarding new
institutions and campuses of public higher education. The report concludes that
the San Ramon Valley Center should be approved as a permanent educational center,
and that it should become eligible to compete for capital outlay funding beginning
with the 1999-2000 fiscal year. Issues addressed include enrollment projections
(6,000 students when completed); consideration of alternatives (such as expansion
or increased utilization of existing institutions); the proposed institution's
ability to serve disadvantaged students; academic planning; geographic and physical
accessibility; effects on other institutions; environmental impact; and economic
efficiency. Individual sections discuss the Commission's role in the review
of new campuses and centers; improving the efficiency of CPEC reviews; history
of the proposal; a review of the Commission's criteria; and conclusions and
recommendations. (DB)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (2000).
Moving California Ahead: An Executive Summary Concerning Two Commission Higher
Education Long-Range Planning Reports, Providing for Progress and Policy for
Progress. California: 27.
This is an executive summary of two long-range higher education planning reports
completed at the outset of the 21st century by the California Postsecondary
Education Commission. They are "Providing for Progress: California Higher
Education Enrollment Demand and Resources into the 21st Century" and the
companion "Policy for Progress: Reaffirming California Higher Education
Accessibility, Affordability, and Accountability into the 21st Century."
This document draws upon these reports and their respective resources, collecting
the major conclusions and recommendations of both to address: California's continued
burgeoning growth in higher education enrollment demand and the state's ability
to respond; economic trends that will affect both the ability to finance higher
education growth and the types of learning and training opportunities offered;
how to retain educational excellence while maintaining access for an increasingly
diverse student body; and the growing importance of technology in the classroom
and education environment. Specific topics covered in this report include a
discussion of present and past long-range planning reports, factors influencing
the future of California higher education, enrollment projections and capacity,
capital outlay costs, economic and fiscal forecasts, and three sets of recommendations:
for elected officials and policymakers, for higher education leaders, and for
postsecondary oversight agencies. (SM)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (2000).
Policy for Progress: Reaffirming California Higher Education Accessibility,
Affordability, and Accountability into the 21st Century. Commission Report.
California: 59.
Released in April 2000, this report is one of a series of publications issued
by the California Postsecondary Education Commission as part of its planning
and coordinating responsibilities. Intended to address the needs of elected
officials, educators, and governing bodies, the report discusses California's
complex higher education issues in the context of increased enrollment projections,
diversity, and institutional accountability. California's institutions of higher
education will be expected to enroll approximately 715,000 additional students
by the end of the decade, an increase that poses a challenge to the system.
This challenge is addressed by the more than 40 recommendations stated in the
commission's report. Facilities improvement is a highlighted issue. Other factors
include demographic shifts within the state that will lead to increased diversity;
technology's presence within the economy and in education; and the relationship
between the economy and public education. Recommendations focus on each of three
audiences: 1) policy makers and government bodies, 2) leaders in higher education,
and 3) the Commission and other coordinating entities. Education access, affordability,
and accountability comprise the major topical areas of the recommendations.
(HB)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (2001).
Needs Analysis for the Chaffey Community College District Fontana Center: A
Report to the Governor and Legislature in Response to a Request from the Board
of Governors of the California Community Colleges. Commission Report. California:
70.
This is a proposal by Chaffey Community College District (CCCD) (California)
to convert an existing off-campus operation in Fontana, California, to an educational
center. The center would provide services to 1,529 full-time-equivalent students
by the year 2010, and would provide greater access to opportunities in higher
education for an underserved population in San Bernardino County. Community
college attendance rates would be improved throughout the region. The California
Postsecondary Education Commission responds that CCCD's proposal meets review
criteria for the new educational center, and that state legislature is recommended
to authorize its development. Background is provided on the role of the commission
in the reviewing of proposals such as this, along with some history of the need
for the proposal in the first place. CCCD provides demographic information on
itself and discusses the area of the new Fontana site in geographical context.
Racial and ethnic backgrounds of the surrounding populations are listed. The
final section of the report addresses the review process taken on by the commission
for the proposal. Enrollment projections, programmatic alternatives, service
to the disadvantaged, academic planning and program justification, consideration
for the need for funding, consideration of alternative sites, geographic and
physical accessibility, environmental and social impact, effects on other institutions,
and economic impact are all taken into consideration. Several maps are included.
Appended are guidelines for review of proposed university campuses, community
colleges, and educational centers, and various forms and letters. (CJW)
California State Postsecondary Education Commission Sacramento.[BBB12341] (2003).
Reviewing the Community Learning Center: An Educational Center of the MiraCosta
Community College District. A Report to the Governor and Legislature in Response
to a Request from the Board of Governors of the California Community Colleges.
Commission Report. California: 82.
This report from the California Postsecondary Education Commission considers
the request by the Governors of the California Community Colleges and the MiraCosta
Community College District (MCCD) to secure approval for the Community Learning
Center in Oceanside. The MCCD serves a traditionally affluent, white region
that has recently become far more diverse, with strong immigration from Central
and South America and many Asian nations. As a result, many adults in the region
are deficient in English language skills. Most of the ESL classes in the region
were originally offered at the Adult Learning Center in Oceanside. The facility,
with enrollment approaching 5,000 students, became overcrowded, and the perception
grew that it was substandard. The first phase of the Community Learning Center
construction project is complete. The cost for the final phase will be between
$5-8 million, with funds coming from the state. The project criteria examined
by the Commission include: (1) description and overview; (2) enrollment projections;
(3) alternatives; (4) academic planning and program justification; (5) student
services and outreach; (6) support and capital outlay; (7) geographic and physical
accessibility; (8) effects on other institutions; (9) environmental impact;
and (10) economic efficiency. The Commission concluded that the Center should
be approved. (Contains 11 references.) (Author)
Callon, G. D. (1996). Programmatic Reform: The Care and Feeding of a Mathematics
Major. Indiana: 6.
This paper, written for those in higher education mathematics departments, reviews
curriculum reform. Three major reasons for programmatic reform are outlined:
(1) higher education faces a changing climate; (2) higher education faces a
challenging clientele; and (3) mathematics educators face a changing content.
The case is made for programmatic review and reform based on five fundamental
operating principles that include active learning, accessibility, applicability,
assessment, and accountability. (MM)
Cambre, M. A. (1987). A Reappraisal of Instructional Television. An Information
Analysis Product. New York: 60.
This reappraisal of the situation of instructional television (ITV) in education
begins by defining the field, providing background information, describing the
various roles that ITV can fill, and discussing the structure of ITV as a profession.
Various aspects of ITV use are then discussed in the context of: (1) national
use statistics on ITV accessibility, ITV use, barriers to use, and training
teachers in its use; (2) data on budget support, personnel, administrative encouragement
of ITV use, and changes in ITV accessibility; and (3) qualitative data on equipment,
programming, and support systems for ITV. An examination of research and evaluation
which considers three types of inquiry--basic research, formative evaluation,
and impact studies--is followed by a discussion of ITV issues and futures in
the areas of research and development, design, production, distribution, promotion,
use, and measurement and evaluation. The report concludes with a discussion
of factors critical to the present and future of ITV. Eight figures and three
tables are included. (54 references) (MES)
Camerin, E. M. (1998). The Effects of Facility Design and Equipment Acquisition
on Curriculum Offered in Preschool Centers. Florida: 266.
This descriptive study surveyed directors/education coordinators, lead teachers,
and parents to identify the effects of facility design and equipment acquisition
on the curriculum offered in preschool centers. Study results indicate that
the components of facility design had varying degrees of effect on the curriculum
offered. Components such as material accessibility, toileting facilities adapted
to the child's size, storage areas for toys, low windows, and the size of indoor
and outdoor play areas are cited as examples. The components of equipment acquisition
that had a very great affect on the curriculum offered were buying child-sized
furniture and equipment, acquiring a variety of equipment and materials, and
having age-appropriate equipment. Head Start teachers and education coordinators
possessed greater awareness of the effects of facility design and equipment
acquisition on the curriculum. Recommendations are submitted for increasing
stakeholder's awareness levels of the impact of facility design and equipment
on the preschool curriculum. (Contains 41 references.) (GR)
Cameron, J. R. "Accessibility to Literature through Oral Performance."
English Education. v13 n1 p3-9 Feb 1981.
Proposes a greater emphasis on the oral expression of literature in English
classrooms and English teacher education curricula. Examines the three main
oral problems encountered by students--persona, emphasis, and pace. (RL)
Campbell, C., J. Harvey, et al. (2002). Philanthropic Due Diligence: Exploratory
Case Studies To Improve Investments in Urban Schools. Washington: 43.
This paper is designed to help funders avoid some of the pitfalls of embarking
on major reform efforts in troubled urban districts, proposing exploratory case
studies as a tool to improve philanthropic giving. The paper explains what is
behind the two major flaws of philanthropic investment (not knowing how one
thinks schools will improve and not knowing who one is working with). It also
describes exploratory case study methodology, focusing on the analysis, criteria
for judging a theory of change, and due diligence regarding investing in the
reform of urban school systems. Two examples of this methodology in action are
presented. The San Diego, California case focuses on intensive professional
development in a centralized reform. The Denver, Colorado case examines how
an over-reaching board threatens fragile reform. For each example, the paper
notes how funders can use the information. The paper concludes by describing
several advantages of the exploratory case study method, including its accessibility,
that it contains rich information, can point out gaps in strategies and build
contacts, and that it allows the reader to see the whole picture. Three appendices
contain exploratory case study methods, exploratory case study of San Diego,
and other areas for funders to investigate. (SM)
Campbell, M. B. "Finland's "Ammattikorkeakoulu": Pursuing World-Class
Higher Education." International Journal of Educational Reform. v6 n4
p407-11 Oct 1997.
Finland's efforts to develop parity between university and nonuniversity higher
education sectors are evident in its creation of 22 experimental "ammattikorkeakoulu"
(AMKs). These "polytechnics" are gaining increasing centrality in
European higher education systems, but have not increased accessibility for
women and lower socioeconomic groups. In Finland, AMK demand far exceeds supply.
Swedish and Finnish sectors have access, but not the Lapps and Gypsies. (13
references) (MLH)
Campbell, M. B. (1992). Non-University Sectors and the Provision of Higher Education
in OECD Countries: Problematics of Articulation. Ohio: 42.
This paper identifies issues currently arising in efforts to coordinate public
policy concerning competing sectors of postsecondary education in the Organisation
for Economic Cooperation and Development Countries (OECD). It is presented as
a result of the OECD's advisement that these industrialized countries need to
further strengthen education and training of the labor force. The issues center
on questions relative to student accessibility, emergence of a third sector
based largely on propriety education, and "the blurring of institutional
boundaries" between traditional non-university sectors coupled with the
trend toward vocationalism characteristic of new configurations of higher education
provision. It is noted that government-sanctioned public policies, not market
forces exclusively, should guide the formation of comprehensive and total post-secondary
provision, especially as the policies of industrialized countries center on
the articulation of competing sectors involved in little-noted realignments
of function and purpose. The database for the paper is composed of studies from
the following OECD countries: Australia, Austria, Canada, Finland, France, Western
Germany, Japan, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Sweden, the United Kingdom,
and the United States. (GLR)
Campbell, M. B. (1992). Sectoral Differentiation in British Higher Education:
Problematics of Mission in a Post-Binary System. Ohio: 20.
This paper addresses issues generated by the British government's decision to
abolish the binary division between university institutions of higher education
and other postsecondary institutions. Sectoralization of British higher education
in a post-binary system has created some problematics, two of which appear especially
noteworthy: (1) student accessibility to higher education provision; and (2)
the vocationalization of that provision. This essay presents the argument that
the coordination of contemporary revised higher education missions in Britain,
given concerns relative to student accessibility and vocationalization of higher
education programs, requires minimally public modes of sectoral regulation,
energized by other than market-responsive and privatized policies of institutional
development. Prior to these arguments there is a discussion of student accessibility
to British higher education within the context of the government - authored
"binary principle" of higher education provision. An appendix contains
a list of renamed binary polytechnics. (Contains 26 references.) (GLR)
Campbell, P. E. (1995). Integrating Curriculum: Enhancing Teacher Development
and Student Learning. Canada British Columbia: 23.
In 1992, Okanagan University College, in British Columbia (Canada), undertook
a project to develop and implement an integrated curriculum in four participating
health and human services programs. The project stemmed from findings in province-level
reports on curriculum integration and on needs for health and human services
programs. Specific project goals included developing a model of integration;
providing support for faculty to develop the curriculum; consulting with community
stakeholders; and creating a curriculum that promoted student development, maximized
interdisciplinary studies, maximized bridging and transferability, and improved
accessibility to learning. Phase 1 of the project identified common values of
the four participating programs, defined qualities of an exemplary health and
human service provider, developed themes of content and process for core curriculum,
identified common content clusters to be included in core curriculum, and reviewed
coring models. Phase 2 involved the development of a curriculum plan and organizational
model, seven courses and course outlines, an instructor's guide with learning
activities, and an evaluation plan to be used once the curriculum was implemented.
Finally, in September 1994, seven courses were implemented in phase 3. The implemented
curriculum plan represented a shift from the traditional competency-based learning
approach to a values-based approach, focusing on process as well as content,
and provided improved opportunities for teacher development and student learning.
A list of project participants is appended. Contains 23 references. (TGI)
Canadian Inst. for Adult Education Montreal (Quebec).[BBB00255] (1968). Les
Centres Residentiels (Residential Centers): 73.
Results of a survey of residential adult education in the Province of Quebec
are presented in this report. The existence of widespread financial difficulties
is documented, together with a frequent lack of adequate community services
and suitable facilities. Chapter I reviews the need of nonprofit groups for
residential facilities and indicates the extent of available human and material
resources. The next chapter is concerned with general features of residential
centers (educational services, administration, accessibility, nonprofit policy,
homelike environment), the role of residential centers, and the need for new
centers. Finally, in Chapter III, recommendations are laid down for the creation
of a new residential center, the maintenance and subsidizing of an existing
center (the Institut Cooperatif Desjardins), and provisions (under a special
independent committee) for coordinating the work of residential adult education
centers in Quebec and promoting their development. Included are ten tables (enrollment
data, facilities, programs, sponsorship), questionnaires, religious and secular
organizations surveyed, excerpts from the by-laws of L'Institut Canadien d'Education
des Adultes and its council and committee rosters. (ly)
Canadian Society for the Study of Higher Education.[BBB20392] (1984). The Canadian
Higher Education Research Network. A Proposal to the Secretary of State. Canada
Ontario: 33.
A network to facilitate research on postsecondary education in Canada is advocated
by the Canadian Society for the Study of Higher Education. The network will
link centers of specialization and individual researchers, and will use information
technology to produce and disseminate research findings and to enhance communications.
The network will contribute to the national objectives of federal programs that
support postsecondary education, including accessibility, opportunity, mobility,
employability, and official languages. Microcomputer conferencing will link
scholars, researchers, and practitioners. Network programs will include monographs
and discussion papers series, symposia, an electronic notice board, joint projects
with other countries, and occasional feasibility studies. As a research organization,
the network will have an independent board of directors and a small administrative
staff in Ottawa to coordinate research activities conducted nationwide. Technical
aspects of the network, including system and terminal requirements and cost
estimates, are summarized. Also included are statements of the objectives of
federal programs supporting postsecondary education, a list of possible monographs,
and a description of the background of the proposal and recommendations of higher
education groups. The April 26, 1985, announcement of the establishment of the
Canadian Higher Education Research Network (CHERN) is attached. (SW)
Cardenas, J. A. "High Technology and Equal Educational Opportunity. Parts
I and II." p1-2 Feb 1983. p1-3,6-7 Aug 1983: 9.
Part I of this two-part article on technology (specifically, computers) and
equal education points out three dangers which will increase the opportunity
gap between the haves and the have-nots in the United States: (1) the replacement
of educational equity by technology education as a national priority; (2) existing
differences in educational opportunity being exacerbated by disparities between
affluent and poor school districts and the impact of the disparities on the
ability to acquire technology; and (3) the differences in personal resources
between students from affluent homes and poverty homes and their personal ability
to acquire technology in the home. Part II deals with Computer Assisted Instruction
(CAI) for limited-English-speaking (LEP) populations who are commonly also minority,
economically disadvantaged students. An analysis of microcomputer utilization
in public schools reveals four categories of problems: (1) children in wealthier
school districts have at least twice as much accessibility to computers as do
children in poorer districts; (2) there is limited and inequitable participation
by special populations (the limited-English-speaking, minorities, and the economically
disadvantaged); (3) available software is inappropriate, culturally and instructionally,
for special populations; and (4) under these circumstances, there are few current
benefits for special populations. National and state policies that address these
points and that provide adequate funding can ensure that the new technology
will work to enhance eduational equity rather than preempt it. (CMG)
Carnagey, W. "Online Learning Environments: Gateway or Roadblock to Opportunity
for Learners with Disabilities." Journal of Instruction Delivery Systems.
v15 n4 p7-13 Fall 2001.
Examines the issue of accessibility in online learning environments (OLEs).
Presents characteristics of "differently-abled" learners. Examines
accessible and inaccessible elements of the learning environment. Presents relatively
quick and simple usability testing techniques. Explores reasons why developers
and providers should be concerned with accessibility issues. Lists additional
references, resources, and organizations. (AEF)
Carnine, D. "Bridging the Research-to-Practice Gap." Exceptional
Children. v63 n4 p513-21 Sum 1997.
This paper presents a rationale and suggestions for increasing the quality of
and demand for research findings as a vital component of educational improvement
efforts. Addresses issues of trustworthiness, useability, and accessibility
and suggests ways to nurture demand for research among influence producers,
knowledge producers, knowledge consumers, and regulation producers. (DB)
Carroll, S. E. (1990). Rural Education Problems: Current Status and Future Focus.
Louisiana: 78.
This literature survey examines rural problems and potential improvement strategies
that have emerged on the agendas of rural educators and policymakers. The report
discusses diverse rural conditions, demographic shifts, economic changes, technological
improvements in education, increased demand for reform in curriculum and classroom
management, teacher shortages, low educational attainment, financial support,
and current federal and state rural education policies. Historically, states
have taken responsibility for education, with the Federal Government acting
to insure equal opportunity and to disseminate new approaches. Rural people
are culturally diverse, but generally hold a relationship with the land and
natural resources. Population growth and composition affect the wealth of the
economy, career opportunities, tax collection and allocation, teacher availability,
and accessibility of potential partnerships. New demands on rural teachers are
high, and their retention poses a problem. Rural schools' curriculum and classroom
management have also been subject to change due to public pressures for reform.
The sparsity of rural population means education is more expensive than it is
elsewhere. Financial support for rural schools remains a problem, and rural
America continues to have a disproportionate share of educational deprivation.
Rural youth generally enter school later, they progress more slowly, and leave
earlier. Positive changes will not be possible unless governments and private
foundations address the fundamental problems and causes underlying these deficiencies.
The document concludes that rural educators must build on the strengths of diversity,
learn to use technology effectively, use community resources, and build effective
partnership programs. The document includes a bibliography with approximately
60 entries. (TES)
Carter, J. and M. Markel (2001). Web Accessibility for People With Disabilities:
An Introduction for Web Developers. IEEE Transactions on Professional Communication.
44: 225.
Focuses on the web access for people with disabilities. Benefits of making sites
accessible; Laws regarding web access; Efforts made by the vendors and professional
organization to encourage the accessibility.
Carter, M. T. (1997). Factors Affecting Use of E-Mail by Public School Principals
of the Central Appalachian Region. Tennessee: 159.
A survey of elementary, middle/junior high, and high school principals in central
Appalachia examined their use of e-mail and factors influencing that use. The
survey was sent to a stratified random sample of 620 principals in Kentucky,
Tennessee, Virginia, and West Virginia; 375 usable responses were received.
Respondents provided data on demographics, accessibility to hardware and software,
experience and training on computers and e-mail, uses of e-mail, and factors
influencing their use or non-use of e-mail. E-mail was used by 59.7 percent
of respondents. Predictors of e-mail usage were previous computer experience,
accessibility to resources, and training. There were no differences between
users and non-users with respect to gender, age, highest degree earned, or total
years of educational experience. Use of e-mail by superiors, fellow principals,
or teachers, and keyboarding skills were not indicators of e-mail usage. Principals
used e-mail primarily for administrative tasks and secondarily for accessing
and retrieving information. The primary methods for training in computer and
e-mail skills were self-teaching, local courses, conferences or workshops, spouses
or friends, colleagues, and on-site consultants. E-mail users had hardware and
software resources, training, support, and encouragement to use e-mail. Non-users
were uncomfortable with the technology. Principals must be role models for the
use of technology. E-mail has the potential to break down barriers of geographic
isolation and instill a sense of community. If future educational leaders are
to meet the challenges of an information age, colleges must provide instruction
in the use of computers and e-mail. Contains 92 references and the survey questionnaire.
(TD)
Cartnal, R. and P. F. Hagen (1999). Evaluation of the Early Alert Program, Spring
1999. California: 10.
This report evaluates the Early Alert program at Cuesta College (California).
The report is divided into four main sections: services accessed, accessibility,
actions taken as a result of receiving an Early Alert letter, and timing and
utility of the Early Alert program. These are followed by the demography of
the respondents, a brief background describing the Early Alert process, and
the survey instrument employed. The Early Alert Program was designed to notify
Cuesta College students of potential academic problems early in the semester.
Whereas in 1999 a larger proportion of respondents indicated having met with
their instructors than in 1998, smaller proportions of respondents in 1999 indicated
having used the various tutorial services and labs available than did respondents
in 1998. The percentage of respondents in 1999 who indicated that, as a result
of receiving an Early Alert letter, they had withdrawn from the course for which
the Early Alert was received rose 14.6 percentage points from 1998 to 1999.
Similarly, as a result of receiving an Early Alert letter, a larger percentage
of respondents "studied more" in 1999 than in 1998. However, in 1999
very few additional actions, such as seeking tutoring or joining study groups,
were taken compared with 1998. Finally, respondents indicated significantly
higher levels of satisfaction with both the timing of the receipt of the Early
Alert letter and the overall utility of the program. (VWC)
Casanova, U. "A Conversation with the Assistant Secretary for OERI."
Educational Researcher. v23 n6 p22-28 Aug-Sep 1994.
This interview with Assistant Secretary of Education for the Office of Educational
Research and Improvement (OERI) Sharon Robinson describes the new organization
of OERI and its new emphasis on accessibility and information dissemination.
It outlines plans for the agency and goals for educational research. (SLD)
Casebeer, L., N. Bennett, et al. "Physician Internet Medical Information
Seeking and On-line Continuing Education Use Patterns." Journal of Continuing
Education in the Health Professions. v22 n1 p33-42 Win 2002.
Responses from 2,200 physicians indicated that nearly all have Internet access
and use it primarily for medical information and professional development, not
for communicating with patients. Credibility of source, speed, accessibility,
and searching ease were most important. Barriers included information overload
and too little information specific to the question. (Contains 15 references.)
(SK)
Casey, C. (1999). Accessibility in the virtual library: Creating equal opportunity
Web sites. Information Technology & Libraries, American Library Association.
18: 22.
Discusses the need for libraries in the United States to provide not only equal
access for patrons to physical collections and equipment but to electronic resources
in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act. Web Accessibility Initiative;
Development of guidelines for building Web sites that are accessible to people
with disabilities; Accessibility of a Web site.
Cashdan, A. E. and E. E. Grugeon (1972). Language in Education: A Source Book:
254.
This collection of essays is concerned with the relationships between language
and education. It is intended to be used in an undergraduate course but may
also be used by many others interested in language in an educational context.
A variety of approaches to the subject are considered, including the philosophical,
psychological, sociological, linguistic, and literary. The readings have been
selected on the basis of their representativeness and accessibility in terms
of the main disciplines involved, their relevance to education in general and
their relevance to the students enrolled in this course. The book begins with
two essays by philosophers on the topics of language and society and the problems
of language usage. Subsequent parts of the book consider (1) language as system
and as behavior; (2) language and social reality; (3) social relationships and
language codes; (4) language in the classroom; (5) language acquisition; (6)
language deprivation and its educational implications; (7) language and values;
and (8) language and literature. (Author/DI)
Castro, C. d. M., A. Bernasconi, et al. (2001). Community Colleges: Is There
a Lesson in Them for Latin America? Sustainable Development Department Technical
Papers Series. District of Columbia: 27.
This paper explores the potential the North American community college model
holds for Latin America as a means of responding to the expansion of secondary
education in this region. The authors propose learning from, not imitating,
experiences found in North America and Europe and discuss how these lessons
may be of used to inform Latin American educational policy. The paper begins
with a brief introduction to the origins of the community college in the United
States and highlights a few of the defining characteristics of the community
college model: accessibility, accountability, social mobility, and economic
benefits for students. The second section of this paper provides a brief introduction
to postsecondary education in Latin America and then discusses how insights
gleaned from an analysis of the North American community college model might
be useful in shaping Latin American educational policy and institutions. The
authors conclude that the North American model of community colleges holds very
real potential to inspire Latin America to create a similar system tailored
to meet the unique demands and needs of the region. Appended is a summary of
key descriptive statistics for American community colleges. (Contains 22 references.)
(RC)
Castro, T. (1988). Child Care: Today's Challenge for Tomorrow. A Comprehensive
Plan for the Growth and Development of Child Care in the State of New Jersey.
New Jersey: 179.
New Jersey's first comprehensive plan for the development of child care services
is presented in this report. Section I offers an overview of contemporary issues
that are central to the provision of child care services. Issues include the
status of child care in New Jersey and the concerns raised by parents, advocates,
and providers in child care hearings and conferences, which began in 1984 and
will continue to 2000. Contents focus on availability, affordability, and accessibility
of services; quality of care; regulation and subsidization of the system; the
profession of child care; parental role and responsibilities; and ways to meet
the unique needs of families. Section II explains the seven findings and 43
recommendations which evolved from analysis of the material. Explicit strategies
for implementation are outlined whenever possible. Discussion follows the sequence
of issues presented in the first section. A child care plan fiscal summary for
fiscal year 1989 is included. Section III offers conclusions. A total of 36
references are cited. The glossary includes definition of terms. Graphs and
tables are appended. (RH)
Caudill Rowlett and Scott New York NY.[BBB01500] (1968). A Report on Six Seminars
to Assist in Planning a High Rise, High Density Urban Campus for Manhattan Community
College: 19.
The problem here was to create, on 4.5 acres of Lower Manhattan, a junior college
to meet the needs of 11,000 full- and part-time students and the urban community.
In 1968, educators, business leaders, politicians, architects, urban planners,
et al. attended six seminars. The following were considered the most important
aspects of the total problem. (1) There should be neither physical nor symbolic
barriers between campus and community, this outreach to include pre-admission
counseling, a search for both non-applicants and dropouts, continuing education
courses, local business contacts, field trips, and reciprocal arrangements with
neighborhood government agencies. (2) Programed instruction link-ups would make
practical the decentralized campus and the high-rise building. (3) Participant
sports (handball, swimming), rather than spectator, besides being healthful,
would strengthen the outreach philosophy. (4) A 24-hour Learning Center to accommodate
students' varied work and study hours would combine student union, library,
cafeteria, classroom, and enhance educational accessibility. (5) Experiments
in housing should be made to help sever the student's ties with his familiar
ghetto, e.g., rest cubicles, fresh-up rooms, or compulsory dormitories for underachievers.
(6) To become a part of the new "urban fabric," the college should
take advantage of its situation in the newly developing surroundings of housing,
commerce, parks, plazas, and parking and traffic patterns. (HH)
Cavanaugh, T. "The Need for Assistive Technology in Educational Technology."
Educational Technology Review. v10 n1 2002.
Addresses assistive technology concepts as they relate to education. Provides
an overview of the NCATE (National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education)
and ISTE (International Society for Technology in Education) guidelines concerning
assistive technology and proposes a model for a course concerning assistive
technology and universal design for instructional technology graduates. (Author/LRW)
Cavenaugh, D. N. (1977). Migrant Child Welfare: A State of the Field Study of
Child Welfare Services for Migrant Children and Their Families Who Are In-Stream,
Home Based, Or Settled-Out. Final Report, June 1977: 393.
The five parts of this report present the findings and recommendations of the
Migrant Child Welfare study. Part I briefly summarizes the impact of the child
welfare services and the family interview results, and reviews the organizational
structure of program delivery at the state and local levels. Part II synthesizes
the information obtained from 12 states according to public social service agencies,
child care, personal and environmental health, and education; gives an overview
of that service to migrant children; and describes Federal and state funding
sources which are, or can be, used to support child welfare efforts in each
service area. Also reported are an assessment of migrant children's needs and
the extent to which they are being met, a description of existing services which
address these needs, factors which affect service delivery (program implementation,
administrative structure, support, service coordination), and barriers of acceptability,
availability, and accessibility which impede service delivery. Part III discusses
the results of interviews conducted with migrant families concerning their use
and need for specific child welfare services. Presented in Part IV are detailed
summaries of the findings, with a description and discussion of the services
at the state and local levels. Part V includes discussions of the existence
of undocumented workers in the migrant stream and the need for advocacy of migrant
programs; the results of the survey on training farmworkers in service to migrants;
and two case studies which represent the best day care program and the worst
living conditions for migrant families. (NQ)
Caverly, D. C. and L. MacDonald "Techtalk: Access to Distance Education."
Journal of Developmental Education. v26 n1 p38-39 Fall 2002.
Argues that access to technology can be defined in two ways: (1) what students
don't have--the digital divide runs along ethnicity and income lines; and (2)
what is available, such as assistive technology for those with cognitive or
physical disabilities. Speculates on the future of accessibility. (Contains
25 references.) (AUTH/NB)
Cawley, J. F., T. E. Foley, et al. "Science and Students with Mild Disabilities:
Principles of Universal Design." Intervention in School and Clinic.
v38 n3 p160-71 Jan 2003.
This article proposes incorporating principles of universal design into elementary
school science programming. Advantages include increasing access to the general
education curriculum, enhancing student progress in science, and framing the
general education curriculum to make it more appropriate for students with disabilities.
Of five models of elementary school science reviewed, the multiple-option model
best utilizes principles of universal design. (Contains references.) (Author/DB)
Centre for Studies on Inclusive Education Bristol (England).[BBB32621] (1996).
Developing an Inclusive Policy for Your School. A CSIE Guide. United Kingdom
England: 30.
This guide is intended to help schools in the United Kingdom move toward greater
inclusion of students with disabilities or other special educational needs in
regular programs, with appropriate support. Following an introduction, which
encourages local education agencies (LEAs) to move towards "inclusive"
policies and practices, the first section notes legal requirements for educating
these students, including responsibilities of the LEAs, the governing body,
and the head teacher. Requirements of the Disability Discrimination Act are
summarized. The second section is an introduction to principles of inclusion,
with arguments supporting inclusion, a discussion of characteristics of inclusion,
and proposal of a social rather than medical model of disability. The third
section offers a framework for reviewing and re-writing a school's required
policy document on children with special educational needs and offers guidelines
for determining the school's current status, setting up a working party, evaluating
accessibility, and selecting language and terminology. The final section, on
compiling the policy, addresses how inclusive policy can be incorporated into
the 17 required components of the school's policy statement. Appendices summarize
inclusion issues, offer extracts from some school policy documents, and list
additional resources. (DB)
Century High School Rochester MN.[BBB35730] (1999). Century High School: Better
Than Accessible. Minnesota: 0.
A 6-minute videotape shows ways that one newly-built high school (Century High
School, Rochester, MN) accommodates the needs of people with disabilities. Various
building and room designs are detailed showing both poor and good design provisions.
The accessibility and usefulness of the auditorium control room, emergency exits,
elevators, science labs, and toilets are addressed. The videotape, a student
production, may serve as a starting place for discussions about how to design
buildings that better meet the local needs of people with disabilities. (GR)
Chalasinski, J. (1976). The Young Rural Generation in the Polish People's Republic:
Autobiographies, Personalities, Things and Events, Biography and History:
26.
Diaries of rural youth writing during the transformation period of the Polish
Peoples Republic (1950-1960's) were analyzed in terms of: individual autonomization
and historical processes; identification with the Polish Peoples Republic and
self-awareness (direct experience and historical awareness); youth and the revolutionary
spirit of romanticism; and occupation and ideology. Comparing the autobiographical
data (representative samples derived from some 5,500 diaries), the effect of
sociocultural development in the Polish Peoples Republic was analyzed. Among
the major findings were: the greatest transformations took place among the rural
poor where the people had advanced from the lowest of menial positions to a
position of intellectual contribution wherein work was more integrated with
the needs of the human personality; the events of the past (war and occupation)
had been regarded adversely by the youth, accounting for a loss of faith in
mankind, impatience re: social change, and preference for moral and romantic
orientations; the quest for an ideological superstructure based on occupation
was a pronounced feature in the diaries, but educational statistics indicated
limitations still imposed upon rural youth in that the quality and range of
schools of various types and their locations prevented full rural accessibility
to educational and occupational mobility. (JC)
Chandler, A. (1998). Supporting the Public Benefits of Public Higher Education.
Policy Statement. District of Columbia: 24.
This policy statement from the American Association of State Colleges and Universities
addresses the benefits of public higher education. Along with introductory and
concluding sections, the statement addresses access, academic quality, research
and public service, accountability, public financial support, and balanced governance.
The statement asserts that shifting the historic balance between public support
and individual tuition payments will lead to individual elitism and economic
divisiveness, while continuing public support will encourage the greater breadth
and quality of public higher education, greater accessibility, and continued
expansion of research and public service activities. (EV)
Chang, C.-K. (2002). Record Desktop Activity as Streaming Videos for Asynchronous,
Video-Based Collaborative Learning. Taiwan: 7.
As Web-based courses using videos have become popular in recent years, the issue
of managing audiovisual aids has become noteworthy. The contents of audiovisual
aids may include a lecture, an interview, a featurette, an experiment, etc.
The audiovisual aids of Web-based courses are transformed into the streaming
format that can make the quality of Internet-based videos acceptable to learners
using a limited bandwidth. Although streaming technique enables learners' accessibility
of audiovisual aids over Internet, the usage of audiovisual aids still totally
adheres to instructors' perspectives. In fact, distance learners can contribute
ideas not only in text format, but also in audiovisual format. However, previous
research has not considered the feasibility of audiovisual aids contributed
from distance learners. This paper argues that the usage of audiovisual aids
from distance learners' perspectives should be considered in designing Web-based
courses. To demonstrate this concept, this paper first introduces a screen camcorder
tool that enables learners to record screen activity as videos in standard format
or streaming format. Then, a collaborative learning strategy called Jigsaw II
is applied to encourage expertise group streaming videos for training other
learners. Finally, a preliminary survey of technology acceptance is implemented
on 37 learners. Results confirm the feasibility of audiovisual aids contributed
from distance learners. (Contains 13 references, 2 figures, and 2 tables.) (Author)
Chang, S. K., T. Arndt, et al. (2000). Macro University: A Framework for a Federation
of Virtual Universities. International Journal of Computer Processing of
Oriental Languages, World Scientific Publishing Company. 13: 205.
This paper discusses the technical issues related to the Macro University framework.
First we present the characteristics of the Macro University, from which the
design principles are derived. Then we describe Macro University's software
architecture and networking infrastructure. Since the Macro University is a
federation of virtual universities, the format and protocol for open information
exchange will be very important. Another often neglected issue is the technical
tools to facilitate evaluation and assessment. A third issue is a universal
interface for distance learning.ABSTRACT FROM AUTHOR
Charles, R. F. (1981). The De Anza Model: A Philosophy of Special Education.
Position Paper. California: 9.
The handicapped student services model described in this paper provides students
at De Anza College with a full, balanced range of services and instruction.
After an introductory section, the paper describes the strategic planning process
and identifies the three strategic decisions that influenced the development
of De Anza's handicapped services program: (1) to provide a full range of services
and programs; (2) to maintain a balance between service and instruction; and
(3) to establish a Special Education Segment of the college. The next section
enumerates the student needs addressed by De Anza's program. Next, the paper
mentions some of the special aspects of the handicapped program, including the
physical and psychological accessibility of the services and instruction and
the special classes and services offered. After the paper examines the program's
income formula, which provides flexibility and self-sufficiency by relying as
much as possible on regular average daily attendance income, it lists areas
in which De Anza provides special instruction. The next section begins by identifying
the advantages of the Special Education Segment being one of De Anza's four
major units and continues by describing the six components of De Anza's program:
Physically Limited Services, Adaptive Remedial Physical Education, Educational
Diagnosis Clinic, Hope-De Anza for developmentally disabled students, Adaptive
Geriatric Education Program, and the Physiology Lab. In conclusion, the paper
reviews the elements critical to the program's success. (AYC)
Charters, A. N. (1977). Accessibility to Resources for Educators of Adults.
New York: 16.
A key factor in implementing an individual program for professional development
among educators of adults is the availability and accessibility of the resources,
about which there are specific issues and concerns. The numerous print and non-print
resources, which are available through various organizations, often in different
languages, fall into six general areas: social instruments, institutions, publications
and other information sources, administrative supports, human expertise, and
awards. The task is to provide access for adults sometimes through alternative
means, to all of the learning resource opportunities and alternatives so that
they may select the most appropriate at the particular time and place. As with
all learning, the learner is the key, and accessibility, which includes identification
and selection, should be viewed from the point of view of the user. In order
to identify resources, it is of prime importance for the individual to define
the problem to be resolved through a statement of clear and explicit objectives.
Other factors affecting accessibility include physical limitations, psychological
and intellectual factors, and the ability of the learner to use the resources.
Basic documents developed at the Clearinghouse of Resources for Educators of
Adults at Syracuse University provide a guide for accessibility to resources.
(CWM)
Chatelain, L. J. (1966). Accent on access: 16.
Emphasis is given on accessibility to public buildings by the handicapped. attention
is directed to this subject inasmuch as architects generally have overlooked
the problem. hence, public buildings are not truly available to the total public.
in recent years, however, legislation has become increasingly more common to
correct the situation. the national commission on architectural barriers has
been established to pursue the matter in depth. included among their activities
are--(1) conducting hearings, (2) developing communication with schools of architecture,
(3) holding conferences and seminars, and (4) developing materials. the commission
has shown interest in such mechanical aids as walking wheelchairs, in information
programs to arouse the public, and in remodeling projects. this document is
a reprint from the rehabilitation record, november-december, 1966 issue, u.s.
department of health, education and welfare. (rh)
Cheh, J. A., K. M. Ribisl, et al. (2003). An Assessment of the Quality and Usability
of Smoking Cessation Information on the Internet. Health Promotion Practice.
4: 278-287.
Little is known about the quality and usability of on-line health information.
This analysis evaluated smoking cessation Web sites' content quality and usability.
Thirty sites were analyzed to determine their adherence to established tobacco
cessation guidelines and their accessibility, usability, credibility, and currency.
Most explained addiction (86.7%) and mentioned nicotine replacement therapy
(NRT) (93.3%) and social support (93.3%). However, few explained potential side
effects of NRT (33.3%) or which smokers should avoid using NRT (30.0%). Two
sites advocated substituting smokeless tobacco or herbal cigarettes when quitting,
and 16 (53.3%) provided information written at greater than an eighth-grade
level. Few sites provided a search mechanism (40.0%) or offered text-only versions
(30.0%), and most (83.3%) failed to indicate when content pages were last updated.
Most sites adhered to established cessation guidelines. A small subset offered
erroneous and potentially harmful information. Applying fundamental design principles
would improve accessibility, usability, credibility, and currency.ABSTRACT FROM
AUTHOR
Cherbo, J. M. and M. Peters (1995). American Participation in Opera and Musical
Theater, 1992. Research Division Report #32. District of Columbia: 118.
Data gleaned from the 1982, 1985, and 1992 Surveys of Public Participation in
the Arts (SPPAs) were used in this analysis of participation in opera and musical
theater/operetta. Findings indicate that opera is the least popular of the fine
arts, being the least frequented and the least selected as an activity respondents
would like to attend more frequently. Opera attendees are more likely than other
arts' attendee groups to attend all other fine arts activities, and show a significant
interest in more types of music than any other arts attendee group. There is
a strong relationship between early general arts education and adult opera attendance.
Opera attendees are predominantly white, better educated, wealthier, and somewhat
older than other art goers, but younger persons are attending in about the same
proportions in 1992 as in 1982. More persons watch or listen to opera on the
media than attend live performances. Findings of musical theater/operetta participation
indicates that attendance of these forms of theater is second to attendance
of art museums. Musical theater/operettas' primary appeal is live performance.
Many more individuals indicated that they would attend musical theater performances
if cost and accessibility were not issues. The report includes tables and appendices.
(MM)
Chicago Public Schools IL.[JIM13950] Small Schools Coalition Chicago IL.[BBB34658]
(2001). The Chicago Public Schools Design Competition, 2000-2001. Big Shoulders,
Small Schools Competition Program. Illinois: 51.
This document describes the Big Shoulders, Small Schools Chicago Public Schools
Design Competition; provides a description of the school communities and sites
involved; presents the presentation requirements, procedures, and regulations;
and examines the universal design and small schools concepts. The national design
competition will produce two new public pre-k-8th grade schools designed to
serve an integrated population of disabled and nondisabled students. Appendices
provide the Big Shoulders, Small Schools entry form and maps, photos, and surveys
of Chicago North and South side sites. (GR)
Chickering, A. W. (1976). Problems in the Postsecondary Education of Adults:
75.
Accessibility to postsecondary education for adults depends on solving problems
of distance, scheduling, advising, and financial aid. Diverse motives and developmental
differences in adults must be accommodated in order to provide accessibility.
Educational quality also depends on standards that recognize wide-ranging differences
among these students, and the approach to standards must both encourage learning
and provide substantive evaluation. To do so required developing "standards
banks" that define and illustrate: (1) criterion-referenced standards;
(2) norm-referenced standards; and (3) learner-referenced standards. Major changes
in the nature of work and in the roles and expectations of women have contributed
to the growing need for adult postsecondary education. These trends will continue.
Systems designed today must recognize current conditions and respond to future
changes. A planning inventory is included that provides a checklist of questions
for use in comparing existing alternatives and designing new ones. (Author/MSE)
Chickering, A. W. and Z. F. Gamson (1991). Applying the seven principles
for good practice in undergraduate education. San Francisco, Calif., Jossey-Bass
Inc.
Chickering, A. W., Z. F. Gamson, et al. (1990). Student inventory : 7 principles
for good practice in undergraduate education. Winona, Minn., The Seven Principles
Resource Center Winona State University.
Chickering, A. W. and L. Reisser (1993). Education and identity. San
Francisco, Jossey-Bass Publishers.
Chickering, A. W. and N. K. Schlossberg (1995). Getting the most out of college.
Boston, Allyn and Bacon.
Chickering, Z. G. a. A. (1987). "Seven principles of good practice in undergraduate
education." AAHE Bulletin 39(7): 3-7.
Chollet, D. J. (1979). A Cost-Benefit Analysis of Accessibility. New York:
92.
The report presents a cost-benefit analysis on the removal of architectural
barriers from residential and nonresidential buildings according to specifications
being developed for approval by the American National Standards Institute. Economic
benefits and costs are discussed for the following types of buildings: residential
housing (highrise facility for the elderly and a single family, detached unit);
educational and associated facilities (a college classroom building and a college
dormitory); recreational/municipal facilities (a convention/exhibition center);
and an extended commercial facility (a retail shopping center). An introductory
section contains a summary of information on handicapped individuals in the
United States and their general characteristics. (CL)
Christ, F. (1966). Some university students and their ideal study environment...as
they see it: 8.
A doctoral study of the opinions of 700 students in six california community
colleges concerning the ideal study environment was replicated by the study
skills center of loyola university of los angeles in 1966-67 as part of an evaluation
of student study habits and attitudes. in this interim report, the responses
of 109 nonresident and 105 resident male freshmen to the 27 items of the 100-item
opinionnaire (used in both studies), dealing with seven study space problems,
were analyzed. student preferences for the following items were discussed--(1)
decor in study area, (2) type of furniture most suitable for studying, (3) accessibility
of study materials, (4) smoking privileges, (5) size of room or study area,
(6) amount of privacy needed, and (7) best time of day for studying. five tentative
recommendations for the university administration, based on the freshman data,
are listed. complete data for all four undergraduate classes and final recommendations
will be published at a later date. references are given. (ls)
Christensen, E. W., U. P. Anakwe, et al. "Receptivity to Distance Learning:
The Effect of Technology, Reputation, Constraints, and Learning Preferences."
Journal of Research on Computing in Education. v33 n3 p263-79 Spr 2001.
Discusses distance learning research and describes a study of 399 students at
two universities that investigated the role of perceived technology usefulness,
technological familiarity and accessibility, reputation, constraints, learning
preferences, and demographic factors on prospective receptivity toward distance
learning. Considers implications of the findings for educators. (Author/LRW)
Chu, L. (1979). Toward A Humanistic Behaviorism: Self-Efficacy in Multicultural
Education. A Presentation in the College of Education Dialogue Series, New Mexico
State University. New Mexico: 49.
The paper approaches the issue of educational equity from the perspective of
individuals' perceptions of the opportunity available to them and their ability
to interact with their world effectively. The proposed model of humanistic behaviorism,
with its emphasis on self-efficacy, has special implications for multicultural
education. The changing social, environmental conditions with intention to provide
more opportunity for those who are traditionally disadvantaged may not result
in corresponding equal participation, if the subjective expectancy concerning
the personal accessibility to this opportunity is not fostered at the same time.
The teacher's role in multicultural settings is a key factor toward the development
of students' attitudes about themselves in schools. Goodwill toward students
alone may not be sufficient to bring about humane and efficacious interactions,
but must be accompanied by responsible, thoughtful strategies, by allowing the
student the chance to make the quest for personal control. There exists a reciprocal
interactive relationship between teachers' sense of self-efficacy in teaching
and motivating the students, students' sense of self-efficacy in their ability
to learn, and the general multicultural environmental variable. The development
of self-efficacy is contingent upon one's taking personal responsibility for
one's teaching or learning. (Author/NEC)
Chud, G. ""Include Me Too! Human Diversity in Early Childhood,"
edited by Kenise Murphy Kilbride. Book Review." Canadian Journal of
Research in Early Childhood Education. v7 n1 p91-93 Jun 1988.
Reviews Kilbride's book on diversity and its consequences for young children,
families, and caregivers; meeting children's needs; and practicing diversity
in and shaping the future of early childhood education. Notes that the book's
strengths include its standardized and consistent chapter format, its substance,
and comprehensive scope. Suggests that further editing could have improved accessibility.
(KB)
Citizens' Committee for Children of New York NY.[BBB19824] (1993). Keeping Track
of New York City's Children. New York: 197.
This report is a comprehensive study of the status of children and their families
in New York City. It measures how well children are doing by using widely recognized
indicators of well-being, and it measures the need, use, and accessibility of
services to help children. "Keeping Track" focuses on community-level
data, examining the 59 community districts in New York for different racial
and ethnic groups. Data are also supplied to show how children in New York are
faring in relation to those of the state and the country as a whole. Chapters
consider economic factors, housing, nutrition, health and the environment, safety,
and child care issues. Chapter 9 focuses on the education of the city's children.
The city school system is the largest in the country, with 972,000 students
and an annual budget of nearly $7 billion. Only 47 percent of students read
at or above their grade level, and only 58 percent test at or above their grade
level in mathematics. Only approximately 39 percent graduate from high school
in 4 years. The New York schools educate a tremendous diversity of students,
with diverse racial and ethnic backgrounds and a variety of educational and
social needs. The information in this report clarifies the needs of New York's
children as a step toward providing the best childhood and education for each.
Data are presented in 150 figures. Appendix 1 discusses data constraints, and
Appendix 2 contains four tables of summary data. (SLD)
Citizens' Committee for Children of New York NY.[BBB19824] (2002). Promoting
Teen Health and Reducing Risks: A Look at Adolescent Health Services in New
York City. New York: 56.
This study examined data from focus groups with New York City adolescents and
interviews with health care providers serving New York City adolescents (hospital
based clinics, school based health centers, child health clinics, community
health centers, and a multi-service adolescent center) in order to determine
how to promote health and reduce risk. Results indicated that the breadth, cost,
and accessibility of health services provided to adolescents depended on the
setting they selected to obtain care. The results highlighted five areas of
concern in adolescent health: ensuring confidential treatment for adolescents,
fragmentation of services, limited resources for health education and outreach,
the health practitioner/adolescent relationship, and physical and structural
barriers that make many health clinics less than adolescent-friendly. Recommendations
are provided regarding the most common ways adolescents learn about health services;
clinic environments; preferred appointment policy; health education; parental
involvement in teen health decisions or treatment; relationships with primary
care providers; and confidentiality. Three appendices present the site visit
questionnaire, data questionnaire, and questions presented to teen focus groups.
(SM)
Clark, C. B. (1997). The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Technology
Education. Connecticut: 24.
Since the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Title II applies to schools,
each school district should have a coordinator to develop an action plan covering
the school system. Requirements fall into four areas: general nondiscrimination,
equally effective communication, program accessibility, and employment. Compliance
with the law is the responsibility of the administration and the coordinator,
but all staff can be involved. The major goal is to provide access to the school
and programs to all students and school visitors regardless of their disability.
All buildings do not have to be accessible, but all programs, course offerings,
cafeteria, hallways, lavatories, phones, and anything open to the persons in
the facility must be. ADA requires a self-evaluation of the school to see what
problems must be addressed. Examples of school projects incorporating ADA content
include the following: students in an architectural class selected a part of
the school facility and did a study to determine its accessibility; a tech prep
class viewed a playscape to see how it is accessible to all children. Connections
with other curriculum areas include the following: discussion of civil rights
and law enforcement in social studies; learning about diseases and disabilities
in health; and ramp design in mathematics and science. Technology education
offers opportunities for students with disabilities to learn self-reliance.
Teachers can avoid incorrect, stereotypical, demeaning, or insensitive terms
and use proper language when talking to a person with a disability. (Contains
20 references.) (YLB)
Clark, C. B. (1998). Inclusion in the Technology Education Classroom. Connecticut:
14.
For several years, Weaver High School (Hartford, Connecticut) has used a grant
to fund the services of a consultant to provide information and training on
the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Weaver has a program that allows
students with multiple disabilities to be part of the school program and all
activities. Activities have provided learning experiences that have made students
more aware of ADA and how it applies to them all. One activity that has worked
well with technology education students is conducting accessibility surveys
around the school facility. One example of a problem with simple and inexpensive
solutions is a wall phone hung too high that could be lowered or replaced by
a desk phone. Teachers stress to students the proper terms and language etiquette
to use when talking to or about persons with disabilities. The interdisciplinary
connections with activities involving ADA are many. The technology teacher has
been actively involved with the social studies and current issues classes, where
projects are related to civil rights. The mathematics connection is made in
surveys and architectural design work. The technology teacher's work with health
and physical education teachers has helped his students be more aware of various
physical disabilities. Other success with inclusion has occurred in the art
department, health education classes, and physical education. (YLB)
Clark, D. (1998). W3C pushes net access for the disabled. Computer. 31:
17.
Discusses the working draft of page-authoring guidelines released by World Wide
Web Consortium (W3C) designed to make web sites more accessible to the disabled.
Benefits of the disabled ton the proposed guidelines; Features supported by
the specification of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 4.0; Work of Web Accessibility
Initiative (WAI) with W3C.
Clark, J. L. D. (1987). Developments in Language Education. District of Columbia:
15.
This report discusses three recent developments in foreign and second language
education. The first is the "proficiency movement," which is leading
teachers and curriculum planners to find effective ways of measuring functional
language proficiency and of bringing students to pragmatically useful levels
of speaking, listening, reading, and writing ability. The goal of foreign language
teaching is now the effective use of the language in real-life communication
settings. The second development is the introduction of the microcomputer to
the language classroom. The following aspects of computer-assisted language
learning (CALL) are discussed: (1) accessibility; (2) guidelines for CALL software
development and review; (3) adoption of a systems analysis view of the instructional
process; and (4) evaluation of CALL results. The third development is content-based
language instruction--the simultaneous teaching of English and subject matter
areas such as history or social studies to nonnative speakers of English. Guidelines
are listed for developing effective programs of content-based language instruction.
Future trends are covered and a list of references is included. (PS)
Clark, M. J., M. Kendrick, et al. (1997). Before You Decide: What Families Would
Like Policy Makers to Know. Maine: 38.
This booklet, developed by parents of children with developmental disabilities,
is intended to help policy makers understand major parental concerns about raising
a child with a disability. The specific issues addressed are: (1) the special
needs of families with a disabled child; (2) the right to community integration;
(3) the continuing difficulties in obtaining appropriate care; (4) the continuing
difficulty of obtaining an appropriate public education in the least restricted
educational environment, as required by law; (5) the need for better integration
of available services; (6) the continuing obstacles despite accessibility requirements
under the law; (7) special medical care problems; (8) the continuing problems
with employers despite relief offered by the Family and Medical Leave Act of
1993; (9) finances, a constant source of stress to these families; (10) the
continuing lack of accessible transportation services; and (11) the future,
the dream of a future where every child is happy, loved, and successful. Each
section contains factual information about the issue, an analysis of how families
are typically affected, and quotations by family members describing their specific
experiences. The booklet concludes with suggestions for both policymakers and
parents. (DB)
Clark, R. C. and C. Lyons "Using Web-Based Training Wisely." Training.
v36 n7 p51-56 Jul 1999.
Web-based training will probably become the medium of choice for most technology-delivered
training because of its worldwide accessibility and the ease with which it can
be updated. The effect it will have on learning will depend on how well principles
of learning and instruction are applied. (JOW)
Clark, R. C. and R. E. Mayer (2003). E-Learning and the science of instruction
: proven guidelines for consumers and designers of multimedia learning.
San Francisco, CA, Jossey-Bass/Pfeiffer.
Clarke, G. G. "The Effects of Financial Restraint on Canadian Universities:
The Ontario Case." International Journal of Institutional Management
in Higher Education. v10 n3 p219-29 Nov 1986.
The effects of Ontario's gradual reduction in university funding since the early
1970s on government-school relationships, accessibility, operating expenditures,
interinstitutional cooperation, administrative functioning, and program development
are examined and contrasted with the more abrupt financial declines of most
other countries' university systems. (MSE)
Clarkson, J. (2003). Inclusive design : design for the whole population.
London ; New York, Springer.
Clay, K. "ERIC: How It Has Improved." Phi Delta Kappan. v64 n3
p198-200 Nov 1982.
Outlines the expansion since 1966 in the size, accessibility, and utilization
of the Educational Resources Information Center (ERIC), a national, computerized
educational database. Describes four typical cases in which ERIC searches proved
useful to clients of the San Mateo (California) Educational Resources Center,
an agency offering ERIC search services. (PGD)
Clelland, R. (1978). Section 504: Civil Rights for the Handicapped. Virginia:
135.
Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 is the first major statutory civil
rights enactment that protects handicapped individuals from discriminatory practices
in employment and educational opportunities and in accessibility to federally
supported programs and activities. The purpose of this handbook is to examine
the statutory and regulatory requirements of Title V, Section 504, and to outline
the administrative responsibilities of local educational agencies relative to
its successful implementation. The goals of this handbook are similar to those
of "Public Law 94-142: Special Education in Transition," a companion
document. To achieve these goals, the handbook is divided into five chapters
covering substantive and procedural issues, employment practices, and program
accessibility. Two final chapters offer a comparison of Section 504 and P.L.
94-142 and identify future trends. The book concludes that the Section 504 regulation,
in concert with P.L. 94-142, can provide much needed relief to handicapped individuals.
A checklist provided at the end helps determine the accessibility of buildings
to the physically handicapped. (Author/LD)
Clemson, R. L. (1989). Teachers as Researchers and Researchers as Teachers:
Lessons Learned from Three Post Baccalaureate Teacher Certification Programs.
Maryland: 28.
Despite the scope and accessibility of the current knowledge base in teaching,
teachers rarely refer to research findings as a primary information source to
guide their practice. If teacher education is to survive the onslaught of politically
inspired alternative certification routes now operating in 20 states, it is
critical that teacher education characteristics be not only research-based,
but also the subject of research. Some emerging postbaccalaureate alternative
teacher preparation programs offer timely possibilities for strengthening preservice
teachers' awareness of research as a resource for problem-solving in the classroom.
This paper describes findings from a preliminary study examining teacher candidates
in several alternative postbaccalaureate programs in the Mid-Atlantic states.
The study explores whether alternative program graduates are more or less apt
to value research and its implications for improving practice. The study also
examines how well these programs support teacher candidates' needs and learning
dispositions. The first phase piloted a questionnaire to be administered to
teacher candidates in different programs and at different stages of program
completion. The questionnaire was completed by student teachers in traditional
programs and by interns in alternative programs, either immediately before the
teaching experience or during the first 2 weeks. Results were somewhat mixed
but, generally, students in alternative programs stressing research tend to
value research's contribution to practice more highly than students in traditional
or alternative programs lacking a research emphasis. Other results, study limitations,
and implications are discussed. Included are 2 appendices and 10 references.
(MLH)
Clinton, J. S. (1987). Instructional Technology Adaptive/Assistive Devices.
Florida: 277.
This training module was developed in order to help teachers, parents, administrators,
and other educational personnel to understand the problems and difficulties
encountered by learners with disabilities trying to access microcomputers. The
main body of the module describes hardware considerations and strategies for
increasing microcomputer access, focusing on specific impairments (including
autism, emotional handicaps, hearing impairments, mental handicaps, physical
impairments, and learning disabilities), and utilizing a variety of adaptive
devices. Activities are provided on such topics as modifying input/output accessibility
and the utilization of speech output, touch-sensitive devices, speech input
(as an alternative to the keyboard), and adaptive firmware cards and switch
controls. Objectives, materials specifications, preparation guidelines, detailed
procedures, and lists of recommended resources are included for each activity.
Also included are a variety of supplementary handouts and overhead transparencies.
(GL)
Clinton, W. (1996). Remarks by the President at Princeton University Commencement
Address. District of Columbia: 12.
This speech by President William Clinton addresses the 1996 graduating class
of Princeton University on the occasion of Princeton's 250th anniversary. After
his opening remarks, the President touches on the importance of the graduating
seniors' education as well as the importance of education in general to the
nation's future. He compares the current year to a century ago and mentions
the advent of a new millennium, calling it the Age of Possibility. He goes on
to such topics as economic reform, investment in new technologies and environmental
protection, long-term growth and opportunities, and international trade. He
then focuses on educational issues and his Administration's proposals including
the need for Americans to have a college education to succeed in the future,
the role of the Internet, the goal of making the 13th and 14th years of education
as available to Americans as the first 12 years are now, improved accessibility
of student loans from the Federal government, federal tax policy to encourage
college attendance, and more public scholarships to help academically successful
students to attend college. (CK)
Clinton, W. J. (1996). Tribal Colleges and Universities. Executive Order. District
of Columbia: 6.
This presidential executive order was issued to: (1) ensure that tribal colleges
and universities are more fully recognized as accredited institutions of higher
education, have access to opportunities afforded other such institutions, and
have federal resources committed on a continuing basis; (2) establish a mechanism
to increase accessibility of Federal resources in tribal communities; (3) promote
access to educational opportunities for economically disadvantaged students;
(4) promote preservation and revitalization of American Indian and Alaska native
languages and cultural traditions; (5) seek innovative approaches to link tribal
colleges with early childhood, elementary, and secondary education programs;
(6) and support National Education Goals. The Order defines tribal colleges
and universities as those institutions cited in Section 532 of the Equity in
Education Land-Grant Status Act of 1994, plus those that qualify for funding
under the Tribally Controlled Community College Assistance Act of 1978 and the
Navajo Community College, authorized in the Navajo Community College Assistance
Act of 1978. It establishes a Board of Advisors and delineates its role and
establishes an Office of House Initiative to provide staff support for the Board
and provide liaison between the tribal college and the executive branch. The
Order also defines department and agency participation and establishes a 5-year
federal plan to fulfill the purpose of the Order. (CH)
Cloutier, L. R. (1985). Adult and Continuing Education Unit Self-Evaluation:
Annual Report, 1984-1985. Wisconsin: 36.
For the 1984-85 annual evaluation of the Adult and Continuing Education (ACE)
Program, Gateway Technical Institute (GTI) elected to use the self-evaluation
model developed by the Wisconsin state ACE Task Force. Students, instructors,
administrators, program coordinators, and advisory committee members were surveyed
to identify program strengths and the concerns of each group. Study findings,
based on responses from 45.4% of the students (N=303), 69.9% of the instructors
(N=51), 93.3% of the administrators (N=28), and 60.9% of the advisory committee
members (N=28), included the following: (1) strengths identified by students
and instructors were found among instruction and curriculum indicators; (2)
administrators cited the sexual fairness of district publications, accessibility
of programs and courses, and the ability to reach special groups as program
strengths; (3) student concerns were concentrated on facilities, the registration
process, and the adequacy of course selection; (4) instructors indicated emergency
preparation, course content consultation, and supervisor evaluation as their
concerns; and (5) administrators were concerned primarily with the lack of an
ACE marketing plan. In addition to the self-study, the ACE's annual evaluation
looked at economic development activities and direct services to business and
industry, as well as at traditional evaluation criteria of student demographics,
course offerings, and enrollments. Data tables and the survey instruments are
included. (EJV)
Cloutier, R. (1984). Access of Women and Minorities to Higher Education: Changes
in Taste and Colour without Chemical Changes: Part 1. Canada Quebec: 68.
The accessibility of higher education to women and minorities was studied, with
a focus on the University of California, Berkeley. Information was also obtained
on the University of California system, the California State University system,
and the community college system. In order to provide comparative information
for Quebec, Canada, access of women to the Universite Laval was also assessed.
Research questions included: Which minority groups have gained the most from
higher education? Have women belonging to minority ethnic groups made the same
gains as their male counterparts? Have white women made higher gains than white
men? Have women of other minority ethnic groups made higher gains than minority
ethnic men? To which socioeconomic strata do minority ethnic groups belong?
Additional information on the access of women and minorities to higher education
included: the types of institutions attended, the levels of study being pursued,
and degrees conferred. The following ethnic groups were considered: American
Indian, Asian, Filipino, Black, Hispanic, and White. Institutional factors that
appear to restrict access to higher education for women and minority ethnic
groups are identified. (SW)
Clyde, A. (2001). Bobby Approves--Web Accessibility For the Print Disabled.
Teacher Librarian, Rockland Press. 28: 40.
Discusses the controversy of the accessibility to non-print information via
the Internet. Information on the MP3 format, developed in Germany; Information
on file-sharing used by Napster; Concerns of some universities in banning Napster.
Clymer, E. S. (1996). A Model Master of Science Curriculum for Educators of
Health Professionals: Instructional Alternatives, Implementation and Evaluation
Plan. California: 188.
The purpose of this applied research project at the College of Osteopathic Medicine
of the Pacific (California) was to develop a new curriculum for the Master of
Science in Education for Health Professionals program. Seven areas were explored
in this study: (1) the learning needs of educators of health professionals;
(2) proposed curriculum components; (3) barriers to pursuit of a graduate degree
in education; (4) instructional alternatives; (5) available delivery systems
to increase program accessibility; (6) an implementation plan; and (7) an evaluation
plan. A review of the literature provided a foundation for the study. Methodology
included telephone interviews, focus groups, reviews of course offerings and
degree requirements, and use of external and internal expert information. The
final product, a model curriculum for the Master of Science in Education, was
developed following the validation process. Included in the appendixes are the
criteria for the study and the model curriculum. (Contains approximately 150
references.) (CH)
Cohen, A. C. (1970). Human Service Institutes. An Alternative for PROFESSIONAL
Higher Education: 23.
This paper proposes a new kind of educational institution, the Human Services
Institute (HSI), which would offer an action oriented work-study program of
flexible duration to prepare young people for professions in the human services
such as health, education, welfare, law, guidance, social work, therapy, urban
planning, and public service. Such institutions would provide a solution to
many of the problems facing higher education today--problems of accessibility,
effectiveness, homogeneity, rigidity, credentials, and social isolation--and
become catalysts for social change. The HSI is based on the belief that traditional
professional training fails to foster an interest in human service, to relate
courses to practical work, or to involve students in academic decision making
regarding their own careers. The work-study program of the HSI would offer an
intensive field experience complementary to academic studies, make a BA available
in 2 years, and provide a broad curriculum. The paper discusses the HSI's program,
objectives, prospective students and faculty, evaluation and certification procedures,
and relationship with traditional graduate schools. (JS)
Cohen, J. A. "The Electronic Library in Higher Education: An Overview and
Status Report." Interpersonal Computing and Technology Journal. v1 n1
Jan 1993.
Discusses the use of electronic technologies in scholarly publication. Highlights
include problems with traditional media in libraries, including cost and timeliness;
benefits of electronic publishing, including ease of searching and accessibility;
problems with electronic publishing, including copyright, graphics, and standardization;
organizational issues; and case studies from higher education. (Contains 36
references.) (LRW)
Cohen, M. D. (1994). Overcoming Barriers to Inclusion of Children with Disabilities
in the Local Schools--A Blueprint for Change. Illinois: 137.
Results of studying inclusion of Illinois students with disabilities in regular
education are presented. The moral, educational, and legal bases for inclusion
in public school general education were reviewed. Differences regarding planning
and decision making for children with disabilities were investigated in three
schools that were relatively more inclusive and three schools that were relatively
less inclusive. Illinois practices were also compared to inclusive educational
practices in Vermont and Colorado, two states identified as significantly further
along than Illinois in implementing inclusive practices. Focus group interviews
were conducted with about 80 parents and educators in Illinois, and due process
decisions over 4 years were examined. Barriers to inclusion are discussed in
the areas of information, attitudes, instruction/technology, leadership, accessibility,
organization, operational and implementation problems, financial issues, regulatory
barriers, and legal barriers. Ten recommendations to remove barriers to inclusion
are offered. Ten case law citations and six statutory and regulatory citations
are included. (Contains 27 references.) (SW)
Cohen, U. (1979). Mainstreaming Handicapped Children: Beyond Barrier-Free Design.
Wisconsin: 11.
The authors describe many current school design responses to mainstreaming as
limited in scope, focusing mainly on barrier free environments. This approach,
they suggest, is an incomplete one to a wide range of problems in mainstreaming.
An analysis of the literature is seen to demonstrate that barrier free design
is casually substituted for the broader concept of mainstreaming. The authors
discuss physical solutions to provide environments which promote children's
interaction, positive self image, confidence, and accessibility, while allowing
for learning and development. (CL)
Cole, R. A. (2000). Issues in Web-based pedagogy : a critical primer.
Westport, Conn., Greenwood Press.
Coleman, J. H. and D. L. Williams, Jr. (1976). Identification of Research and
Product Needs in Early Childhood: 18.
This paper is an assessment of research needs that attempts (1) to identify
areas of current needs in early childhood education, (2) to determine which
of the areas would be most appropriate for the research and development of educational
materials, and (3) to propose solution strategies for those areas identified.
Data sources included responses from personal interviews with 11 prominent early
childhood theorists (each of the interviews was structured according to a list
of 19 questions in five areas), results from reviews of the literature in early
childhood education, recommendations made by 13 participants representing regional
and state agencies, school districts, etc., at a regional conference in Austin,
Texas, and responses from brief telephone interviews with 10 people currently
working in the area of research and development for carepersons. Identified
needs and recommendations from each data source are reviewed. In general, the
results indicate a need in five major areas: (1) more effective education of
parents, paraprofessionals, and other adults involved in caring for children;
(2) more research directed toward the development of effective training materials
for parents and paraprofessionals--research which utilizes an exportable, modular
design, flexible training strategies, and multimedia materials; (3) more accessibility
to parenting materials already developed, (4) more research concerning what
effective parenting is; and (5) more effective strategies for utilizing information
obtained from screening instruments used with young children in program development.
(Author/SB)
Collard, W. and R. Huff (1974). Exploring Cost Exchange at Colleges and Universities.
A Report on the 1973 Field Test of NCHEMS' Preliminary Information Exchange
and Reporting Procedures at 70 Institutions: 34.
The Preliminary Information Exchange Procedures (IEP) cost study project was
undertaken as a joint venture by a group of colleges and universities and the
National Center for Higher Education Management Systems (NCHEMS). The project
was initiated and sponsored by NCHEMS to accomplish six objectives that would
benefit both the institutions and NCHEMS. The project objectives were as follows:
(1) Exchange Procedures Manual" to provide data for evaluating the utility
and feasibility of those procedures and definitions. (2) To implement and test
the NCHEMS planning and management software tools on available computers at
colleges and universities participating in the preliminary IEP project. (3)
To develop institutional expertise in using NCHEMS management tools. (4) To
evaluate the IEP cost study implementation effort in terms of institutional
benefits and required compatible information with similar institutions. (6)
To determine the availability and accessibility of institutional historical
data required for completion of the preliminary IEP cost study. (Author)
Collins, D. (1999). Women Youth Workers and Outdoor Education. United Kingdom
England: 8.
A study examined personal and professional development experienced by women
youth workers participating in five 5-day, residential, single-sex, outdoor
education courses in England. Analysis of diaries and poetry at the end of the
courses and questionnaires completed 1 year later by participants and their
managers yielded findings in the areas of constraints on the participation of
women in outdoor activities, individual learning from the outdoor experience,
and benefits to the women's work in the youth service. Constraints on women's
participation in outdoor activities included the need to service the maintenance
and leisure needs of others, blind prejudice, dominant attitudes about respectability,
financial considerations, fear of the unknown, concerns about their physical
fitness, and for some, the all-women environment. Positive outcomes in the area
of individual learning included the opportunity to step down from the role of
mother and be oneself, the development of confidence in physical skills, the
development of new strengths, and the opportunity to reassess life paths. Benefits
to the women's work in the youth service included increased knowledge about
group processes, role changing, and leadership roles, and an increase in confidence,
motivation, and environmental awareness. It was important to value the knowledge,
skills, and experience that the women brought to the group. A more flexible
approach to the processes of outdoor education courses might increase their
accessibility to women. (TD)
Colon, E. S., J. Wells, et al. (2001). The Relationship between Alcohol Use
and Sexual Assault Incidents in Educational Settings. Pennsylvania: 39.
A comparative study was conducted on the relationship between the frequency
of sexual assault incidents and the relative accessibility of alcohol on two
small liberal arts colleges and one larger public university. The alcohol policy
varied among the colleges in that one was an alcohol free campus and another
permitted drinking for students who were at least 21 years old. Three hypotheses
were proposed: (1) campuses with liberal alcohol policies were expected to have
a higher rate of sexual assault than campuses with conservative alcohol policies;
(2) drinkers were expected to have experienced more sexual assault incidents;
and (3) freshman were expected to report a higher incidence of unwanted intercourse.
Counter to expectation, the results indicated that the small liberal arts college
with a conservative alcohol policy had the highest rate of alcohol use, followed
closely by the small liberal arts college with a liberal alcohol policy. The
medium-size public university with a conservative alcohol policy was found to
have the lowest rate of alcohol use. No significant differences in reports of
sexual incidents were found among the campuses. Drinkers experienced more sexual
incidents than nondrinkers. Contrary to the data analysis, juniors and seniors
reported higher rates of experiencing unwanted intercourse than freshman and
sophomores. (Contains 47 references.) (JDM)
Comerford, R. (1997). The media event: Disentangling the truth about the web.
IEEE Spectrum. 34: 26.
Provides information about the World Wide Web. Accessibility of the web; Description
of the web; Stage of development of the web and Internet application.
Commission on Education of the Deaf Washington DC.[BBB26520] (1988). Toward
Equality: Education of the Deaf. A Report to the President and the Congress
of the United States. District of Columbia: 171.
The report concludes that education of persons who are deaf in the United States
is characterized by inappropriate priorities and inadequate resources. Among
deficiencies identified are the failure to implement available preventive and
early identification procedures, monitor educational programs, and use tools
of advancing technology. Specific recommendations are made for the following
areas of need: (1) prevention and early identification; (2) elementary and secondary
education including language acquisition, appropriate education, least restrictive
environment, parents' rights, evaluation and assessment, program standards,
quality education, American Sign Language, Gallaudet University's pre-college
programs; (3) federal postsecondary education systems including regional programs,
adult and continuing education, comprehensive service centers, evaluation and
oversight, admission policies, affirmative action, governing bodies; (4) research,
evaluation, and outreach including the National Center on Deafness Research,
and development of research plans; (5) professional standards and training including
early childhood, state councils, preservice and inservice training, elementary
and secondary teacher training, competency requirements, training for teachers
in regular education settings, federal support for teacher preparation, educational
interpreters, rehabilitation interpreters, traineeships; (6) technology including
mandatory captioning, distribution of federal funds, built-in decoders, accessibility
of the federal government, funding for technology, accessible equipment, assistive
devices centers, national symposia, media services and captioned film program;
and (7) clearinghouses and the Committee on Deaf/Blindness. (DB)
Committee of Presidents of Universities of Ontario Toronto.[BBB03053] (1970).
Undergraduate Student Aid and Accessibility in the Universities of Ontario:
166.
This document presents reports from the individual universities of Ontario on
policies of undergraduate student aid and accessibility to the universities
during the academic year 1969-70. In addition, it presents recommendations from
the universities as to how student aid policies might be improved to increase
equality of access. (HS)
Community Colleges of Colorado Denver.[BBB36219] (1999). The Colorado Five-Year
State Plan for Career and Technical Education under the Carl D. Perkins Vocational
and Technical Education Act of 1998. Colorado: 71.
With the passage of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Technical Education Act
of 1998, career and technical education in Colorado entered a new era. This
monograph presents the five-year plan for the use of federal vocational funds
during fiscal years 2000-2005. As one of a series of plans that interrelate
and establish a vision for the Colorado Community College and Occupational Education
System (CCCOES), this plan is driven by the Board's Cornerstones. To ensure
effectiveness, this plan and those eligible recipients receiving resources under
this plan must adhere to the Cornerstones which mark the CCCOES: Accessibility,
Learning and Learning-Centered, Community Connectedness, and Market Alignment.
This report contains the following sections: Introduction to the Plan, which
includes an overview and a discussion of the system cornerstones, regional work
teams, and research; Planning, Coordination, and Collaboration, which includes
information on public hearings and consultation and activities to allow participation
in the state planning process; Program Administration, which looks at activities
designed to meet or exceed state adjusted levels of performance and how students'
academic and technical skills will be improved; Accountability and Evaluation;
Special Populations and Other Groups; Tech Prep; and Financial Requirements,
which discusses such items as assurances, compliance, and fund allocation. (Contains
12 appendices.) (VWC)
Conger, G. R. (1968). Select council on post-high-school education conference
(tallahassee, january 26-27, 1968). summary report: 40.
In 1967, the florida legislature appointed a select council on post-high school
education to prepare a comprehensive plan for the state's offerings at this
level. former consultants who had studied the florida educational system participated
in a january 1968 conference. reports of the discussion groups were summarized--(1)
human resources, (2) democratization of florida post-high school education,
(3) innovation, and (4) educational technology. groups gave attention to questions
of quality, accessibility of opportunity, student transition from one level
to another, the need for change, evaluation, media, human factors in technology,
and research. (wo)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. House Committee on Education and Labor.[BBB01024]
(1985). Oversight Hearing on Interagency Cooperation. Hearing before the Subcommittee
on Select Education of the Committee on Education and Labor. House of Representatives,
Ninety-Eighth Congress, Second Session, (Aliquippa, PA, March 23, 1984). District
of Columbia: 72.
The transcript is provided of an oversight hearing on interagency cooperation
in special education. Programs, problems, and achievements in the state of Pennsylvania
are reported by professionals representing community mental health, public education,
community agencies and associations, and child care institutions. Problem areas
cited include program funding costs and sources, the role of the federal government,
duplication of services by agencies, inconsistencies in interagency agreements
and definitions, and uneven compliance with state plans. Accomplishments include
a child count, establishment of a statewide parent network, and identification
of gaps in services and ways of sharing services to address unmet needs. Among
a number of recommendations are the following: (1) review present interagency
agreements to reduce inconsistencies; (2) encourage agencies to agree to accept
existing documentation of handicaps; (3) retain the public school intermediate
unit as coordinator of special education services and expand its role in inservice
training; (4) provide state grant money to school districts wishing to increase
building accessibility; (5) include all related agencies in Individualized Education
Program conferences attended by parents. (JW)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. House Committee on Education and Labor.[BBB01024]
(1985). Reauthorization of the Higher Education Act, Nontraditional Students,
Volume 3. Hearings before the Subcommittee on Postsecondary Education of the
Committee on Education and Labor. House of Representatives, Ninety-Ninth Congress,
First Session (July 9-10, 1985). District of Columbia: 203.
Hearins on reauthorization of the Higher Education Act of 1965 consider the
needs of the nontraditional student in higher education. Consideration is given
to ways that student financial aid programs could better serve this student
population (i.e., students may be over ages 18 to 22, may be minority group
members or immigrants, part-timers, out of high school a while, possibly experienced
in the world of work, and not necessarily seeking an educational credential).
Recommendations include: increasing maximum awards for Pell grants; providing
nontraditional students access first to grants and then to loans; targeting
Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants to students with exceptional financial
need; expanding State Student Incentive Grants to provide special aid to adult
learners over age 25; expanding the repayment period on student loans; and acknowledging
the importance of child care in student grant and loan programs. H.R. 2111,
a bill to amend the Higher Education Act of 1965, would increase accessibility
for lower-income, nontraditional students by expanding the amount of affordable
child care available to low-income college students. The bill would also provide
stipends to students studying child care by arranging part-time employment in
child care programs. The text of this bill is included. (SW)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. House Committee on Education and Labor.[BBB01024]
(1989). Hearings on Child Care. Hearings before the Committee on Education and
Labor. House of Representatives, One Hundred First Congress, First Session (February
9, March 6, and April 5, 1989). District of Columbia: 510.
Hearings were held to begin the process of developing legislation to address
the child care crisis. Testimony concerns: (1) the Child Development and Education
Act of 1989 (H.R. 3) and the 21st Century School program; (2) the use of tax
credits to support child care, H.R. 3, and H.R. 30, the Act for Better Child
Care (ABC); (3) federal standards and quality of care, salaries, child care
staffing, care for infants and toddlers, partnerships, service supply and demand,
expenditures on care, and parental preferences; (4) the Child Care and Education
2000 Act; (5) the structure of H.R. 3, the leadership role of public schools,
and the interagency approach to service delivery; (6) the need to expand Head
Start services, state options, diversity, the process of building capacity for
program development, accessibility, affordability, and reliability; (7) the
need for a comprehensive national policy on child care and early childhood education,
and views of the National Education Association and the National Parent Teacher
Association; (8) the experiences of the National Child Day Care Association,
findings of a 3-year national study of public school programs for children under
5 years of age, and the importance of resource and referral services; and (9)
the American Civil Liberties Union's view of inadequacies in the ABC bill, and
the needs of low-income children and small business child care providers. Numerous
statements, letters, and supplemental materials are included. (RH)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. House Committee on Energy and Commerce.[BBB20507]
(1984). Infant Mortality Rates: Failure to Close the Black-White Gap. Hearing
before the Subcommittee on Oversight and Investigations and the Subcommittee
on Health and the Environment of the Committee on Energy and Commerce. House
of Representatives, Ninety-Eighth Congress, Second Session (March 16, 1984).
District of Columbia: 367.
This hearing was held in response to a request from the Congressional Black
Caucus, which asked the subcommittees to find out if the Department of Health
and Human Services (HHS) was doing everything possible to reduce infant mortality,
especially the high death rate experienced by Blacks. The hearing opened with
statements by both subcommittee chairmen, after which congressional Representatives
and the chief of Maternal and Child Health, Michigan Department of Public Health
testified to the benefits of various maternal and child programs and the effects
of federal and state funding cuts on these programs. The assistant secretary
for HHS discussed current programs and stated that more research was necessary
to find out the causes of the discrepancy between Black and White mortality
rates. Questions to him focused on planned merging of existing programs into
block grants and subsequent loss of funds, the possibilities for increasing
the accessibility of health services and nutrition programs, coordinating research
efforts with the Public Health Service, and problems in receiving information
from his agency. Representatives from the Children's Defense Fund, the Food
Research and Action Center, Public Advocates, Inc., and Satellite Clinic, Harlem
Hospital also testified. Material submitted for the record was from organizations
which gave oral testimony and from the American College of Nurse-Midwives, the
Harvard School of Public Health, and the Mexican American Legal Defence and
Educational Fund. (CB)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. House Select Committee on Children Youth
and Families.[BBB21362] (1984). Children, Youth, and Families: Beginning the
Assessment. Hearing before the Select Committee on Children, Youth, and Families.
House of Representatives, Ninety-Eighth Congress, First Session. District of
Columbia: 207.
The text of this hearing begins with statements about the scope of interest,
functions, and goals of the newly formed Select Committee on Children, Youth,
and Families. Testimony then focuses on demographic and economic trends influencing
family composition and incomes in the recent past, trends in federal spending
for children and their families, and the future outlook. Subsequent statements
by Dr. T. Berry Brazelton stress the need for preventive interventions, as opposed
to therapeutic efforts, in the area of infant development. These remarks are
followed by testimony concerning the role of education in a learning society,
problems faced by American families, and recommendations to the committee. The
testimony of children brought to Washington, D.C., by Save the Children is next
included. Additionally presented are an examination of economic consequences
of the change in the composition of the American family; a discussion of research
indicating the importance of parents' physical and emotional accessibility for
the emotional health of children; personal reflections on the importance of
the traditional family in producing offspring with right character, on distortions
of the ideal of equality, and on implications for public policy; and a brief
overview of problems associated with government interventions. Included in the
report are 25 tables and figures concerning economic and family conditions and
an article examining marriage and divorce statistics. Letters written by children
to the President are appended. (RH)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. Senate Committee on Appropriations.[BBB09047]
(2002). Education Technology. Hearing before a Subcommittee of the Committee
on Appropriations. United States Senate, One Hundred Seventh Congress, First
Session, Special Hearing (July 25, 2001). District of Columbia: 47.
This hearing before the Subcommittee on Labor, Health, Human Services, Education
and Related Agencies is about what will be done in the 21st century to improve
the learning skills for children from the earliest age through all their education.
Senator Tom Harkin (Iowa) presided. Opening statements were given by Senator
Harkin and Senator Arlen Spector (Pennsylvania). The opening statements are
followed by the statement of Dr. Margaret Honey, Vice President and Director,
Education Development Center, Center for Children and Technology, with highlights
including: the benefits of educational technology, effective software design,
and the role of the Federal Government. The statement of Cheryl Williams, President,
International Society for Technology in Education (ISTE) is then given, followed
by the statement of Thomas Gann, Director, Strategic Alliances for Global Education
Research, Sun Microsystems, Incorporated, with highlights including: the need
for networking, progress in e-learning, the Federal role, and recommendations.
The last statement is given by Dr. David H. Rose, Ed.D., Co-Executive Director,
CAST, with highlights including: assistive technologies and the present, the
power of digital content for students with disabilities, and the universal design
of learning technologies. A discussion follows. (AEF)
Congress of the U.S. Washington DC. Senate Committee on Labor and Human Resources.[BBB17813]
(1980). Oversight on Programs for the Deaf and Hearing Impaired, 1980. Hearing
Before the Subcommittee on the Handicapped of the Committee on Labor and Human
Resources, United States Senate, Ninety-Sixth Congress, Second Session on to
Examine Current Problems and Programs of the Deaf and Hearing Impaired, and
to Explore Future Technological Developments Designed to Handle Their Problems.
District of Columbia: 243.
The 1980 Senate hearing focuses on federal programs for deaf and hearing impaired
students. Thirteen prepared statements are presented from representatives of
federal agencies (National Institute of Handicapped Research, Department of
Education, and National Institute of Health); private associations (the Convention
of American Instructors of the Deaf, American Speech-Language-Hearing Association,
Alexander Graham Bell Association of the Deaf, Consumers Organization for the
Hearing Impaired, Inc., and National Information Center for Quiet); and Gallaudet
College. Statements touch on such issues as technology; hearing aid improvement;
programs for the research and training centers; interpreter training; federal
expenditures; vocational training; independent living; captioning; the impact
of P.L. 94-142 (the Education for All Handicapped Children Act); multihandicapped
hearing impaired students; accessibility; oral interpreting; and directions
for future research. (CL)
Connecticut Commission for Higher Education Hartford.[BBB04827] (1970). Needs:
Socio-Economic, Manpower, Regional; Report of Task Force I to the Connecticut
Commission for Higher Education: 92.
The report of Task Force I deals with the needs for higher education in Connecticut
arising out of current and projected socioeconomic conditions. The orientation
of the Task Force was that some form of post-secondary education should be available
to all students to the extent that they might benefit from such education, and
that economic and geographic factors should not inhibit a student's entry into
an institution of higher education. The recommendations reflect this orientation.
Section I of the report discusses the problems facing higher education, particularly
student unrest and the causes of student frustration. Section II deals with
the socioeconomic factors that determine how current needs are being served
and what new demands may develop during the next decade. The factors considered
are: (1) population, including numbers, density, age, ethnic and racial characteristics,
education and personal income; (2) economy, including projected manpower needs;
and (3) accessibility to the state's institutions of higher education. Section
III deals with enrollment trends in the different types of institutions of higher
education, and Section IV discusses the 22 recommendations. The last section
reviews the causes of student unrest and suggests appropriate responses. (AF)
Connolly, K., L. McDermid, et al. (1996). From Classroom to Cell Blocks: How
Prison Building Affects Higher Education and African American Enrollment in
California. California: 16.
From 1984 to 1994, the state of California constructed 19 prisons and only one
state university, according to this report presented by the Justice Policy Institute.
The report suggests on the basis of that data and other findings that the state
of California has made financial and budget policy decisions which work against
African Americans, and that prison building has become a priority while higher
education has lost ground in the areas of state budget, number of jobs, affordability,
construction of new institutions, population increases, and salaries for professionals.
It is argued that African American communities have suffered as a result. Compounding
the problem, a public university education is becoming less affordable. Grants
have decreased, and tax dollars spent on various budget items reflect increasingly
higher proportions spent on corrections. The trend is expected to continue in
the next decade. The report suggests implementing policies that will limit growth
of the prison population, and shifting budget priorities to promote affordability
and accessibility of higher education, particularly for African Americans. (HB)
Conrad, B. and P. Nordstrom (1997). From On-Site to Distance Education: A High
Wire Act in Innovation and Leadership. Canada Alberta: 8.
In response to demands to incorporate distance delivery and technology into
education to increase access and decrease costs, Mount Royal College in Alberta,
Canada, has developed a multi-modal model of distance delivery to enhance learning.
The model includes eight modes of distance instruction, each with its benefits
and challenges to implementation. Paper-based distance education material is
flexible, inexpensive to produce, and user friendly, but dependence on surface
mail for distribution can be expensive and complex. Audio and videotapes are
also produced and purchased by the college, while these methods also face problems
related to delayed booking by students, slow surface mail, and late returns.
Audio-teleconferencing represents a highly effective method of increasing interaction
among learners and instructors, but may involve high long distance charges for
telephone lines, while video-conferencing also increases interaction but may
also be limited by high costs. Telephone teaching involves student-teacher interaction
on a one-to-one personal level, with specific instructor hours devoted to telephone
contact. Digital technology eliminates surface mail and increases accessibility
for some students but also requires experts and student access to the technology.
In implementing these innovative programs, college leaders have had to manage
daily operations, as well as understand the impact of innovations on programs.
Leaders have also been called upon to act as pioneers, problem-solvers, consultants,
cheerleaders, role models, mentors, and coaches. (TGI)
Conseil des Colleges Quebec (Quebec).[BBB29058] (1990). Vers l'an 2000: Les
priorites de developpement de l'enseignement collegial. Document de consultation
(Towards the Year 2000: Priorities for the Development of College Instruction.
Consultation Document). Canada Quebec: 79.
Designed to open debate about the future of Quebec's community college system,
Colleges of General and Professional Education (CEGEP), this report offers projections
about the characteristics of Quebec society in the year 2000, explores the mission
of the community college system, and considers issues related to the administration
of the CEGEP. Part 1 describes Quebec in the year 2000, providing facts, data,
and hypotheses related to the anticipated demographic and economic situation,
social and cultural characteristics, and scientific and technological developments.
In part 2, the mission of the community colleges and ways of achieving that
mission are discussed. The educational mission is considered in terms of current
educational and training needs, college clientele, traditional college-age and
adult enrollments, student characteristics, accessibility, college instruction,
diverse types of programs, transfer and vocational education, and college outcomes.
This section also briefly discusses two other college missions: community service
and research. Part 3 focuses on management issues, including: (1) the legal
foundations of the governance system; (2) the distribution of the colleges throughout
the province; (3) program administration; (4) college administrative structures;
(5) human resource management; (6) financial resource management; and (7) private
colleges. Throughout the report, each major section concludes with a series
of questions posed by the CEGEP's Council of Colleges for further discussion.
(AC)
Conseil des Colleges Quebec (Quebec).[BBB29058] (1993). La creation du CEGEP
Marie-Victorin. Avis a la ministre de l'enseignement superieur et de la Science
(The Creation of CEGEP Marie-Victorin. Advisory to the Minister of Higher Education
and Science). Canada Quebec: 34.
A rationale is provided by the Council of Colleges for transforming Marie-Victorin
College from a private institution into a public college of general and professional
education (CEGEP). The council's analysis covers four areas: (1) access to postsecondary
education, examined in light of demographic trends, geographic accessibility,
adult education, and gender equity; (2) Marie-Victorin College, including a
history of college since its formation in 1965 by six religious communities,
an overview of the financial difficulties of the college, and data on enrollments
and financial problems of other private colleges in Quebec; (3) instructional
programs to be offered at CEGEP Marie-Victorin, including information on technical
programs already available, enrollment projections, and new programs planned;
and (4) anticipated costs. Observations about the availability of and demand
for particular social technology programs, the first implementation of a fashion
program in a public CEGEP, and the need for the college and ministry of education
to develop a position on Marie-Victorin College's existing dietitian and computer
science programs are also included. The report concludes with a series of recommendations
underscoring the need for additional demographic and needs assessment studies,
the need to improve the college-going rates of high school students, the need
to increase enrollments in technical programs and coordinate the curricula of
Montreal's CEGEP's, and the difficulty of implementing seven new programs in
one year. (AC)
Cook, T. M. and F. J. Laski "Beyond Davis: Equality of Opportunity for
Higher Education for Disabled Students under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973."
Harvard Civil Rights-Civil Liberties Law Review. v15 n2 p415-73 Fall 1981.
Effects of Section 504 on college applicants and students are considered: recruitment
and admission policies, integration of disabled students, provision of effective
and meaningful services, physical accessibility. Regulation supporting the legislation
is found essentially correct in interpretation. Journal availability: Wm. S.
Hein & Co., 1285 Main St., Buffalo, NY 14209, $5.00. (MSE)
Coombs, N. "The Computer as the Great Communicator." Technological
Horizons in Education. v17 n1 p57-58 Aug 1989.
Discussed is the use of microcomputers, networks, speech synthesizers, and electronic
mail to help impaired students and faculty communicate. A telecourse is described.
Accessibility is emphasized. (CW)
Coonin, B. "Establishing Accessibility for E-Journals: A Suggested Approach."
Library Hi Tech. v20 n2 p207-20 2002.
Examines 11 electronic research journals for accessibility to users with visual
or mobility impairments and suggests that librarians need to consider accessibility
issues. Discusses the Americans with Disabilities Act and the Rehabilitation
Act (1998); usability and universal design; accessibility errors; following
links; browser compatibility; and output formats. (LRW)
Coons, M. E. and M. E. Milner (1978). Creating an Accessible Campus. District
of Columbia: 151.
This book was developed to help administrators meet the challenge of compliance
with the regulations implementing Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973.
All colleges, universities, and other organizations that are funded by the Department
of Health, Education, and Welfare (HEW) have until June 3, 1980, to make structural
modifications necessary to make their programs fully accessible to handicapped
persons. Programs are to be accessible now in all cases in which structural
modifications are not necessary. Nine chapters and an introduction trace the
steps in developing a program for accessibility, from understanding what constitutes
a barrier in the built environment to specific recommendations on site and building
design and design of science laboratories. The functional relationships between
various disabilities and the use of the environment are described. Design requirements
associated with these functional relationships are described and illustrated.
State of the art information about instructional aids is broken down into three
groups: instructional aids for the mobility impaired, aids for students with
sight disabilities, and aids for students with hearing disabilities. The final
chapter discusses resource and funding sources. (Author/MLF)
Corbett, H. D. "School Context, the Field Researcher Role, and Achieving
Data Comparability in Multisite Research." Anthropology and Education
Quarterly. v15 n3 p202-10 Fall 1984.
School context constrains and supports field researchers' data collection activities,
just as it can influence the educational change processes being studied. For
outsiders, the accessibility of a school is affected by a number of factors.
These influence findings and have implications for achieving data comparability
across several sites. (Author/KH)
Corcoran, C. K. and S. D. Corcoran (2002). ACCESSIBLE WEB SITES: WHY THEY'RE
IMPORTANT AND WHERE TO BEGIN. About Campus, Jossey-Bass, A Registered
Trademark of Wiley Periodicals, Inc., A Wiley Company. 7: 21.
Discusses factors needed to make Web sites accessible to each and every user
in higher education institutions. Choices in Web site design that will assist
all users; Influence of software and design on accessibility; Accessibility
software features that have been added to commonly used development and Web-based
programs; World Wide Web Consortium's (W3C) comprehensive set of accessibility
guidelines for Web designers.
Corporation for Public Broadcasting Washington DC.[BBB03351] (1993). Lifelines
of Learning: Distance Education and America's Rural Schools. A Report to the
103rd Congress and the American People Pursuant to Pub. L. 102-356. District
of Columbia: 108.
This document responds to the Public Telecommunications Act of 1992 directing
the Corporation for Public Broadcasting (CPB) to report on prospects for distance
learning projects to assist rural schools. Based on a literature review, case
studies, and two audio conferences with leading educators and distance learning
providers, the report focuses on the most effective use of existing public telecommunication
facilities to establish and implement distance learning projects in rural areas.
Chapters cover: (1) the predicament of rural schools in providing quality educational
programs; (2) the state of distance education today in relation to accessibility,
distribution, interactivity, curriculum, teacher training, attitudes, effectiveness,
and funding; (3) what distance education can offer rural areas; (4) overcoming
financial and pedagogical barriers to serving rural schools with distance education;
(5) six case studies of rural distance education programs highlighting the important
roles of the Public Broadcasting Service and public television stations; (6)
an overview of technologies that serve as integral components of proposed distance
education programs; and (7) recommendations on distance learning services tailored
to the needs of rural schools and on greater use of public broadcasting facilities
in the provision of those services. This report contains 220 references, a listing
of audio conference participants, and nationwide services in distance education.
(LP)
Corrado, T. and M. E. Colfer (1982). Sourcebook: Disabled Student Services.
New York: 159.
Designed for use by coordinators of disabled student services at New York State
two-year colleges, this sourcebook represents a compendium of ideas, recommendations,
facts, problems, and solutions related to serving disabled two-year college
students. Introductory remarks describing the sourcebook's purpose and New York's
Disabled Student Project are followed by background information regarding concerns
and resources, trends and projections, and barriers to working with disabled
students. Subsequent sections cover: (1) the legal rights of disabled students
as stated by Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973; (2) identification
of disabled students; (3) attitudes of and toward disabled individuals; (4)
access and safety concerns, such as program accessibility, barrier-free design,
adapted equipment and techniques, laboratory safety practices, evacuation of
disabled persons, first aid, and access to vocational education; (5) instructional
accommodations for disabled students including those with mobility, emotional,
learning, visual, speech, and hearing impairments; (6) career planning issues,
including affirmative action, equal employment rights, job training, employer
concerns, and tips for job seekers; (7) selected programs, projects, and publications
of specific community colleges in the state; and (8) information resources,
including organizations and associations, periodicals and newsletters, audiovisual
materials, media distribution centers, funding sources, and resource centers.
(LL)
Correa, V. I. "Cultural Accessibility of Services for Culturally Diverse
Clients with Disabilities and Their Families." Rural Special Education
Quarterly. v11 n2 p6-12 1992.
Dissonance and conflict occur when the culture of a service delivery system
differs greatly from a disabled client's culture. Strategies are outlined for
adapting services to match culturally diverse client needs. Examples focus on
rehabilitation services and special education for visually impaired Hispanic
Americans. Contains 20 references. (SV)
Corson, P. and S. Martin (2000). Quality: Canadian Style. Canada Ontario:
14.
This paper offers a brief outline of current Canadian research contributing
to the understanding of quality in early child care and education, and highlights,
as a means of demonstrating elements of high quality, a range of early childhood
care and education programs, policies, and practices offered in Canada. Three
separate components of Canadian practice are described: (1) the comprehensive
new family policy in Quebec, which increases the accessibility of child care;
(2) the provision of multi-age groupings that include infants and toddlers in
Ontario; and (3) the creation of a Family Development Centre in downtown Toronto
designed to meet the diverse needs of parents and children. The paper notes
that all three of these components reveal a research-based approach to ensuring
that the concepts of quality are evolving. (Author/EV)
Costick, R. M. C. (1978). Nonsexist Career Counseling for Women: Annotated Selected
References and Resources. Part I: 31.
This two-part bibliography on nonsexist career counseling for women is designed
to provide resources for counselors, counselor educators, teachers, and others
desiring to facilitate positive, nonstereotyped career awareness and development
of women at secondary and postsecondary educational levels. Adolescent and adult
women seeking career counseling resources should also find specific sections
useful. The materials were selected primarily for their direct relevance to
women's educational equity in the realm of career counseling, for their recency,
and for their accessibility to potential users. The first part, presented here,
contains information on counselor training and professional development, counseling
resources, career interest measurements, and minority women. The section on
minority women is primarily a compilation of the entries related to minority
women found in other sections throughout the two-part bibliography on career
counseling. (Author)
Costick, R. M. C. (1978). Nonsexist Career Counseling for Women: Annotated Selected
References and Resources. Part II: 36.
This two-part bibliography on nonsexist career counseling for women is designed
to provide resources for counselors, counselor educators, teachers, and others
desiring to facilitate positive, nonstereotyped career awareness and development
of women at secondary and postsecondary educational levels. Adolescent and adult
women seeking career counseling resources should also find specific sections
useful. Materials were selected primarily for their direct relevance to women's
educational equity in the realm of career counseling, for their recency, and
for their accessibility to potential users. The second part, presented here,
provided resources on women and work, women in specific occupations and professions,
and programs related to women's career preparation/training. (Author)
Cotler, S. R. (1981). Construction Guidelines and Specifications. Modifying
the Existing Campus Building for Accessibility. District of Columbia: 103.
To address problems that the campus faces when attempting to make facility modifications
that meet federal handicap accessibility requirements, this guidebook gives
guidance on requirements and methods of "retrofitting" that meet the
mobility needs of the disabled. Seven chapters discuss modifications to site,
entrance, doors, interior circulation, restrooms, drinking fountains, and special
spaces. Each chapter is further divided into three sections. The first section
uses a mandatory evaluation requirements checklist, drawings, and text to aid
in evaluation of existing facilities to see if they provide accessibility for
the disabled. The second section presents architectural construction drawings
as solutions to common problems found in existing facilities. The drawings can
also be used in new construction. The third section includes architectural specifications.
An appendix discusses useful tools and procedures for the facility survey. (DCS)
Cotler, S. R. (1981). Modifying the Existing Campus Building for Accessibility:
Accessible Products Catalog. District of Columbia: 127.
This catalog is intended to assist architects and college administrators to
select products that help physically handicapped people lead lives free of architectural
barriers. The product information, obtained directly from the manufacturers,
is listed on comparative matrix sheets, that can be used to achieve the design
recommendations. Products of a proprietary nature are listed towards the end
of the catalog and are referenced to their appropriate categories. The catalog
layout generally follows the major divisions of the Construction Specifications
Institute design criteria. A list of manufacturers is provided. Products include:
handrails, exterior doors/entrances, accessible thresholds, power operators
for doors, power assists for doors, manual door closers, door handles and panic
devices, anti-slip floor coverings, kitchen appliances, kitchen sinks, lavatories,
toilet seat risers, towel dispensers, lever or blade faucets, mirrors, prefab
shower compartments, shower fixtures, shower and bathtub seats, signage, laboratory
equipment, classroom equipment, swimming pool lifts, telephone enclosures, furniture,
elevators, vertical wheelchair lifts, inclined wheelchair lifts, water coolers
and fountains, van modification, accessible buses with lifts, and telephone
typewriters. (GLR)
Cotler, S. R. (1991). Removing the Barriers: Accessibility Guidelines and
Specifications. Virginia.
This guide provides guidelines for meeting the accessibility requirements of
the Americans with Disabilities (ADA) Act in college and university buildings.
The publication is divided into 10 chapters, the first 7 of which present construction
drawings, evaluation criteria, and specifications for: (1) site accessibility
(external path of travel, curbing, parking); (2) the building entrance; (3)
doors, (4) interior circulation, (5) restrooms and bathing facilities, (6) drinking
fountains and pay telephones, and (7) special spaces and equipment (such as
dormitories, kitchens, dining halls, libraries). Mandatory evaluation requirements
are noted at the beginning of each chapter. The eighth chapter provides guidance
for facilities inventory and evaluation. It discusses surveying for barriers
and includes a detailed facilities survey instrument. Chapter 9 discusses other
accessibility issues including cost effectiveness, communication, construction
supervision, and program implementation. Chapter 10 lists additional resources
including 57 organizations that can provide information about accessibility.
There are also 105 construction detail line drawings (e.g., typical curb range
details, accessible door handles, typical sleep/study room for two persons)
and a glossary of definitions taken from the Americans with Disabilities Act.
(Contains 59 references.) (JLS)
Cottingham, T. and L. Cooper "Southern Appalachia: A Special Challenge."
New Directions for Community Colleges. 3, 2, 19-26, Sum 75.
An informal survey of administrative personnel at six community colleges in
North Carolina elicited perceptions of the characteristics of the Southern Appalachian
people, their socioeconomic condition, their cultural influences, and the importance
of community college accessibility and transportation. Implications for community
college governance are reviewed. (DC)
Council for Exceptional Children Reston VA. Center for Special Education Technology.[BBB23831]
(1989). Selecting Software. Tech Use Guide: Using Computer Technology. Virginia:
4.
One of nine brief guides for special educators on using computer technology,
this guide focuses on the selection of software for use in the special education
classroom. Four types of software used for computer assisted instruction are
briefly described: tutorials; drill and practice; educational games; and simulations.
The increasing use of tool software systems (word processing, spreadsheet, and
database systems) in educational settings is noted. An educational value is
also seen in arcade and adventure games, which may be modified if necessary
to increase their accessibility to students with disabilities. Specific criteria
for evaluating software are offered in the areas of content, demands on the
learner, instructional presentation, technical features, and documentation and
management features. Four periodicals which regularly review software, six resources
for public domain software, and six directories of software are listed. (DB)
Council for Exceptional Children Reston VA. Policy Research Center.[BBB18282]
(1980). Policy Issues for Assuring the Delivery of Continuing Education Programs
for Handicapped Persons. Virginia: 12.
Policy issues concerned with the provision of continuing education programs
to adult handicapped persons are examined. The current availability of only
a few continuing education programs is noted, and a definition of continuing
education is offered. Specific policy considerations are listed for the three
areas of commonality in programing: accessibility, specially designed instruction,
and cooperative community planning. Five guiding principles for policy development
include: the factor that most differentiates continuing education from elementary
and secondary education is the power of the individual to have decision making
authority; it is important that handicapped individuals have available to them
the wide range of programmatic options that are available to nonhandicapped
individuals; and an administrative unit should be created at all levels to advocate
and guide the development of a comprehensive program. A model of continuing
education charting curricular areas against service progression is offered.
(DB)
Council for Exceptional Children Reston VA. Teacher Education Div.[BBB22727]
(1987). Roundtable on Special Education Technology in the Higher Education Curriculum.
Virginia: 403.
This compilation of materials addresses the use of computers as a tool for instruction,
management, communication, and personal productivity in special education. Recommendations
are presented for establishing or revising special education technology training
programs; recommendations deal with educational need, assumptions, goals, program
model, content, support systems, finances, resources, materials, integration,
personnel, evaluation, and accessibility. Then, descriptions of special education
technology training programs are presented from 23 colleges and universities.
Each program description is accompanied by samples of course materials, such
as course descriptions, course objectives, course syllabi, student/teacher contracts,
workshop materials on cooperative learning and computers, educational program
competencies, a training model for higher education in special education technology,
information on a switch-building workshop, and a paper by Ted Hasselbring titled
"Effective Microcomputer Training and Implementation." A prototype
training module is presented for integrating technology into special education
teacher preparation courses. The module, which focuses on teaching with crossword
puzzles, describes formats of crossword puzzles, their uses in several content
areas, and their creation through use of computer software. Also included are
the "Code of Ethical Conduct for Computer-Using Educators," developed
by the International Council for Computers in Education, and a "Microcomputing
Competency Self-Assessment for Special Education Professors." (JDD)
Council of Europe Strasbourg (France).[BBB03201] (1990). Nature Museums: Tools
for Learning about, Promoting, and Protecting the Natural Heritage of Europe.
Proceedings of the Seminar Organised by the Council of Europe in Collaboration
with The International Council of Museums (Strasbourg, September 27-29, 1989).
Environmental Encounters Series, No. 9. France: 74.
The history of museology over the last century suggests that, in general, the
founding of a new natural history museum is rarely the result of planning within
the cultural policy field, a situation contrary to what occurs in the history
of art museums. This lack of planning with respect to natural history museums
has several causes, particularly in Europe, including: a narrow cultural view
of science; a lack of importance being attached to the role of these museums
in promoting environmental awareness and proper land-use; and lack of capital
investment since natural history museums are most often not tourist attractions.
Reported here are the activities surrounding the Seminar on Natural Museums
in Strasbourg during September, 1989. The main theme of this seminar was spotlighting
the current museological revolution in terms of public accessibility, of techniques
to stimulate and connect community action, of the recognition of an expanding
social role, about new career opportunities, and about the creation of partnerships
with environmental management agencies. Included in this document are: (1) an
introduction detailing the rationale and purpose of the seminar; and (2) a summary
of the speaker presentations and group discussions outlined by preamble and
major themes, sub-themes and discussions, and proposals for follow-up activities
including the conclusions and final declarations. Appendices, which make up
the bulk of the document, include: a list of seminar participants with contact
information; the official seminar program; the draft of recommendations to member
common market states on the role of museums in environmental education, information,
and training; texts of speeches, presentations, and reports; and photocopies
of several reviews from the print media in Europe. (JJK)
Council of Ontario Universities Toronto.[BBB06876] (1971). Accessibility and
Student Aid: 163.
This document presents a comprehensive review of undergraduate student aid programs
at provincially assisted universities in Ontario, with emphasis on accessibility
to higher education. It was the purpose of the Subcommittee on Student Aid to
determine the bes